Home

Teledyne 703E Photo Scanner User Manual

Contents

1.
2. 5V 5V 1C102 A 1C102 D 102 C107 5V 1C103 A V C106 V V F 45 5 74AC00D a 74 000 1 2 74ACT32 tV cios 15 I 15pp V 45V 45V 0101 102 1 2 1 103 0 C118 9 end 100nF 100nF 74 138 5 m 03 s CS8900A CQ o00MHz 16 74ACT32 4K99 57 57 Als 1 1C102 B 11 x39 sms X X DDDDAAA ses R111 A16 2 14 5 34 T T VVVVVVV 4K99 B mee eres 00 2885118 mL E x 4 74ACT32 2 REFRESH 5 CE R112 5V C103 C128 8 07 YE 5 5 x5 liocunbv 499R 1 1DS101 S 100nF 100nF Ye x 5 e 1C103 C 8 100 K ACT 4 GND 1C102 C 74ACT32 2 tow 74 000 8 28 MEMR R113
3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 VCCO DIGITAL OUTPUTS RNIO 510x8 022 PS2702 4 7 1 16 C82 19 10000 2 NS 15 79 81 SHDN U24 3 T4 DIGIO2 OE 4 up 13 143 CLK 3 12 2 as DO 2 Di Ql 19 6 NS 11 74HC32 D1 3 18 7 10 2 18 gE ub TEM D3 5 16 8 WK 9 J1017 D4 04 D4 6 D5 Q5 15 1 DS Poe 5 D6 8 D7 07 13 3 STATUS OUTPUTS D7 9 D8 08 12 U25 IE 148 4 3 lt D 0 7 gt wh 15 14 TEC 12 10 11 x 10 84 C86 ME TERMBLOCK 12 Ny p x C83 C85 FE BEAD cor 10000 pF C27 RESETTABLE FUSE 0 3A 60V VCC ME D6 F1 VCC FE BEAD RNI2 510x8 DIODE SCHOTTKY EXT 5 OUT U26 PS2702 4 E 1 16 SHDN 15 Ju 3 14 es one 5 D L52 10000 pF ow OW gt B STATUS OUTPUTS DO 2 DI Ql 19 6 11 74HC32 D1 3 18 7 10 C87 C89 10000pF D2 7 D 17 1018 93 gt L51 FE BEAD D3 5 16 8 Ny 9 D4 Q4 D4 6 D5 05 15 1 1 D5 ih 14 __ __ 2 D6 Q6 2 D6 E 57 07 13 3 5 D7 9 D8 Q8 12 U28 PS2702 4 156 4 4 1 16 5 5 6 2 Sh 15 5 14 s 155 9__ RET 4 13 10 GND 5 12 C92 TERMBLOCK 10 6 b 11 94 7 10 10000 pF C93 Title Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702 Size Number Revision Orcad B 05703 A Date 17 Jun 2008 Sheet Tof 8 File N WPcbmgr 05701 dn E motherboard
4. 173 10 7 Adjustment or Replacement of Ozone Generator UV 174 11 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR OF THE M703E CALIBRATOR 177 Ll L General Troubleshooting cs 2 oett te Ai teen eie tal 177 11 1 1 Fault Diagnosis with WARNING 178 11 1 2 Fault Diagnosis With Test 180 11 1 3 Using the Diagnostic Signal I O 182 11 2 Using the Analog Output Test 183 11 3 Using the Internal Electronic Status LEDS sss eene 184 11 3 1 CPU Status IndICator baee ee e pear D peek A 184 11 3 2 Relay Status LEDS ec vig cach ee ede deb acce ee e ide e idee dc 184 11 3 2 1 C Bus Watchdog Status edere dede doe edad eed dae 184 11 3 2 2 Ox Status LEDS ree eet Au bee eerta de ale 185 11 4 Subsystem Checkout itte eter Pe endet eene bed 186 11 4 1 Verify Subsystem enne nnne nennen enn 186 11 42 SAG Main o UM a M ep at eee EUER Defensa 186 11 4 3 DO Power
5. M703E REGULATOR PRESSURE TO OUTPUT FLOW PSIG LPM 0 0 000 1 0 676 2 1 214 3 1 659 4 2 071 5 2 463 6 2 816 7 3 178 8 3 536 9 3 851 10 4 166 15 5 744 20 7 282 25 8 755 30 10 254 35 11 695 40 13 146 The calculated OUTPUT FLOW value is viewable on the instrument s front panel using the OUTPUT FLOW test function and can be output via the M703E s TEST CHANNEL using the OUTPUT FLOW function 128 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual M703E Calibration and Verification 8 4 1 CALIBRATING THE PHOTOMETER S SAMPLE GAS FLOW NOTE The procedure described in this section requires an independent calibrated gas flow meter monitor be connected to the EXHAUST fitting on the back of the M703E During the PHOTO FLOW calibration the M703E software automatically turns the DC pump downstream from the photometer ON To perform a PHOTO FLOW calibration press Make sure that the M703E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ SETUP L PRIMARY SETUP MENU An external flow O3 SEQ MORE meter is needed to perform this operation SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM DIAG ENTER PASSWORD 8 1 8 ENTR 2 Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD gt SIGNAL VO PREV NEXT Continue pressing NEXT until FLOW CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR WAITING FOR FLOW ACTUAL PHOTO FLOW 1 000 LPM 1 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting
6. 0 PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT uruw 001 1002 4 NOINN INTERNAL VENT GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD Figure 10 2 Pneumatic setup for performing Pressure Leak Checks 170 05744 RevB TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures 10 3 CLEANING OR REPLACING THE ABSORPTION TUBE NOTE Although this procedure should never be needed as long as the user is careful only to supply the photometer with clean dry and particulate free zero air it is included here for those rare occasions when cleaning or replacing the absorption tube may be required 1 Remove the center cover from the optical bench 2 Unclip the sample thermistor from the tube 3 Loosen the two screws on the round tube retainers at either end of the tube 4 Using both hands carefully rotate the tube to free it 5 Slide the tube towards the lamp housing e The front of the tube can now be slid past the detector block and out of the instrument CAUTION DO NOT CAUSE THE TUBE TO BIND AGAINST THE METAL HOUSINGS THE TUBE MAY BREAK AND CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY Clean the tube with Distilled or de ionized water by running a swab from end to end Air dry the tube Check the cleaning job by looking down the bore of the tube e t should be free from dirt and lint 9 Inspect the o rings that seal the ends of the optical tube the
7. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Name Name 04524 pl sch 04524 p2 sch Name 04524 p3 sch Title M100E 200E 400E RELAY PCA SCHEMATIC p Number 04522 Revision Date 16 May 2007 SheetO of 0 File N SPCBMGR04522cc source 04522 By 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 General Trace Width Requirements 1 5V and 2 VCC should be 15 mil 2 Digitial grounds should be at least 20 mils 3 12V and 12V return should be 30 mils 4 All AC lines AC Line AC Neutral 4 All signals on JP2 should be 30 mils wide with 120 mil AC Neutral isolation creepage distance around them 5 Traces between J7 J12 should be top and bottom and at least 140 mils 6 Traces to the test points can be as small as 10 mils RELAYO RELAY2 K3 27 _ 2 RELAY2 4 2 Heater Config Jumper Je AC Neutral F2 4A PTC INTERRUPTOR 4A PTC INTERRUPTOR SN74HC04 O12 O13 U2B 014 015 DD4 6A RECTIFIER DDI 6A RECTIFIER VALVEO VALVEI VALVE2 VALVE3 DD2 15V TVS DL4148 TPI TP2 TPS TP6 7 DGND 5V AGND 15V 15 12RT 12V MTHR BRD SYNC DEMOD SPARE EE B REV AUTH DATE J8 9 J12 13 10 3 02 CE MARK
8. 49 6 5 2 Adding Sequence Steps 50 6 5 2 1 The Generate 51 0 5 2 2 The STAND B Y Step rire Oeo RE Rn RED SES 52 05 2 3 The DURATION Step is i er PRISE 52 6 5 2 4 Thie EXEGSEQY Step ide Or REA ime ERE E 53 6 5 2 5 Ihe CG OUTPUT STOP e exa bee P p aas 54 6 5 2 6 Deleting or Editing an Individual Step a Sequence 55 6 5 3 Deleting SEQUENCE asa ERE TRIER 56 6 65 ai taie leitete 57 6 7 CLK t eet breite oit aen ten resta alite tot ord tribe Tu 58 6 7 1 Setting the internal Clock s Time and 58 6 7 2 Adjusting the internal Clock s 59 6 9 SETUP PASSI ocu mata omi E t RU INE 60 6 9 SETUP gt DIAG gt TEST CHAN OUTPUT Using the TEST Channel Analog Output 62 6 9 1 Configuring the TEST CHANNEL Analog 62 6 9 1 1 The Analog I O Configuration 5 62 6 9 1 2 Selecting a Test Channel Function to 1 64 6 9 1 3 TEST CHANNEL VOLTAGE RANGE
9. 125 Figure 8 4 Generator Pressure Monitor Point Physical Location 7 126 Figure 8 5 Output Flow Calibration Monitor 130 Figure 9 1 Location of Gas Flow Control 135 Figure 9 2 M703E Electronic Block enne nnns 137 Figure 9 3 M703E CPU Board 138 Figure 9 4 Relay Board PCA with AC Relay Retainer 140 Figure 9 5 Heater Control Loop Block 141 Figure 9 6 Status LED Locations Relay 141 Figure 9 7 M703E Power Distribution Block 145 Figure 9 8 Location of the AC Configuration Jumper for the Dry Air 146 Figure 9 9 Pump AC Power Jumpers eerie secessit e ede a e ni NE a 147 Figure 9 10 M703E Front Panel naa nennen nns 147 Figure 9 11 Keyboard and Display Interface Block 149 Figure 9 12 Schematic of Basic Software 150 Figure 9 13 Generator Internal ee ent 151 Figure 9 14 Generator Valve and Gas Fi
10. 0621 SS3Hd 1 H1N3 0 0 0 10 8 lt aes deis ooo SS3Hd TUE 10 00071 TVNLOV Sins Rie SE sn Au ynos 009 Joy 1 ON SHA AW 00S Jejus uBnouu o YOd ONILIVM LNYd LIGA 134d SNI 55 se 195 6 9599 6 8 c L eunpeooud T uneqieo DISd 82121 558 LNANTIC IVOd 0 E NU W dni3s SLNd WO a oiseg ovid MS SIS 8987 2 L dnldS AHVQNOOSS 996 hie an bi iun x Andino NOILVHS8ITVO NOILVHSITVO NOILVHSITVO NOILVYNDISNOD 1fdinO 1S3L Jjunssaud N35 20 DOTWNY LXAN 31vH3N39 si 818 GHYOMSSVd 3HON 135 s 10j amp 1edQ 1012291122 3202 0 2 UOISJ9A a1eMYOS Nuayy 1 XIGN3ddV ANAGIA TAL 6 V 60 ieuondo Savan 7A7 135 AMVININd 7 V JojeJeueP eu Jo
11. 3 4 5 6 15V 15V DACMUX C36 0 15 uF ceramic C37 0 15 uF ceramic TEMPMUX 74HC32 DI 51 2 52 S3 D4 vce INT NS 12 5 M DG444DY 15V U23 BYPASS CAPS IN OUT 5 MUST BE WITHIN ON OFFENC x 1 2 OF THE 6 REGULATOR INPUT OUTPUT P2981IMS PINS s U48 MAX382CWN OUT VSS GND IN 1 V IN2 ENB IN3 IN4 Al INS A2 IN RS IN7 WR IN8 5 C60 10 uF 35 TANTALUM 5 R 127 THERMISTER 4 5 THERMISTERI i 6 THERMISTER2 x 7 THERMISTER3 6 8 THERMISTER4 7 13 a 25 THERMISTERS ___ 5 12 THERMISTERS a 3 THERMISTER7 THERMISTERG 7 10 ____THERMISTER8 THERMISTERS 12 13 14 MICROFIT 14 Title Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702 Size Number Revision Orcad 05703 A Date 17 Jun 2008 Sheet 5f 8 File N WPcbmgr 05701 dn E motherboard gen4 5diraw Bla DDB 6 CONTROL INPUTS RN3 TP7 510x8 ULL DES 012 mA gt p DIGIOO PS2702 4
12. 174 Example of Signal Function ttn to dette 182 GPU Status Indicator ced ed pede 184 Relay PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting em 185 Location of DC Power Test Points on Relay eene 187 Critical Flow Restrictor Assembly 202 JTriboclectric Charging 2 a terete dete een a ada enna anion 205 Basic anti ESD Work Station dicas Re seis FEE ee eee 207 Figure 12 2 LIST OF TABLES Table 2 1 M7OSE Analytical Specifications gto iore inae ire n delicet ai e d elite oues 5 Table 2 2 M703E Electrical and Physical Specifications enm emen 5 Table 2 3 M703E Specifications for Ozone 6 Table 2 4 M703E Specifications for Photometer sss eene eene nennen nennen nnns 6 Table 3 1 Status Output ooi rtr rit o EIER EUREN MSIE KIEL Le 14 Table 3 2 M703E Control Input Pin Assignments sssssssseee NEA nennen enne nnns 15 Table 3 3 M703E Control Input Pin Assignments osne aaa enne 17 Table 3 4 Front Panel Display during System 22 Table 3 5 Possible Warning Messages at 23 Table 6 1 Test Functions Defined aati
13. 9599 3 6601 eq 5 01 sunjeJ ULNA IN IN H H pue eo 62 12 dALAS So ee sideooy y uow jo Jeak 2 eui 195 eui 195 ay 195 0 Shay Q3AVS NOILVYNSIANOD shay esau 2 6601 shay 2660 660 AHOLOV ILVA e Se An SII QUOD L LT 3 NOISIASY SO 8 ay 10 uonisod 1sn pe s ANI 3 sigadde NOISIA33 35 1305 dIH2 NOISIAAY ANVSI T e ULNA NOW a a NOISIA33 334VM LJOS e TVIH3S e IN6 V2 40138 Luvd e THGOW e Q 10 pesn 51541 AW 109 9S 0 Say JO ouo SS Jd 0062 0 O jeuondo ay jo _t _ 33 LSND LOHd rav 3GOlN n TS 3G Hd W dnias 430 nueuqns 35Nano3s S AUVGNODAS 995 E NO gt nus V dnias Antia s SSVd 949 1045 O 45185 NIVIN enuen s 10je1ed
14. ee ee AAPECOm ee Figure 7 8 APICOM Remote Control Program Interface NOTE APICOM is included free of cost with the calibrator and the latest versions can also be downloaded for free at http www teledyne api com software apicom The M703E calibrator is fully supported by APICOM revision 3 9 4 and later Instruments with the LEADS support option must run APICOM revision 4 0 and later 05744 Rev B 111 TELEDYNE API Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual USER NOTES 112 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual M703E Calibration and Verification 8 M703E CALIBRATION AND VERIFICATION Basic electronic calibration of the M703E Calibrator is performed at the factory Normally there is no need to perform this factory calibration in the field however the performance of several of the instruments key subsystems should be verified periodically and if necessary adjusted These subsystems are O Photometer The photometer performance should be periodically verified against an external standard see Section 8 1 e Os Generator The generator should be periodically calibrated see Section 8 2 8 1 VERIFYING AND CALIBRATING THE M703E S O PHOTOMETER The accuracy of calibration gas produced by the 7 depends entirely on the accuracy of the photometer therefore it is very imp
15. e hens ROM e aee epoca 187 vi 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Table of Contents TE AX C att oie a be tts 188 11 4 5 Keyboard Display Interface nnt EE dee Ee EE n 188 1 91 46 Relay PORA venir a iri 189 11 4 7 PHOTOMETER Generator Pressure FLOW SENSOR Assembly 189 14 4 8 s oit t REC im tica tee ee de pe tee E REDE Po DO eese ein 191 11 4 8 A D FUNCIONS 191 11 4 8 2 Test Channel Analog Outputs emen 191 11 4 8 3 otatus Outputs tero TE le P dine ice etin itera 192 11 4 8 4 Control Inputs ob neret I ed rene vere t een E 193 11 4 9 5 Control re CER GER ete M Le 194 oe 194 11 4 10 RS 232 Communications ete Ree rr ER Fer er ERR Dep d D ERR TEM REM epu 195 11 4 10 1 General RS 232 Troubleshooting sse eene 195 11 4 10 2 Troubleshooting Calibrator Modem or Terminal 195 11 4 11 Temperature 5 ae e ER eee 196 11 4 11 1 Box Chassis
16. saa1 1 V XIGNAddV IdV 3NAG3 13 60 solseg nueuiqns Ovid nue 135 AHVONOO3S g V 4 31VH3N39 S si nue AAO S TWO 1 eui 1 sjeedde juo jueunsn pe pei2ejes si seDuei jo euo ji NMOG OOLN indui eui Jo AOL AS AL ALO uoneJqi e2 oine saenu 2 0 yndjno L 10 JasyO L 330 440 Wo e sies NO Wo 119554540 daivssrivo 01 ONOO OLOHd O 31 SISSVvHO H3lvaH dWvi OLOHd dWY1 21 5 Em 31dWAVS Andino 1591 3unssaud q31dWVvS sjuiod pue 2 LNO sindino Bojeue junss3sud HO1V1n93H Dojeue eui jo seyeniu L LNO jo uoneqie2 oine sejeniul 334 N39 O 434 OLOHd O Wo qo lt 146 13S eei v xipueddy ees 29 STVNDIS SDVLIOA 04 TIVNYZLNI 27 Ly qa1 11 07 qa OLNv ee aoNanoas 109135 1 33OW LNIVW 9 NAD O se NO
17. 001069070 pseogJeuyjoy 92 dO 001069070 pseogJeuyjoy 92 40 001069070 8 00000Sd OD SF LO SF LO CO O QN 92 dO 001060470 91 92 2 e90ro ndo OL 182 pueog Aejay 0000112 0 8 00000Sd 001060470 pueog ejau 42000005 001060470 pueog ejau ASh 42000005 001060470 pueog ejau 42000005 001060470 pueog ejau ASt 42000005 001062470 pueog ejau AS Z 00000Sd 0290 o to to io elelee 1 1 1 1 peoga oN TOO SELLO CO 00 001060470 000085270 peog ejau 591995 3 503 182 01945 0000921 70 0290 peoga 00008Scv0 105 007020290 peoga oN 00008Scv0 vas 0290 peoga 00008Scv0 00 020 50 007020290 peoga peoga oN 00008Scv0 001062970 peog 182 55529 0290 peoga 001062970 pueog 00 020 50 peoga 001062970 peog 199 1 007
18. FE Y OU 10 Remove the instrument cover Locate the photometer pump Disconnect the two fittings on the photometer pump and install a union fitting in place of the pump Locate the dry air pump Disconnect the two fittings on the dry air pump and install a union fitting in place of the pump Locate the photometer pump Disconnect the two fittings on the photometer pump and install a union fitting in place of the pump Pressurize the instrument with the leak checker allowing enough time to pressurize the instrument fully Check each fitting with soap bubble solution looking for bubbles e Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution Do not re apply vacuum as it will draw soap solution into the instrument and contaminate it e Do not exceed 15 psi pressure Once the leak has been located and repaired the leak down rate should be 1 in Hg 0 4 psi in 5 minutes after the pressure is shut off M703E Chassis DRY AIR IN PHOTOMETER BENCH O3 GAS INPUT PRESSURE SENSOR HOSN3S PHOTOMETER PRESSURE SENSOR O GEN PHOTOMETER PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR PCA uagsnu s TWODYVHD REF MEAS pur Valve E Flow Control 800 cm min asl iud gt SEDED PHOTOMETER ZERO IN Jo 3u02 4 os Jo 3u02 4 02 0101
19. w134 L H LH 499 O Bus 328uuo2481U 320 001060470 Aejay V 5 12850 O0LOTT w134 L H LH 499 O 00 020 50 peoga y oN VNVAS O0LOTT uJ8u H L H O 0290 Y HOLSINAH3H L 000010270 Wey 0290 peoga HOLSINH3HL 000010270 Wey 00 020 50 peoga y oN VNVAS 0000vT LYO wiy L H LH 0290 peoga HOLSINH3HL 000077170 UU L H LH dweq 0290 peoga y oN VNVAS 000077170 wiy H LH dweq 001060470 peog QN 000077170 001069070 wiy H LH dweq 001062470 pueog ejau l3H AcL 1015 182 pieius 001062 0 001069070 peoga dO 001069070 peoga oN 92 40 98y 001069070 pseoqJeuyjoy 92 dO 987 001069070 preoqueuiolX 92 dO 001069070 92 40 001069070 peoga oN 92 40 10 CN 001069070 p1eoqueuiolX 92 dO 001069070 pseOqJeujoy 92 dO 001069070 92 40 001069070 peoga oN 92 do
20. 71004 1 16 2 dd 119 15 FEE 1 A3 3 T4 S Lipa SC 27 5 5 EXTERNAL 4 E s 13 7 CONTROL 5 122 FEBEAD IN 6 Ny 9 A8 A 3 NN 11 4 1 10 74 541 9 5 0 Q 19 n TERMBLOCK 10 10000 pF EXT 5V_OUT Al a Al 81 Al 5 10000 pF R27 Rag R29 R31 gt R32 gt R33 R26 10 100 R30 1006 1006 100 100 100 5 5 E 330 50 330 pF SOV 013 PS2702 4 330 pF 50 1 16 330 pF 50V 5 ae 3 14 a X 4 13 L25 FE BEAD 5 12 Place these termination resistors at the end of each data 6 x 11 line Each data line 7 gt 10 should be laid out as a daisy chain the signal passing from one IC to the next o Ny J 8 x 10000 pF ool VCC vj d 10000 pF RN4 U14 15 8 2 Al 2 ERN 015 CE s 71006 PS2702 4 HH 6 1 16 EXTERNAL CONTROL 2 128 2 9 7 N 3 2 B 5 1 ye SK 7 IM cu 5 ______ ri 6 1121 7 TERMBLOCK 10 9 2 d PE BEAD 5 8 10000 EXT 45V OUT Title d Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702 We 16000 AE Size Number Revision E Orcad B 05703 A Date 17 Jun 2008 Sheet Cof 8 File N Pcbmgr 05701dn E motherboard gen4 s iirre0 5701 a DDB 1 2 3 4 5 6
21. EA 9 3 YOLVYANAD eel uruw 001 o33u02 4 9 3 YOLVYANAD O PHOTOMETER BENCH GAS INPUT PRESSURE SENSOR g gs 2 PHOTOMETER o 5 PRESSURE SENSOR 2 GEN PHOTOMETER PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR PCA Flow Control 800 cm min red O Photometer Gas Flow Measure Cycle PHOTOMETER INLET 1 PHOTOMETER OUTLET PHOTOMETER BENCH PHOTOMETER PRESSURE SENSOR O GEN PHOTOMETER PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR PCA Flow Control 800 cm min O Photometer Gas Flow Reference Cycle On Back Panel PHOTOMETER ZERO IN EXHAUST PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT INTERNAL VENT 05744 Rev B 157 TELEDYNE API Theory of Operation M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 9 6 1 3 The Absorption Path In the most basic terms the M703E photometer uses a high energy mercury vapor lamp to generate a beam of UV light This beam passes through a window of material specifically chosen to be both non reactive to O3 and transparent to UV radiation at 254nm and into an absorption tube filled with sample gas Because ozone is a very efficient absorber of UV radiation the absorption path length required to create
22. 000000000000 196 11 4 11 2 Photometer Sample Chamber Temperature 196 11 4 11 3 UV Lamp 196 11 4 11 4 Ozone Generator 197 11 5 Troubleshooting the 197 11 5 1 Dynamic Problems with the 197 11 5 1 1 Noisy or Unstable Readings at 7 197 11 5 1 2 Noisy Unstable or Non Linear Span Readings 198 11 5 1 3 Slow Response to Changes in 198 11 5 1 4 The Analog Output Signal Level Does Not Agree With Front Panel Readings 198 11 5 1 5 Canriot Zero uident idera ee ed e a t dde ud a ad ee ce aee v tud 198 11 5 1 0 Cannot Span dee e a Leer tee neges eee pre e Mp edge enden 198 11 5 2 Checking Measure REFERENCE 199 11 6 Troubleshooting the 200 11 6 1 Checking The UV Lamp Power Supply eene emere nnne 200 11 7 Trouble Shooting the Optional generator eene 201 11 7 1 Checking The UV Source Lamp Power 7 201 11 8 Repair Procedures oi e eere
23. E 80 6 12 4 Activating an existing nnns 80 6 12 5 Programming New etd rede cte tene eL HERE Re eo SR 81 6120 Creating a GENERATE LEVEL rnt rr n ERR TE TA NS RENE A RB 82 6 12 5 2 MANUAL LEVEL a rre rete etn ue NEA Reno ERREUR 83 0 12 5 3 Editing or Deleting a LEVEL erret ee tere tesa ate sean td aaah eens 84 6 12 6 Configuring LEVEL Status 86 7 OPERATING THE M703E OVER THE SERIAL I O 87 7 1 Using Analysers Communication 87 7 1 1 RS 232 DTE DCE 87 7 1 2 COMM Port Default Settings and Connector Pin Assignments sse 88 Tola COMM Port ie a ee ROTE RR RR 90 7 1 4 COMM Port Communication 91 1 1 5 COMM Port Testing t en ei ie Rie A en REPRE 93 iv 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Table of Contents FARO ETE 94 LAG Terminal Operating MOGd6S itio D e Re e pee Rete edet 95 7 1 7 1 Help Commands in Terminal esee rne ener rennen 95 Rikere Command Syritaxe nice eee DR CD De
24. 5 on 17 26 5010 4152 PL101 3 tot 4 28 rx 22 27 __ cr 2x 9 D 51014 5 Ce e np 56 RTS 15 or 1 Dc 6 2 04 20 001 sj 7 55 o eo 5V 5V 5V 5V RI L 4 68 D3 503 PL101 5 4 5 6 Ror pe 5 67 5 cue 114 4 DSR Prot 5 9 2 15 _ psi 016 686 spr S 100 5 100nF 5 100nF F 100nF 7 cts PL101 nis RO3 00 500 RES RESET PL101 11 lt H Jeno 106 xE NLDA So NTROS DYDDVD AAAAA y L 499K pm ne 45V 45V 45V GND LANINT INTRQO 22021 02239 EEDATAIN eis ene cios 45V sv 216107 Bu sies 57 SF 100nF SF 100nF SF 100nF F 100nF 01315 7 0 9 614 6 Ee 8105 ums C128 1 4 99K 7 EE voc R108 R109 V V 10uF 16V M 10 0K 10 0K PL102 2 o 34 T M RESIN RESET TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION 3 REsET NOTES INSTRUMENTATION INC T no R107 1 THIS SCHEMATIC APPLIES TO PWB 04393 REV A ETHERNET INTERFACE SCHEMATIC C124 C125 C126 10 0K VV 2 RESISTANCES IN OHMS 1 gt RS 755 100nF TFS 2 Size Number Rev 16V 16V 3 PARTS DENOTED S ON SECONDARY SIDE OF B 04395 A D Jul Dr b v Vv Set a A B C D
25. dea Dade e en arse urn 125 Table 8 2 M703E Gas Pressure to Output Flow conversion Table 128 Table 9 1 Relay Board Status eterne nion nde Tenet nn da ice ud 142 Table 9 2 Power Configuration for Internal Pumps mmm eme 146 Table 9 3 Front Panel Status aen tetto tede e duae ie De ede odd ide 148 Table 9 4 M703E Photometer Measurement Reference Cycle sss ee 156 Table 10 1 M703E Maintenance 5 165 Table 11 1 Front Panel Warning 179 Table 11 2 Test Functions Indicated 180 Table 11 3 Test Channel Outputs as Diagnostic 0 183 Table 11 4 Relay PCA Watchdog LED Failure 184 Table 11 5 Relay PCA Status LED Failure 185 Table 11 6 DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Codes sss emen een 187 Table 11 7 DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels sss nennen enmt 188 Table 11 8 Relay PCA Control 189 Table 11 9 Analog Output Test Function Nominal Values Voltage Outputs 192 Table 11 10 Status Outputs Check i nnda Pase iE 192 Table 11 11 M
26. eid eel eae a ea ee aes 36 Table 6 2 Calibrator Operating ModS 37 Table 6 3 Automatic Calibration SEQUENCE Set Up 40 Table 6 4 Calibration SEQUENCE Step Instruction 40 Table 6 5 Sequence Progress Reporting Mode enne 49 Table 6 6 Password re 60 Table 6 7 DIAG Analog l O Eurictloris 62 Table 6 8 Test Channels Functions Available on the M703E s Analog 64 Table 6 9 Analog Output Voltage Range Min Max sessssseeeneneneeenen enne nennen nns 66 Table 6 10 Voltage Tolerances for the TEST CHANNEL Calibration seen 72 Table 6 11 Varable Names VARS HERREN IR RR DO ERRARE 75 Table 7 1 COMM Port Communication 91 Table 7 2 Terminal Mode Software Commands ssssssssesssseeeee nennen nemen nemen 95 Table 7 3 Teledyne Instruments Serial Command Types sss eem 96 Table 7 4 Ethernet Status NGICAtOMS o edited esha ad e Io YT e a 105 Table 7 5 LAN Internet Configuration 106 Table 8 1 M703E Pressure SensQrs s d dde ate ke o
27. 10 2 PERFORMING LEAK CHECKS Leaks are the most common cause of analyzer malfunction Section Error Reference source not found presents a simple leak check procedure Section 10 2 1 describes a more thorough procedure 10 2 1 PRESSURE LEAK CHECK BEGINNING OF INSERTION Replace original section below with this section per Mike Troy Obtain a leak checker similar to the Teledyne Instruments part number 01960 which contains a small pump shut off valve and pressure gauge Alternatively a tank of pressurized gas with the two stage regulator adjusted to lt 15 psi a shutoff valve and pressure gauge may be used CAUTION Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution do not apply a vacuum as this will cause soap solution to be drawn into the instrument contaminating it DO NOT EXCEED 15 PSI PRESSURE Turn OFF power to the calibrator Remove the instrument cover Install a leak checker or tank of gas as described above on the dry air in port at the rear panel ON gt Install caps on the following fittings on the rear panel e Exhaust e Vent e Internal Vent e Zero e Air Inlet e Both CALGAS OUT fittings NOTE The M703E calibrator cannot be leak checked with the pump in line due to internal leakage that normally occurs in the pump Locate the dry air pump Disconnect the two fittings on the dry air pump and install a union fitting in place of the pump Locate the photom
28. U30 ect 2 oer 74HC574 123 iH BEAD TERMBLOCK 8 96 2 2 1 1 J22 74HC32 di 4 3 10 CLK 1 5 DAC3V 275 1 0 Ep Qi EDAC CSDACA gt B 8 Tum 513 v D2 Q2 CSRANGE1 4 4 pa 17 CSDACB _ CSDACB OP AMP PRECISION DUAL IDC 8 5 5 5 16 CSRANGE2 6 D4 a4 6 6 ps a513 y 7 14 uz o 8 D6 Q6 8 8 13 9 897 47 10 719 _ D8 Q8 10 WRDAC V7 MICROFIT 10 0 15 uF ceramic 74HC32 15V 0 15 uF ceramic C9 CIO 15V lt TP26 385 U35A OP AMP PRECISION QUAD OQ OP AMP PRECISION Qu A 2 gt 1 1 2 2 DACOV RIG DUAL DAC A1 DACOV DUAL DAC A2 DAC2 031 032 034 _ 4 pour 29 L 22 f pouT VOA 3 23 Aj wi 22 18 7K CSDACA 3 6 24 CSDACB 6 24 S CS GND 9 CS 3 Bt T DAC2V gt vec AGND1 O DN vec AGND1 CK ios SOCKET U31 DAC IZBIT 11_ al DAC 12 BIT u uss 15V 106 19 12 RIS SOCKET U33 DO 22 715 CLK 14 CLK Ussp 15V 14 CLK 13 SDO N 10k 1 c12 13 0 15 uF ceramic _ V 4 2 0 15 uF ceramic w2 4 15V 4 2 2 B2 5 4 B2 A2 AGND2 A2 AGND2 mH OP AMP PRECISION QUAD M RS e RS PRECISION QUAD SHDAC LLL 10 sHpN OP AMP PRECISION QUAD ae U vec 16 vec 18 C14 0 15 uF ceramic DGND 9 0 15 uF ceramic C17 DGND 9 DAC3V C18 0 15 uF ceramic
29. 202 11 8 1 Repairing Sample Flow Control 202 11 8 2 Disk On Chip Replacement 203 01 9 Technical Assistalce onion dte bet ar IRE Sae TR RET a RR Me ERR n Ru e 203 12 A PRIMER ON ELECTRO STATIC 205 12 1 How Static Charges 205 12 2 How Electro Static Charges Cause 206 12 3 Common Myths About ESD eene ener 207 12 4 Basic Principles of Static Control sscan ena nennen menn enne nennen 207 12 4 1 General Rules ete dte e ter eie doe nee idee Padua 207 12 4 2 Basic anti ESD Procedures for Analyzer Repair and Maintenance 209 12 4 2 1 Working at the Instrument 209 12 4 2 2 Working at an Anti ESD Work 1 209 12 4 2 3 Transferring Components from Rack to Bench and 210 12 4 2 4 Opening Shipments from Teledyne Instruments Customer 210 12 4 2 5 Packing Components for Return to Teledyne Instruments Customer 211 05744 Rev B vii TELEDYNE API T
30. 66 6 9 1 4 Turning the TEST CHANNEL Over Range Feature ON OFF 67 6 9 1 5 Adding a Recorder Offset to the TEST 68 6 9 2 CALIBRATION ceo atre tec eee tede beste abd de 69 6 9 2 1 Enabling or disabling the TEST CHANNEL Auto Cal 69 6 9 2 2 Automatic TEST CHANNEL 70 6 9 2 3 Manual Calibration of the TEST CHANNEL configured for Voltage 72 6 9 9 AIN GaliDEatiOri cce tdt tee rut uei ee EAR de eT Eo 74 6 10 SETUP gt MORE gt VARS Internal Variables VARS sse 75 6 11 Operating the M703E Calibrator as 77 6 11 1 Set up for Operating the 7 as Photometer 77 6 12 SETUP gt LVL Setting up and using LEADS Dasibi Operating Levels 79 6 12 1 General Information about LEADS 5 79 6 12 2 Dot comiiriands 2 5 d cr D ness ness tex de e uk Du eden cu Resa 79 6 12 33 beVels odit te sites teet ee
31. INVLSNOZD 195 eseu ej660 991 JO jndino 5 shox eseu ej660 lIX3 HIN3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 07000 LNIOd LIS 40 0 XX dNLAS AW 0 000 1 LASNADEO XXdni3s HONS LSND 320 ayes uoneJgi eo 24 Jes Shey L wa ldd 19 siy 10 ay 0 0 o 0 0 Won 10 jes 0 s ex 9599 9jeJ seb uoneJqijeo Wd1000 0 MO14 1NINTIA XX dnias 9t 1es shay 8 HIN3 0 ddd 0 0 0 0 195 eq papajas ayy s eui12ejes siy ejo shey eseu 1 Wd100000 MO14SVO VO XXanias lIX3 ULNA 0 0 0 0 O 0 31VH3N39 31VH3N35 0 0 0 HO HO 0482 MIN3 0882 JequinN 0000000 0 2 10 42018 Sn1V1S 2 570 VO TYNNYN ONJZ31VH3N3O yes 0 shay Pen NO 330 MIN3 Lida O1 NOILOVI dALAS T3 31 2 M90 18 SNLVLS KL 5018 SNLVLS 13 31 s euyewos
32. SET SET EDIT SETUP X X CC OUTPUT ENABLE OFF EXIT discards the OFF ENTER EXIT new setting Toggle this ke E 23 y ENTR accepts the turn the CC input ON OFF new setting I7 SETUP X X CC OUTPUT 0 00000000000 CH CH 0 ENTER EXIT Moves the cursor one character left or right Toggle this key to turn the selected bit ON OFF 0 or 1 SETUP 2 SET CC OUTPUT 000100010110 PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT 54 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator 6 5 2 6 Deleting or Editing an Individual Step in a Sequence To delete or edit an individual step in an existing Sequence press Make sure that the M703E is in standby GEN STBY SEQ SETUP mode PRIMARY SETUP MENU SEQ MORE SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT EXIT 1 SEQ NAME X STEPS INS DEL EDIT Scrolls back and forth L between existing sequences SETUP 0 SET EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET until STEPS Submenu SETUP X X STEPS 12 SET SET EDIT SETUP X X 1 STANDBY PREV NEXT INS DEL Continue pressing NEXT or PREV until until step to be deleted appears SETUP X X 7 PURGE PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT Follow the instructions for the step being i SETUPX X DELETE STEP edited 77 YES NO SETUP X X 7 DURATION 10 0 MIN PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT If the step deleted was GENERATE MANUAL or P
33. 59 Weekday as decimal number 0 6 Sunday is 0 Year without century as decimal number 00 99 95 Y Year with century as decimal number 9696 Percent sign Factory option flags Add values to combine options 1024 enable software controlled maintenance FACTORY OPT 0 65535 2048 enable Internet option 4096 enable switch controlled maintenance mode 7 Dasibi emulation version only Experimental iChip option 05745 Rev C A 15 TELEDYNE API APPENDIX A 3 Warnings and Test Functions Software Version C 0 M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX A 3 Warnings and Test Functions Software Version C 0 Table A 2 M703E Warning Messages Software Version C 0 MESSAGE TEXT DESCRIPTION WSYSRES SYSTEM RESET Instrument was power cycled or the CPU was reset WDATAINIT DATA INITIALIZED Data storage was erased WCONFIGINIT CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or erased WPHOTOLTEMP PHOTO LAMP TEMP Photometer lamp temperature outside of warning limits specified WARNING by PHOTO_LAMP variable WO3GENTEMP O3 GEN LAMP TEMP Os generator lamp temperature outside of warning limits WARNING specified by O3_GEN_LAMP variable WPHOTOREF PHOTO REFERENCE Photometer reference reading less than 2500 mV or greater than WARNING 4999 mV WLAMPSTABIL PHOTO LAMP STABILITY Photometer lamp reference step changes occur more than 25
34. Generator Input Power Up PC 104 Pressure Sensor Circuit CPU Card RS 232 5 G Disk Photometer Sample Gas 5 Eo isk Pressure Sensor 6 8 5 d Chip 22 L5 o 5 Box Chip Temperature CPU Status LED Photometer Thermistor Interface M R Valve Optional Bus Photometer Lamp Heater RELAY PCA Generator Lamp Heater situs Yor LED Photometer Pump Keyboard amp Display Generator Generator Reference O3 Generator Detector UV Lamp Temperature Photometer UV Lamp Temperature Generator Lamp Supply Photometer Sample Gas Temperature Photometer Photometer Detector Lamp Power Preamp Supply Figure 9 2 M703E Electronic Block Diagram At its heart the calibrator is a microcomputer CPU that controls various internal processes interprets data makes calculations and reports results using specialized firmware developed by Teledyne Instruments It communicates with the user as well as receives data from and issues commands to a variety of peripheral devices via a separate printed circuit assembly called the Mother Board The motherboard collects data performs signal conditioning duties and routs incoming and outgoing signals between the CPU and the calibrator s other major components Data is generated by the various sub compo
35. M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Some functions under the SETUP gt MORE gt DIAG submenu those which conflict with accurate creation of calibration gas mixtures e g ANALOG OUTPUT STEP TEST automatically place the calibrator into STANDBY mode when activated NOTE The M703E calibrator should always be placed in STANDBY mode when not needed to produce calibration gas This can be done manually by pressing the STBY button that appears when the calibrator s display is showing the top level menu see Figure 6 1 When programming a calibration sequences the STANDBY step should always be inserted at the end of the sequence 38 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator 6 4 GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE GENERATE MODE The GENERATE mode is the mode of operation where the M703E is actively producing calibration gas either zero or some specified concentration of ozone In the GENERATE mode the Zero Air Pump if enabled and Photometer Pump are turned on 6 4 1 GENERATE gt AUTO Basic Generation of Calibration Gas This is the simplest procedure for generating calibration gas mixtures To generate calibration gas press Make sure that the M703E is in GEN STBY SEQ SETUP STANDBY mode STANDBY SYSTEM RESET AUTO STANDBY GENERATE ZERO ZERO ENTR SETUP Toggle this key to Press ENTR now to Switch to generation generate ZERO air GENE
36. O Flow Control 800 __ PHOTOMETER 1043002 4 o s 1 029301 EXHAUST Aiquiassy O PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT 1043002 4 PHOTOMETER OUTLET ANALYZER ZERO AIR IN ANALYZER VENT GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD Figure 3 4 M703E Pneumatic Diagram 12 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started 3 2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 3 2 1 POWER CONNECTION Verify the correct line voltage and frequency configuration on the serial number tag on the rear panel of the M703E Attach the power cord to the calibrator and plug it into a power outlet capable of carrying at least 10 A current at your AC voltage and that it is equipped with a functioning earth ground CAUTION HIGH VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT INSIDE THE CALIBRATORS CASE POWER CONNECTION MUST HAVE FUNCTIONING GROUND CONNECTION DO NOT DEFEAT THE GROUND WIRE ON POWER PLUG TURN OFF CALIBRATOR POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING OR CONNECTING ELECTRICAL SUBASSEMBLIES CAUTION DO NOT LOOK AT THE PHOTOMETER UV LAMP UV LIGHT CAN CAUSE EYE DAMAGE ALWAYS WEAR GLASSES MADE FROM SAFETY UV FILTERING GLASS PLASTIC GLASSES WILL NOT DO 3 2 2 ANALOG OUTPUT TEST CHANNEL CONNECTIONS
37. TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION A Teledyne Technologies Company OPERATOR S MANUAL MODEL 703E PHOTOMETRIC O CALIBRATOR TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION DIVISION TAPI 9480 CARROLL PARK DRIVE SAN DIEGO CALIFORNIA 92121 5201 USA Toll free Phone 800 324 5190 Phone 858 657 9800 Fax 858 657 9816 Email api sales teledyne com Website http www teledyne api com 05743 Rev C Copyright 2007 DCN 5521 Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation 29 July 2009 THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED We recommend that this document be read in its entirety before any attempt is made to operate the instrument DOCUMENTS Document P N Revision DCN Nomenclature Dated 05743 B 5359 M703 Manual Instruction Title 03 20 09 05744 B 5359 M703 Manual Instruction Text 03 20 09 05745 C 5359 M703 Appendix A Menu Tree 03 20 09 05746 B 5359 M703 Appendix B Spare Parts 03 20 09 05747 B 5359 M703 Appendix C Repair Form 03 20 09 05748 B 5359 703 Appendix D Schematics 03 20 09 05834 F 5359 List Spare Parts M703 03 20 09 05863 B 5359 List Recommended Spares Stocking Levels 03 20 09 M703 05834 J 5480 List Spare Parts M703 07 15 09 05863 5480 List Recommended Spares Stocking Levels 07 15 09 M703 THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual S
38. 20000039 1900000 5 U9IIMS Z00000NO JOMOd OV 1400000 5 89070 U9IIMS 200000NO ejdsiq u OV OV 190 89070 ejdsiq HuMd dsid 894070 dSId 8ScvO dSId 89070 51 8ScvO ejdsiq ojedsg 8ScvO QN9G 8ScvO 5 dSIQ 8ScvO eoejieju preoq ey ejdsiq 0d 89070 ejdsiq Iq 8ScvO 89070 894070 ejdsiq 89070 ejdsiq Sq 8ScvO 9d CO 00 8ScvO oro eje ooo 6060 99 92 99 02 02 02 42 02 02 02 02 42 2
39. 25 3 4 7 Setting the M703E s output Flow 26 4 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS AND GLOSSARY 27 notnm eR A aorta cot cr met 27 ZAPAMCIIC M E 27 5 OPTIONAL HARDWARE AND 29 5 2 Carrying strap Handle 29 ike toi eo ra e ap ame eme ne 29 5 2 Comimunicatiori Options eec tbe ee eben dees uia erue 30 5 2 1 RS232 Modem Cables OPTS 60 and 60 30 5 2 2 ETHERNET Cable OPT 60B er n i ceto bee qe e athl eet a iar aae irre edic 30 5 22 93 RS 232 Multidrop OPT 62 etude ete gea ane ede tuu ea uta Le dead adde deas 30 5 2 4 Ethernet OPT 3 pedet Ere edad de eL dee Re coupe M Edu td PL Dee eaae due ads 31 5 2 5 Multidrop n tot educit ti e oet ie o dit Let gei edic Redes 32 5 3 Additional Man al OPT Z0 t ae e per f o eda e t rods 32 5 4 Extended Warranty OPT 92 1 ope ot RR ERRARE RR E 32 5 5 NIST Traceable Primary Standard 32 33 6 OPERATI
40. 3 4 3 WARNING MESSAGES Displays Mode Field STANDBY Instrument is in STANDBY mode Because internal temperatures and other conditions may be outside be specified limits during the calibrator s warm up period the software will suppress most warning conditions for 30 minutes after power up If warning messages persist after the 30 minutes warm up period is over investigate their cause using the troubleshooting guidelines in Chapter 11 of this manual To view and clear warning messages press STANDBY SYSTEM RESET Suppresses TEST GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP warning messages gt STANDBY SYSTEM RESET TEST GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP MSG returns the active warnings to the message field STANDBY SYSTEM RESET TEST GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP Press CLR to clear the current message If more than one warning is active the next message will take SYSTEM ANALOG CAL WARNING its place TEST CLR SETUP Once the last warning has been cleared the MESSAGE s FIELD will return to displaying If a warning persists after the currently selected TEST several attempts to clear it the message FUNCTION and value 9 lt TST TST gt GEN STBY SEQ SETUP may indicate a real problem and not an artifact of the warm up period Table 3 5 lists brief descriptions of the warning messages that may occur during start up 22 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started Ta
41. 138 9 2 2 4 Disk On deret cr Nes pre en TOROS IERI DRM 139 9 22 2 rea SRI 139 9 2 3 Relay iore E PO HERO er OR pe ua ipte metum nme meis 140 9 2 3 1 Valve oe Op DAE RARI RT RASA RA e Rod ide ec iiti 141 9 2 3 2 Heater Gonttoli 4 iot 141 9 2 3 3 Relay PCA Status LEDs 4 Watch Dog 141 9 2 3 4 Relay PCA Watchdog Indicator 01 142 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API Table of Contents M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 9 2 4 MothenbO ard ies si ian etu ede et e 143 9 24 ConversioOnit rere e aia de et rei tete ptit aa dert ne e 143 9 2 4 2 Sensor Inputs o pne Rete 143 9 2 4 3 Thiermistor Interface oo oe Re E n Ren etre et dieta em Yo 143 9 2 4 4 Analog Qutputs m m repe ene re Een ded E re Gere EO Do EET EO e 143 9 2 4 5 External Digital ecce re Ree EH FR EBEN Ee deed 144 9 246 CD ates BUS todo dost pe cete ot Ga dorsa diae a d dun do UE 144 9 2 4 7 Power Up GIFCUIE orc cete e o Adit aa vee ana 144 9 2 5 Power Supply an
42. Check to make sure the set up command is correct See Section 7 2 Verify that the Ready to Send RTS signal is at logic high The M703E sets pin 7 RTS to greater than 3 volts to enable modem transmission Make sure the BAUD rate word length and stop bit settings between modem and calibrator match See Section 7 1 3 Use the RS 232 test function to send w characters to the modem terminal or computer See Section 7 1 5 Get your terminal modem or computer to transmit data to the calibrator holding down the space bar is one way the green LED should flicker as the instrument is receiving data Make sure that the communications software or terminal emulation software is functioning properly NOTE Further help with serial communications is available in a separate manual RS 232 Programming Notes Teledyne Instruments part number 013500000 05744 Rev B 195 TELEDYNE API General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operators Manual 11 4 11 TEMPERATURE PROBLEMS Individual control loops are used to maintain the set point of the UV lamp and ozone generator If any of these temperatures are out of range or are poorly controlled the M703E will perform poorly 11 4 11 1 Box Chassis Temperature The box temperature sensor is mounted to the Motherboard and cannot be disconnected to check its resistance Rather check the BOX TEMP signal using the SIGNAL I O function under th
43. O ce IMYA 1 WZ 22 33H OLOHd LE 2 oe SOGHOLVM Av 3H 62 55384 15 sc Wuviv Ls Zz GOW Svid 15 92 AAILOV VO 15 sc MO WALSAS LS vc cL HL 21 NIV SLNOV ENMIOBINOD 1 40 nueuiqns NOILVYEITVS EET 5 _ 195 AHVONOOSS 99S E 1 NOLLVHSITVO NOLEVHEITV9 NOLLVHSITVO NOILVYNDIANOOD 1ndlino NWHO 1591 zd OLOHd N39 90 IVNV 1 Aud 818 3HOIN dNLas NNIN 0 2 UOIS19A Saal 1 V XIGN3ddV 5 10121980 10 291 22 3202 3NAG3 TAL 290 8 V NOILVYNDIANOD 579 nueuqns OVId 135 AHVONOO3S 9 V eJnBi4 1 Shay 9599 450 0 0 1X3 0 0 0 NO NIN 0 0 NOLLVYNG LNIOd N35 0 ANN O 3AIHG LNIOd IVO LNIOd IVO NOILVYNG LNIOd V9 LNIOd WS 0006 AU 0007 eui jo lt 1 5 145 gt 0006 918J 195 5 eseui AY 0002 AW 0091 LINVIFG
44. PREV NEX INS DEL EDIT EXIT Toggle these keys to the place in the COZ table where the point is to be added or edited New Points are inserted BEFORE the displayed point CAL POINT DRIVE 0 lt SET SET gt EDIT Toggle these keys to move between calibration points parameters CAL POINT DRIVE 0 MV 0 3 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards s mH the new setting Toggle these keys to set the ENTR accepts drive voltage the new setting d CAL POINT DRIVE 300 MV 24 lt SET SET gt EDIT CAL POINT DURATION 0 0 MIN lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT CAL POINT DURATION 0 0 MIN 0 5 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting Toggle these keys to set the ENTR accepts dwell time for the point the new setting CAL POINT DURATION 0 0 MIN SET SHT EDIT NOTE When a point is added to the CAL POINT DURATION 0 0 MIN SET SET EDIT EXIT CAL POINT DURATION 0 0 MIN EXIT discards 0 2 0 ENTR EXIT the new setting Toggle these keys to set the ENTR accepts dwell time for the point the new setting gt table its default condition is ON enabled 05744 Rev B 121 TELEDYNE API M703E Calibration and Verification M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 8 2 4 DELETING O GENERATOR CALIBRATION POINTS To delete an existing calibration point press Make sure that the M703E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU 03 MORE SECON
45. Remove the cover from the analyzer Locate the optional Photometer see Figure 3 3 Locate the UV DETECTOR GAIN ADJUST POT on the photometer assembly see Figure 10 3 Perform the following procedure GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU SEQ MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM DIAG ENTER PASSWORD 8 1 8 ENTR SIGNAL I O PREV NEXT ENTR PREV NEXT JUMP JUMP TO 1 1 7 ENTR 17 PHOTO_DET 3342 2 MV PREV NEXT PRNT Using an insulated pot adjustment tool Turn the UV DETECTOR GAIN ADJUSTMENT POT until the value of PHOTO_DET is as close as possible to 4600 0 MV 6 Replace the cover on the analyzer If a minimum reading of 3500 0 mV can not be reached the lamp must be replaced Make sure the analyzer is warmed up and has been running for at least 15 minutes before proceeding Additional adjustment can be made by physically rotating the lamp in it s housing e To do this slightly loosen the UV lamp setscrew e Next slowly rotate the lamp up to turn in either direction while watching the PHOTO_DET signal Once the optimum lamp position is determined re tighten the lamp setscrew 172 05744 RevB TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures UV DETECTOR GAIN ADJUST POT UV LAMPSEISCREW 5 UV LAMP Figure 10 3 Photometer Location of UV Detector Gain Adjustment 4 UV Lamp Set Screw 10 6 PHOTOMETER UV SOURCE
46. Table 6 3 Automatic Calibration SEQUENCE Set Up Attributes ATTRIBUTE NAME DESCRIPTION NAME Allows the user to create a text string of up to 10 characters identifying the sequence Number of times between 0 and 100 to execute the same sequence A value of 0 zero causes the sequence to execute indefinitely REPEAT COUNT CC INPUT Specifies which of the M703E s Digital Control Inputs will initiate the sequence CC OUTPUT e which of the M703E s Digital Control Outputs will be set when the sequence Enables or disables an internal automatic timer that can initiate sequences using the M703E s built in clock A series of submenus for programming the activities and instructions that make up the calibration sequence Allows the user to select the reporting style the calibrator uses to report the progress of the sequences on the front panels display as it runs TIMER ENABLE STEPS PROGRESS MODE The types of instruction steps available for creating calibration sequences are Table 6 4 Calibration SEQUENCE Step Instruction INSTRUCTION NAME DESCRIPTION Puts the instrument into GENERATE mode Similar in operation and effect to the GENERATE gt AUTO function used at the front panel DURATION Adds a period of time between the previous instruction and the next GENERATE Calls another sequence to be executed at this time The calling sequence will EXECSEQ resume running when th
47. WARNING of the time WO3GENREF O3 GEN REFERENCE Os reference detector drops below 50 mV during reference WARNING feedback Os generator control WOSPUMP O3 PUMP WARNING OS pump failed to turn on within timeout period specified by PUMP TIMEOUT variable WBOXTEMP BOX TEMP WARNING Chassis temperature outside of warning limits specified by BOX SET variable WREARBOARD REAR BOARD NOT DET Rear board was not detected during power up WRELAYBOARD RELAY BOARD WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board WLAMPDRIVER LAMP DRIVER WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with either the O3 generator or photometer lamp driver chip WFRONTPANEL FRONT PANEL WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the front panel WANALOGCAL ANALOG CAL WARNING The A D or at least one D A channel has not been calibrated The name is used to request a message via the RS 232 interface as in T BOXTEMP A 16 05745 Rev C TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX A 3 Warnings and Test Functions Software Version C 0 Table A 3 M703E Test Functions Software Version C 0 TEST FUNCTION NAME MESSAGE TEXT DESCRIPTION ACTCONC ACT GENERATE 37 PPB Actual concentration being generated computed from real time inputs Target concentration to generate Output flow rate computed from regulator pressure _____ 5 REG PRESSURE 20 1 PSIG Reodaorpessue CS OSGENREF O3 GEN REF 1000 0 Mv _ Os generator re
48. What tests have you done trying to solve the problem Thank you for providing this information Your assistance enables Teledyne Instruments to respond faster to the problem that you are encountering OTHER NOTES TELEDYNE API CUSTOMER SERVICE EMAIL api customerservice teledyne com PHONE 858 657 9800 TOLL FREE 800 324 5190 FAX 858 657 9816 2 05747 Rev B TELEDYNE API Model 703E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX D Diagrams and Schematics APPENDIX D Diagrams and Schematics Table D 1 List of Included Diagrams and Schematics 05748 Rev B D 1 TELEDYNE API APPENDIX D Diagrams and Schematics Model 703E Calibrator Operator s Manual THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK D 2 05748 Rev B TELEDYNE API Model 703E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX D Diagrams and Schematics APPENDIX D Diagrams and Schematics Table D 1 List of Included Diagrams and Schematics 05748 Rev B D 1 TELEDYNE API APPENDIX D Diagrams and Schematics Model 703E Calibrator Operator s Manual THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK D 2 05748 Rev B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REVISIONS DESCRIPTION DATE DCN APPROVED Anal
49. ii 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS GENERAL INFORMATION asp runde ta eee ween eee 1 LOIN TRODUC TION MEER 3 T MZOSEcalibratorOVetvigw occasio ipo Etage ea eate chu 3 1 2 Using This ManWal dee beo diras le tate 3 2 SPECIFICATIONS APPROVALS AND WARRANTY 5 221 CLE ES 5 2 2 Compliance ue etas eee erede litte den head wa 6 2 3 Warranty Asch d ue 7 3 GETTING STARTED innen ane Ia DEDE DUM USE 9 3 1 Unpacking and Initial 9 3 1 1 Model 703E Calibrator 10 3 2 Electrical Connections o bs 13 3 2 1 Power Connection dde ep ee 13 3 2 2 Analog output TEST CHANNEL 2 13 3 2 3 Connecting the Status OUtQUES oeseri nens 14 3 24 Gonnecting the Control MPS E i 15 3 2 5 Connecting Control Outputs roii bete tent ce en etd edi 17 3 20 Connecting the Ser
50. s Ethernet card manually The INET sub menu may also be used to edit the Ethernet card s configuration properties e Your LAN is not running a DHCP software package e The DHCP software is unable to initialize the calibrator s interface e You wish to program the interface with a specific set of IP addresses that may not be the ones automatically chosen by DHCP Editing the Ethernet Interface properties is a two step process STEP 1 Turn DHCP OFF While DHCP is turned ON the ability to set INSTRUMENT IP GATEWAY IP and SUBNET MASK manually is disabled GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU O3 MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID ADDR INET EXIT SETUP X X ENTER PASSWORD 818 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X DHCP ON SET SET EDIT EXIT Toggle this key SETUP X X DHCP ON to turn DHCP ON ENTR EXIT ON OFF SETUP X X DHCP OFF ENTR accepts OFF ENTR EXIT the new setting EXIT ignores the new setting gt Continue to Step 2 Below 108 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports STEP 2 Configure the INSTRUMENT IP GATEWAY IP and SUBNET MASK addresses by pressing Internet Configuration Keypad Functions From step t above Press this key to cycle through the range of numerals and available characters 0 9 amp DHCP OFF DEL SET gt ENTR Accepts the new 2 to the previous Ignores the new
51. 2 Only appears when more calibration sequences programmed into the calibrator s memory 9 f your calibrator has an Ethernet card Option 63 installed and your network is running a dynamic host configuration protocol DHCP software package the Ethernet option will automatically configure its interface with your LAN However it is a good idea to check these settings to make sure that the DHCP has successfully downloaded the appropriate network settings from your network server See Section 7 5 2 If your network is not running DHCP you will have to configure the calibrator s interface manually See Section 7 5 2 24 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started 3 4 5 OPERATING MODES FOR THE GENERATOR The O generator can set to operate in three different modes 3 4 5 1 CNST CONSTANT In this mode the output of the generator is based on a single constant drive voltage There is no Feedback loop control by the M703E s CPU in this mode 3 4 5 2 REF REFERENCE The control loop will use the reference detectors measurement of the generator s UV lamp as input This mode does not use the photometer to control the ozone generator 3 4 5 3 BNCH BENCH The O concentration control loop will use the photometer s O4 measurement as input THIS IS THE DEFAULT AND MOST COMMON MODE OF OPERATION This setting will be the default mode of
52. 2514 27 M4 VUE E 4 5 16 DO4 DO6 A4 vit DACV _ gt __ ps Q5 200 s 26 5 VCC D5 4 17 DOS DO4 AS e Y8 D WRDAC gt D Qo SS 6 25 __ 5 10 3 DO2 A6 D DU 7 J102 24 __ 7 2 7 10 CHGAIN TP2 DU 8 1 As 23 A8 5 3 x VEREAD DU 22 __ 9 lt 14 0X32C O U7 DI5 2 res A9 321 __ 10 Y12 9 15 74 541 pp bk 10 224 11 2 20 41 2 16 Xu 4 5 All E Y14 c 2 12 5 os 092810 2 17 D m DO7 13 a 18 13 0 15 uF cerantic 4 DOS 6 rx 17 DO 18 14 7 X 1 L YI Al DESI 15 7 16 415 DI 17 DI7 DOI 8 15 cA Y2 A2 22 16 x 74HC74 D2 16 9 16 Y3 A3 10 A17 5 S 10 PRE Q 2 ud A4 MICROFIT 16 x lt A18 L 5 YS AS 12 19 3 D Q Deo 6 13 x lt AEN o CER DIL Y A7 14 x lt IOCHRDY Y8 15 bx 2 RESET USID 16 X Di 0 U4A ES lt p2 ADDR 0x360 DEFAULT 4 TE 5 i5 E Di ADDR 0x320 JP1 INSTALLED be Q O 20 150 55 Di 3 0 abx _ 74108 56 21 D6 Lo GR K C LED RED smt 1206 2 D7 Pins 1 amp 2 shorted on PCA R4 23 X IOCHECK JP7 74HC74 1 2 uF 6 3V ceramic 2 2K 5 24 ah EAS JITO 2 DCSF 100H 1107 25 x EN gt 3 4 DGND 26 23 L 1 27 x R38 i gt HEADER3 DEFAULTED 1 22K U10 28 lt PCF8584 3 5 2 E R25
53. 75 DIA X 1 16 M400A KB OP0000031 7 WINDOW QUARTZ 1 2 DIA 063 THICK KB 05834J 7 Spare Parts List DCN 5480 Page 2 of 2 07 15 09 Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Levels M703E Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Level Standard NN REED 006120100_ ASSY OZONEGENLAMP 1 2 4 022710000 ABSORPTION TUBE QUARTZ 1 2 4 058330000 ASSY INTPUMP 115V eOHz 1 058330100 INT PUMP 230V 50Hz _ T J j 1 1 2 040030700 PRESS SENSORSPHOTOOPT 041200000 DET PREAMP w OP20 BENCH 041200200 DET PREAMP wOP20 OBGEN i 1 1 o 052400000 ASSY UVLAMPBENCH 00 056420000 ASSY FLOW CONTROL DILUTION 056430000 __ 55 FLOW CONTROL PHOTO REF 058021400 E SERIES MOTHERBOARD GEN 52 KIT000253 SPARE 537 PWR SUPPLY 5V 15V 15V 000254 SPARE PS38 POWER SUPPLY 12V_ THER 05863D M703E RSSL DCN 5480 Printed documents are UNCONTROLLED 07 15 09 THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Model Warranty Repair AG TELEDYNE Questionnaire ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION Operator 5 M d 7 Teledyne Technologies Company Manual ode CUSTOMER PHONE CONTACT NAME FAX NO SITE ADDRESS MODEL TYPE SERIAL NO FIRMWARE REVISION Are there
54. OS REVISION DATE FACTORY CONFIGURATION SAVED Pp S EQ CFG CLK PASS MORE Press exit at any time to SETUP menu 05744 Rev B 57 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 7 SETUP gt CLK 6 7 1 SETTING THE INTERNAL CLOCK S TIME AND DAY The M703E has a time of day clock that supports the DURATION step of the calibration sequence feature time of day TEST function and time stamps on most COM port messages To set the clock s time and day press GEN STBY SEQ SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU O3 SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE SETUP X X TIME OF DAY CLOCK TIME DATE DATE 01 JAN 05 ENTR EXIT 5 ENTR EXIT Toggle these Toggle these keys MINUTE keys to enter to enter current day current hour month and year HOUR TIME 22 30 DATE 18 JUN 05 0 ENTR EXIT 0 5 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X TIME OF DAY CLOCK EXIT returns to TIME DATE SETUP display gt 58 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator 6 7 2 ADJUSTING THE INTERNAL CLOCK S SPEED In order to compensate for CPU clocks which run faster or slower you can adjust a variable called CLOCK ADJ to speed up or slow down the clock by a fixed amount every day To change this variable press GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU O3 MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG SETUP X X ENTER SETUP 55 0 8 1 8
55. SPAN VOLTAGE TOLERANCE 10 0 1 0 0005V 0 001V 0 02 mV 1 VDC 0 001V 900 mV 0 001 0 24 5 VDC 0 002V 4500 mV 0 003 1 22 mV 10 VDC 0 004V 4500 mV 0 006V 2 44 mV 72 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator To adjust the signal levels of an analog output channel manually press From the CONFIGURATION SUBMENU See Section 6 9 1 1 DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR AOUTS CALIBRATED NO CAL DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT 5V OVR NOCAL lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT RANGE 5V SET gt EDIT Continue pressing SET gt until DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT CALIBRATED NO lt SET SET gt CAL EXIT DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT VOLT Z 0 mV 0100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTREXIT These keys increase decrease These menu s the analog output signal level if not the value on the display ony appear by 100 10 or 1 counts AUTO CAL is turned OFF Continue adjustments until the DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT VOLT S 4500 mV voltage measured at the output of the analyzer and or the input U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTREXIT of the recording device matches the value in the upper right hand corner of the display within the tolerances listed in Table 6 10 DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT CALIBRATED YES lt SET SET gt CAL EXIT 05744 Rev B 73 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s
56. TELEDYNE API M703E Calibration and Verification M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Attach Pressure Monitor Here Outlets to O Generator Figure 8 4 Generator Pressure Monitor Point Physical Location M703E 126 05744 RevB TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual M703E Calibration and Verification 8 3 2 CALIBRATING THE REGULATOR AND PHOTOMETER PRESSURE SENSORS 1 Turn off the calibrator and open the top cover 2 Connect a pressure meter to the Regulator Pressure measurement fitting This fitting is located on the backside of the regulator assembly see Figure 8 4 3 Turn on the calibrator and perform the following steps Make sure to 7 is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ SETUP 27 PRIMARY SETUP MENU SEQ MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM DIAG ENTER PASSWORD 8 1 8 ENTR Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD SIGNAL I O PREV NEXT Continue pressing NEXT until PRESSURE CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR SAMPLE PRESS 28 00 IN HG A 0 2 8 0 0 EXIT REGULATOR PRESS 20 56 PSIG Toggle these keys change the M703E s pressure display to match 0 5 6 EXIT the value measured by a pressure monitor installed in line with the pressure sensor being calibrated see Table 8 1 and Figures 8 3 amp 8 4 4 Turn OFF the M703E remove the pressure monitor replace the cap on the pressure measurement fitting 05744 Rev B 127
57. Toggle this button to ENTR EXIT OFF enable disable password feasture Y SETUP X X PASSWORD ENABLE ON ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the ON new setting 60 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator Example If all passwords are enabled the following keypad sequence would be required to enter the VARS or DIAG submenus GEN STBY SEQ SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU 03 SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT Press individual SYSTEM ENTER SETUP PASS 0 keys to set 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT number EXAMPLE This SYSTEM ENTER SETUP PASS 0 password enables the 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT SETUP mode M703E enters selected menu NOTE The instrument still prompts for a password when entering the VARS and DIAG menus even if passwords are disabled but it displays the default password 818 upon entering these menus The user only has to press ENTR to access the password protected menus but does not have to enter the required number code 61 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 9 SETUP gt DIAG gt TEST CHAN OUTPUT USING THE TEST CHANNEL ANALOG OUTPUT The M703E calibrator comes equipped with one analog output It can be set by the user to carry the current signal level of any one of the parameters listed in Table 6 8 an
58. X4660mpc 250soc 10 30 9 EXAMPLE If the measured pressure is 20 Hg in A the expected voltage level between TP4 TP1 would be between 2870 mVDC and 3510 mVDC EXAMPLE If the measured pressure is 25 Hg in A the expected voltage level between TP4 and TP1 would be between 3533 mVDC and 4318 mVDC If this voltage is out of range then either pressure transducer 51 is bad the board is bad or there is pneumatic failure preventing the pressure transducer from sensing the absorption cell pressure properly GENERATOR PRESSURE SENSOR 1 Measure the pressure on the inlet side of S2 with an external pressure meter 2 Measure the voltage across TP5 and 1 e The expected value for this signal should be Pressure Expected mVDC 4250 0 7502 10 rq 34 1 8psig 9 EXAMPLE If the measured pressure is 25 psig the expected voltage level between TP4 and TP1 would be between 3470 mVDC and 4245 mVDC EXAMPLE If the measured pressure is 30 psig the expected voltage level between TP4 and TP1 would be between 4030 mVDC and 4930 mVDC e If this voltage is out of range then either pressure transducer 51 is bad the board is bad or there is pneumatic failure preventing the pressure transducer from sensing the absorption cell pressure properly PHOTOMETER FLOW SENSOR e Measure the voltage across TP3 and TP1 With proper flow 800 through the photometer this should be ap
59. several attempts to clear it the message may indicate a real problem and not an artifact of the warm up period STANDBY ACT STANDBY the currently selected TEST FUNCTION and value TST gt GEN STBY SEQ 178 05744 Rev B M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE API General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator Table 11 1 Front Panel Warning Messages WARNING FAULT CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration and Calibration data reset to original Factory state Failed Disk on Chip User has erased configuration data DATA INITIALIZED Data Storage in iDAS was erased Failed Disk on Chip User cleared data FRONT PANEL WARN The CPU is unable to Communicate with the Front Panel Display Keyboard WARNING only appears on Serial COM Port s Front Panel Display will be frozen blank or will not respond Failed Keyboard Bus failure Loose Connector Wiring LAMP DRIVER WARN The CPU is unable to communicate with either the Os generator or photometer lamp C driver chip C has failed O3 GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING IZS Ozone Generator Temp is outside of control range of 48 C 3 C No IZS option installed instrument improperly configured Os generator heater Os generator temperature sensor Relay controlling the O3 generator heater Entire Relay PCA I2C Bus O3 GEN REFERENCE The generator s Possible fail
60. 0 0 0 0 PCT ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting STANDBY LEVEL 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new Toggle these keys until az LEVEL number the designation of the existing defined level program is reached ENTR accepts the new LEVEL number 82 05744 Rev B M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator 6 12 5 2 Creating a MANUAL LEVEL To create a level using the M703E s MANUAL generation function press Starting at the CHOOSE ACTION Submenu CHOOSE ACTION Submenu ACTION TO PERFORM GENERATE NEXT Use the NEXT until INSERT STEP MANUAL ENTR EXIT SETUP X X O3 GEN MODE OFF This Key OFF CNST REF BNCH ENTR EXIT Turns the the Generator OFF ON This key sets a CONSTANT drive voltage for the Generator These keys set a target O3 GEN SET POINT 0 0 MV ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to set output CONCENTRATION of the generator L Toggle these keys to set the CONSTANT drive voltage of the LEVEL 0 generator ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new Toggle these keys until LEVEL number the designation of the existing defined level ENTR accepts the new program is reached LEVEL number gt concentration for the O4 Generator REF The concentration control loop will use the generator s reference detector as input BNCH The concentration control loop will use the photomete
61. 01 CONTROL Bit 02 CONTROL Bit 05 CONTROL Bit 06 5 6 4 U 1 2 3 4 5 CONTROL Bit 07 9 tn a 2 8 CONTROL Bit 09 9 10 CONTROL Bit 10 CONTROL Bit 11 11 12 U ONTROL Bit 12 Figure 3 7 CONTROL Bit 09 CONTROL Bit 10 CONTROL Bit 11 CONTROL Bit 12 CONTROL Bit 07 CONTROL Bit 08 9 10 1125 U 5 VDC Power Supply M703E Digital Control Input Connectors 16 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started 3 2 5 CONNECTING THE CONTROL OUTPUTS The calibrator is equipped with 12 opto isolated digital control outputs These outputs are activated by the M703E s user programmable calibration sequences see Section 6 5 1 6 for instructions on assigning the control outputs to specific calibration sequences These outputs may be used to interface with devices that accept logic level digital inputs such as programmable logic controllers PLC s dataloggers or digital relays valve drivers They are accessed via a 14 pin connector on the calibrator s rear panel See Figure 3 2 CONTROL OUTPUTS 12 5 6 7 8 9 1 11 12 E 4 Figure 3 8 M703E Digital Control Output Connector NOTE Most PLC s have internal provisions for limiting the current the input will draw When connecting to a unit that does not have this feature external resistors must
62. 1 stop bit o Parity None Male DB 9 RS 232 Female DB 9 COM2 As seen from outside analyzer As seen from outside analyzer GND GND DTE mode GND DCE mode Figure 7 1 Default Pin Assignments for Back Panel COMM Port connectors RS 232 DCE amp DTE The signals from these two connectors are routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to two 10 pin connectors on the CPU card CN3 COM1 and CN4 2 CN3 amp CN4 Located on CPU card CTS GND As seen from inside analyzer Figure 7 2 Default Pin Assignments for CPU COM Port connector RS 232 88 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports Teledyne Instruments offers two mating cables one of which should be applicable for your use Part number 000077 a DB 9 female to DB 9 female cable 6 feet long Allows connection of the serial ports of most personal computers Also available as Option 60 See Section 5 2 1 e Part number WR000024 a DB 9 female to DB 25 male cable Allows connection to the most common styles of modems e g Hayes compatible and code activated switches Both cables are configured with straight through wiring and should require no additional adapters NOTE Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors may incorporate internal wiring that makes the link inoperable Check cables acquired from sources other
63. 2 rite rt eet Reda eek ern ERR de Edad 128 8 4 1 Calibrating the Photometer s Sample Gas 129 8 4 2 Calibrating the OuTput Gas Flow 130 8 4 2 1 Outp t Gas Flow Set Up cene ea ete delta te e aa 130 8 4 2 2 Performing an Output Gas Flow 131 TECHNICAL INFORMATION ecere ce e rre nue me ee nor neun nu e reuera nno 133 9 THEORY OF OPERATION 5 RRAERAEMARRRARMEARRRARMRARRRARRRARRRARRRARRRARRRARRRA ERR 135 9T Pneumatic Operatiorn ete ti oce ecd Ie enti deque te Eu 135 9711 135 914 5 Flow iege 135 9 1 1 2 Photometer Critical Flow cece eeaeee cece 135 9 1 2 Internal Gas Pressure 0020 00000 136 9 2 Electronic Operaliori xvas cas IUUD AMT 137 9 21 pH 137 92 2 CPUs si TN GI IATER eO RAD ENIM OE e itera
64. 232 MULTIDROP OPT 62 The multidrop option is used with any of the RS 232 serial ports to enable communications of up to eight calibrators with the host computer over a chain of RS 232 cables via the instruments COM1 Port It is subject to the distance limitations of the RS 232 standard Rear Panel CPU Card as seen from inside Multidrop Card Figure 5 1 M703E Multidrop Card The option consists of a small printed circuit assembly which plugs into to the calibrator s CPU card see Figure 5 6 It is connected to the RS 232 and COM2 DB9 connectors on the instrument s back panel a cable to the motherboard One option 62 is required for each calibrator along with one 6 straight through DB9 male DB9 Female cable P N 0000101 30 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator Operator s Manual Optional Hardware and Software 5 2 4 ETHERNET OPT 63 The ETHERNET option allows the calibrator to be connected to any Ethernet local area network LAN running TCP IP The local area network must have routers capable of operating at 10BaseT If Internet access is available through the LAN this option also allows communication with the instrument over the public Internet Maximum communication speed is limited by the RS 232 port to 115 2 kBaud When installed this option is electronically connected to the instrument s COM2 serial port making that port no longer available for RS 232 RS 485 communic
65. 6 1 1 Calculating 155 9 6 1 2 The Measurement Reference 156 9 6 1 3 The Absorption Path enero Leite rH re erae et etie eee ee dt 158 9 6 1 4 Interferent Rejection iui tenete toii tee dide Edd ete edd ke ded ee Lid E dd 158 9 6 2 Photometer oe Ee eet eet ce 159 9 6 3 Photometer Pneumatic Operation ener nnne nennen 159 9 6 4 Photometer Electronic 160 9 6 4 1 Photometer Temperature 22 160 9 6 4 2 Pneumatic Sensors for the Photometer 161 10 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE amp 222 22 163 10 1 Maintenance Schedule 2 ee eee eee egere e 163 10 2 Performing Leak CHECKS nde itta tran e trage rea etra pese e ego eate ci ba ce ER n baa 167 10 2 1 Pressure Leak Check eter tete te retener eee dee Rees aae eR Ee aae 167 10 3 Cleaning or replacing the Absorption Tube ssssssssssessseeseeeeneeeeen ennemi 171 10 4 Rebuilding Dry Air PUMP wich ee eon eed dete e deh ated esis 171 10 5 Photometer UV Source Lamp 172 10 6 Photometer UV Source Lamp
66. 99 999 Photometer detector path length 30 BOX_SET Warnings 0 100 ee box temperature set point and warning 5 45 E Molar mass of sample gas for computing QASUMOLSWEIGHT Moli 92 1535825 concentrations by weight instead of volume to 100 characters Any character in the allowed SERIAL_NUMBER long Front panel display intensity Enclose value in DISP_INTENSITY HIGH double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface 00000000 character set Up Unique serial number for instrument A 14 05745 Rev TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX 2 Setup Variables For Serial I O Software Version C 0 M703E SETUP VARIABLES FOR LATEST REVISION NUMERI DEFAULT SETUP VARIABLE C UNITS VALUE VALUE RANGE DESCRIPTION Time of day clock format flags Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface 95a Abbreviated weekday name b Abbreviated month name d Day of month as decimal number 01 31 Hour in 24 hour format 00 23 l Hour in 12 hour format 01 12 2 Day of year as decimal number 001 366 Any character in the allowed character set Up 95m Month as decimal number 01 12 to 100 characters Minute as decimal number 00 59 TIME H CLOCK_FORMAT 5 long p A M P M indicator for 12 hour clock S Second as decimal number 00
67. AND CARRY THE CALIBRATOR 1 Inspect the received packages for external shipping damage If damaged please advise the shipper first then Teledyne Instruments 2 Included with your calibrator is a printed record of the final performance characterization performed on your instrument at the factory This record titled Final Test and Validation Data Sheet P N 05760 is an important quality assurance and calibration record for this instrument It should be placed in the quality records file for this instrument 3 Carefully remove the top cover of the calibrator and check for internal shipping damage e Remove the set screw located in the top center of the Front panel e Remove the 2 screws fastening the top cover to the unit one per side towards the rear e Slide the cover backwards until it clears the calibrator s front bezel e Lift the cover straight up NOTE Printed circuit assemblies PCAs are sensitive to electro static discharges too small to be felt by the human nervous system Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty See Chapter 12 for more information on preventing ESD damage CAUTION NEVER DISCONNECT ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT BOARDS WIRING HARNESSES OR ELECTRONIC SUBASSEMBLIES WHILE THE UNIT IS UNDER POWER 4 Inspect the interior of the instrument to make sure all circuit boards and other components are in good shape and prop
68. APPENDIX A Version Specific Software Documentation APPENDIX Version Specific Software Documentation APPENDIX A 1 Model 703E Software Menu Trees Software Version C 0 APPENDIX A 2 Model 703E Setup Variables Available Via Serial I O Software Version C 0 APPENDIX 3 Model 703E Warnings and Test Measurements Via Serial I O Software Version C 0 APPENDIX A 4 Model 703E Signal I O Definitions Software Version C 0 APPENDIX A 5 Model M703E Terminal Command Designators Software Version C 0 05745 Rev C 1 TELEDYNE API APPENDIX A Version Specific Software Documentation M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual USER NOTES A 2 05745 Rev C 60 ldd s J0 eJqIijeo ay seouenbes uoneJqie 40 euo ue u ym sjeedde ueuw sjeedde eunBiJ si nd no au JO afe 195 0 660 ddd 0 0 0 0 O ddd 0 31 V3HuN39 uoneJeueB Q U93IMS ALVYANAS 31VH3N39 lt 161 onjeA 2dSs SS NW HHI aWIL 1 35430 OLOHd enieA Jz3dO1S OLOHd enjeAJ dINALS OLOHd V OH NI 65 3435 OLOHd enjeAJ d
69. Acronym for Internal Data Acquisition System previously referred to as DAS LAN Acronym for local area network LED Acronym for Light Emitting Diode LPM Acronym for liters per minute Acronym for mass flow controller MOLAR MASS The molar mass is the mass expressed in grams of one mole of a specific substance Conversely one mole is the amount of the substance needed for the molar mass to be the same number in grams as the atomic mass of that substance EXAMPLE The atomic weight of Carbon is 12 therefore the molar mass of Carbon is 12 grams conversely one mole of carbon equals the amount of carbon atoms that weighs 12 grams Atomic weights can be found on any Periodic Table of Elements Acronym for Printed Circuit Assembly this is the gt PCB with electronic components installed and ready to use PCB Acronym for printed circuit board the bare circuit board without components PLC Acronym for programmable logic controller a device that is used to control instruments based on a logic level signal coming from the system PFA Acronym for Per Fluoro Alkoxy an inert polymer One of the polymers that du Pont markets as Teflon along with FEP and PTFE PTFE Acronym for Poly Tetra Fluoro Ethylene a very inert polymer material used to handle gases that may react on other surfaces One of the polymers that du Pont markets as Teflon along with FEP and PFA PVC Acronym for Poly Vinyl Chlori
70. CHANNEL 0 1 20000 ppb 500 ppb analog signal O3 PHOTO CONC Os bench control flag ON turns on the photometer pump and ON OFF 3 O3 PHOTO BENCH ONLY switches measure reference valve only OFF when the mode is set for BNCH See Section 3 4 5 Internal zero air pump control ONIOFF ZA PUMP ON turns on internal zero air pump when ON generating ozone 1 Sets the standard Temperature used in 5 STD TEMP calculating Os flow rates and concentrations FC emd IPC 5 1 Sets the standard pressure used 15 00 50 00 E STD PRESSURE calculating Os flow rates and concentrations POIR ARRERA Adjusts the speed of the analyzer s clock Choose the sign if the clock is too slow 60 to 60 s day 7 CLOCK_ADJ choose the sign if the clock is too fast See Default 0 Section 6 7 2 DO NOT ADJUST OR CHANGE these values unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments customer service personnel Only available in calibrators with photometer and generator options installed NOTE There is a 2 second latency period between when a VARS value is changed and the new value is stored into the analyzer s memory DO NOT turn the analyzer off during this period or the new setting will be lost 05744 Rev B 75 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual To access and navigate the VARS menu use the following key sequence Make sure that the M703E
71. D3 3 icol sp See R48 200 CH9 AN MUX 15V 16 Ge 4 5 AGND IN2 CH8 9 54 6 3 N C47 U56 IN4 0 15 uF ceramic 9 1 2 uF 6 3V ceramic C48 8 A 10 NC NC VT 11 v NC VIN 2 E 1 xi 12 VOUT NR X R47 and R48 reduce the gain PLACE 100 c TRIM GND 4 1 2 uF 63 0 15 uH ceramic for analog inputs by 194 so OHM MICROFIT 1 that we can read slightly above RESISTOR AS TEMPMUX 1 VOLTAGE REF full scale to prevent overflow CLOS AS of ADC reading POSSIBLE TO REF AND X2 VREF D6 100 RNI7 vcc Pa 100Kx8 2 DACMU TC6 1 10 10 uF 35 TANTALUM a ayy ee 058 Pils 74 574 AA EM D4 7 Di Q1 19 gt RDMBYTE D2 02 17 D3 03 16 Dic BE is C51 DS 05 14 0 15 uF ceramic ______ gt 06 Q6 B ys D 12 1 60 52 74HC32 0 15 uF ceramic D 0 7 TPS1 52 53 54 Q 0 Q 1 Ql SA 74HC32 D2 8B SB 11 VFREAD gt B __ _________ Di 16 START ee 15 05 095 D6 Q6 13 MID D7 Q7 hs 12 LSB Title Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702 Size Number Revision Orcad B 05703 A Date 17 Jun 2008 Sheet 4 of 8 File N Pcbmgr 05701dn E motherboard gen4 Sdiirre0 5701 a DDB
72. ENTR EXIT PREV NEXT JUMP Continue pressing NEXT until SETUP 7 CLOCK_ADJUST 0 Sec Day PREV NEXT EDIT ENTR EXIT SETUP X X 7 CLOCK ADJUST 0 Sec Day 0 0 EDIT ENTR EXIT _____________ Enter sign and number of seconds per day the clock gains or loses SETUP X X 7 CLOCK_ADJUST 0 Sec Day PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting P 05744 Rev B 59 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 8 SETUP gt PASS The M703E provides password protection of the calibration and setup functions to prevent unauthorized adjustments When the passwords have been enabled in the PASS menu item the system will prompt the user for a password anytime a password protected function is requested There are three levels of password protection which correspond to operator maintenance and configuration functions Each level allows access to all of the functions in the previous level Table 6 6 Password Levels PASSWORD LEVEL MENU ACCESS ALLOWED All functions of the MAIN menu TEST GEN initiate SEQ MSG CLR Access to Primary and Secondary Setup Menus except for VARS amp DIAG Configuration Secondary SETUP Submenus VARS and DIAG To enable or disable passwords press GEN STBY 5 EQ PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE ETUP X X PASSWORD ENABLE OFF SYSTEM
73. ENTR accepts the Toggle these keys to match the actual flow as measured by the external flow meter WAITING FOR FLOW new setting FCAL ACTUAL OUTPUT FLOW 1 000 LPM DON NOT press the ENTR button 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT at this point Doing so will cause the slope applied to the Output Flow reading be recalculated 05744 Rev B 129 TELEDYNE API M703E Calibration and Verification M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 8 4 2 CALIBRATING THE OUTPUT GAS FLOW 8 4 2 1 Output Gas Flow Set Up The procedure described in this section requires an independent calibrated flow meter monitor and the following set up DRY AIR IN M703E Chassis PHOTOMETER BENCH GAS INPUT PRESSURE SENSOR PHOTOMETER Pressure PRESSURE SENSOR uassnu s TWODYVHD Regulator GEN PHOTOMETER PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR PCA HOSN3S ZERO AIR IN 2 ul F4 Flow Control 2 800 cm min 49 EE EE a 5 20 8 9 To E 28 38 zu 25 5 52 d 2 29 i E P OFF 55 ei PHOTOMETER INLET PHOTOMETER ZERO IN EXHAUST PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT INTERNAL VENT 63 PHOTOMETER OUTLET TO ANALYZE lo
74. IN GUT REF FO REF SCK 2 Eas PHOTO_OUT IN 500 CS o GND GND e GND GND LTC2413 PCA VERSION TABLE R1 04120 0000 4 99M 04120 0200 2 0M TP1 TEST_PLUG 9 J1 PHOTO OUT _ a lt lt MICROFIT TELEDYNE The information herein is the PCA UV DETECTOR PREAMP property of API and is submitted in strictest con DRAWN fidence for reference only Unauthorized use by anyone for any other purposes is CHECKED a DRAWING NO pum prohibited This document or 04420 any information contained in it may not be duplicated APPROVED LAST MOD SHEET without proper authorization o 3 Aug 2004 TU R1 J1 30R 50W 1 2 3 4 5 TH1 6 gt HEADER 6 THERMISTOR C B Rev Date Change Description Eng A 8 1 02 Initial release for PCA schematic KL w TELEDYNE The information herein is the f APPROVALS SCH DC HEATER THERMISTOR property of API and is submitted in strictest con fidence for reference only Unauthorized use by anyone for any other purposes is CHECKED SIZE DRAWING REVISION prohibited This document or fe 04422 any information contained in it may not be duplicated APPROVED pd MOD SHEET without proper authorization 1 Aug 2002 BERN
75. Make sure that the M703E is in lt TST TST gt GEN STBY SEQ SETUP STANDBY STANDBY SYSTEM RESET AUTO STANDBY GENERATE ZERO ZERO SETUP Toggle this key to switch to O3 generation mode STANDBY GENERATE 0 0 PPB O3 0 0 0 0 PPB ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys Toggle this key to to set the target set the units of concentration _ measure STANDBY GENERATE 0 0 PPB 0 4 0 0 PPB O3 ENTR EXIT GENERATE ACT 400 PPB Wait A MINIMUM SET SET GEN STBY SEQ SETUP OF 10 MINUTES or until the ACT reading settles down Record O concentration readings displayed by the ACT test function and by the external reference photometer Repeat this procedure for as many points along the performance range of the M703E as required NOTE The readings recorded from the M703E s ACT test function and the external reference photometer should be within 1 of each other 05744 Rev B 115 TELEDYNE API M703E Calibration and Verification M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 8 1 3 CALIBRATING THE PHOTOMETER The following procedure sets values held in the calibrators memory of for zero point OFFSET and SLOPE 8 1 3 1 Photometer Zero Calibration To set the zero point offset for the M703E Photometric Calibrator s photometer press GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU 03 SEQ MORE O3 GAS CONFIG MODE PHOT O3 GAS CONFIG BCAL DARK SYSTEM ENTER P
76. Manual 6 9 1 2 Selecting a Test Channel Function to Output The Test Functions available to be reported are Table 6 8 Test Channels Functions Available on the M703E s Analog Output TEST CHANNEL DESCRIPTION ZERO FULL SCALE TEST CHANNEL IS TURNED OFF 5 The raw output of the photometer during its 0 mV 5000 mV measure cycle O3 PHOTO REF The raw output of the photometer during its 0mV 5000 mV reference cycle The raw output of the generator s 0 mV 5000 mV reference detector OUTPUT FLOW The gas flow being output through the CAL 0 cm min 5 000 cm min GAS outlets on the back of the instrument REGULATOR PRESSURE The gas pressure measured by the 0 PSIG 105 PSIG generator pressure sensor SAMPLE PRESSURE The pressure of gas in the photometer 0 Hg 40 Hg In A absorption tube SAMPLEFLOW f FLOW The gas flow rate through the photometer gas flow rate The gas flow rate through the photometer the photometer 1000 cc min The temperature of gas in the photometer 0 C 70 C absorption tube PHOTOLAMPTEMP LAMP TEMP The temperature of the photometer UV lamp temperature of the The temperature of the photometer UV lamp UV lamp LAMP TEMP The temperature of the generator s UV 0 mV 5000 mV lamp CHASSIS TEMP The temperature inside the M703E s chassis 0 C 70 C same as BOX TEMP O3 PHOTO CONC The current concentration of being 0 C 1 ppm measured by the ph
77. O3 Calibrator Operators Manual USER NOTES 164 05744 Rev B 99 Ade vv S0 obi pue seuil JI S9A Jo soueuajuley Aue Jaye Jo Ajjenuuy 16 J297 yea JuoA ACOZIN 993 pesn S sed 0192 ean 3383 ALVINOILYVd NV319 AINO joue A Sv 5675 52 dre 59084 JON Pinoys eqn 99 2 j Ajjenuuy eoe des BY JO 99 1527 sduing eu seouejsuinour JO z jeue suonounJ ON eoueuojure A Aue wind 15 2 Joye jo PUB PJ099H 1891 ASA jenuew 19599 peuuojJag ejnpeuos eoueuazUleW 1 0 AIGeL 2 lt 5 10 103219122 3202 3NAG3 TAL 2 0 991 SALON HASN 10 e14q11e9 FEOLN 5 2 lt 3NAG3 T31 TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures
78. OD 7 Av 1dSIaq QHVOSA3 189 000062700 Nd Ajquessy Nd Ajquessy jeubis OL NOILO3NNOO NOILO3NNOO 2002 0171 AM EIU V a1eq 2 uonduoseg UOISIA8H 2102 abe SILNAWNDOC Huns 328uuo2481U 320 V 5 12850 001060470 pueog Aejay 001062970 peog 000020 0 001060470 pueog 000020 0 001060470 pueog ejau OVAOEC T 000020 0 009099170 dwe uoueg 001060470 001060470 peog ejau OVASLI 3 0 IN H31dVGV 182 pueog ejau 00002299 009099170 dwe uoueg 001060470 pueog ASL 009099170 dwe uoueg 0290 peoga y oN vas 009099170 dwe uoueg 0290 peoga y oN TOS 009099170 jddng dwe uoueg 001099170 A ddns 57 vas 009099170 jddng dwe uoueg 001099170 jddng 57 125 001060470 pueog Aejay 00 020 50 peoga y oN PISIUS 001060470 pueog Aejay 001099170 A ddns 5
79. POINT ENABLELD ON EXIT discards ON ENTR EXIT the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting SET EDIT Toggle this key to turn the point ON OFF 05744 Rev B 123 TELEDYNE API M703E Calibration and Verification M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 8 2 6 PERFORMING AN AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION OF THE O GENERATOR To run the automatic generator calibration program press Make sure that the M703E o m U is in standby mode GEN STBY Q PRIMARY SETUP MENU O3 MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM DIAG ENTER PASSWORD ENTR Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD SIGNAL I O PREV NEXT Continue pressing NEXT until O3 GEN CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR O3 GEN CALIBRATION CAL PNTS O3 GEN CAL 0 COMPLETE EXIT aborts the calibration Test runs automatically O3 GEN CAL 100 COMPLETE 124 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual M703E Calibration and Verification 8 3 7 GAS PRESSURE SENSOR CALIBRATION The M703E Calibrator has two sensors that monitor the pressure of the gases flowing through the instrument The data collected by these sensors is used to compensate the final concentration calculations for changes in atmospheric pressure and is stored in the CPU s memory as test functions Table 8 1 M703E Pressure Sensors ASSOCIATED PRESSURE MONITOR SENSOR TEST FUNCTION UNITS MEASUREMEN
80. Pin Outs for COM2 in RS 485 mode 104 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports 7 5 REMOTE ACCESS VIA THE ETHERNET When equipped with the optional Ethernet interface the calibrator can be connected to any standard 10BaseT Ethernet network via low cost network hubs switches or routers The interface operates as a standard TCP IP device on port 3000 This allows a remote computer to connect through the internet to the calibrator using APICOM terminal emulators or other programs The firmware on board the Ethernet card automatically sets the communication modes and baud rate 115 200 kBaud for COM2 port Once the Ethernet option is installed and activated the COM2 submenu is replaced by a new submenu INET This submenu is used to manage and configure the Ethernet interface with your LAN or Internet Server s The card has four LEDs that are visible on the rear panel of the calibrator indicating its current operating status Table 7 4 Ethernet Status Indicators LED FUNCTION LNK green ON when connection to the LAN is valid ACT yellow Flickers on any activity on the LAN TxD green Flickers when the RS 232 port is transmitting data RxD yellow Flickers when the RS 232 port is receiving data 7 5 1 ETHERNET CARD COM2 COMMUNICATION MODES AND BAUD RATE The firmware on board the Ethernet card automatically sets the communicat
81. SYSCLK DC RESET aL NOT INSTALLED 051 M 4 6 ES 4 INT 5 14 3 X 74HC32 4 AD amp INT 5 33 CX 50 79 A0 S4 pos IDC HEADER RESET 35 x lt 1 32 15 74 08 7 2 4 0508 IOR 16 37 KK DC DRV RST AREH TOW i RD SCL 3 38 x lt m IM WR 4 39 PRE s SDA 5 40 5 CLK 6 ob 21 8 7 PC104CD 64 74 08 1 D2 9 GND 3 CLR ___ __ DB 8 END 74HC08 23 101B ue 1 62 0500 D4 MICROFTI 104 VEE Bo a T 3 DBS BALE 35X 086 VSS ne gt lt IDC H ADER DACK2 1 85 74HC32 47k 5 574 U39 74 08 03 IRQ 699 8 RS IRQ 1 2 JP2 LT mos 55 La X 4 2 INT 54 1206 53 shorted sldr sid 5 1807 gt gt C3 Se 3 Lid ol 74 004 L REFRESH 50 JP3 IDC HEADER 0 wD RESET Iisi Cami DRQI 1 52 TD ur DC RESET 9 ae DRQ3 666 SHDN gt uo duc IOR IOR SHDN 16 55 low ls A a 4 SMEMR ux US SMEMW 5 lt L PRE Q 2 1 U6D KEY gt CLK _ _ IRQI2 12v 4 1 O 12V 3 IOEN 12 4 D S_SHDAC capac gt al 3 ENDXFR 07 o CER 1 4 12V Mx 23 DRQ2 74HC32 15 gt 36 pes 357 R61 E RESETDRV 47 5 x GND KBINT Notes Title Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702 1 This schematic is for PCA 05702 S 2 This schematic is
82. TELEDYNE API M703E Calibration and Verification M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 8 4 M703E GAS FLOW CALIBRATION The M703E has two gas flow characteristics that affect its performance the flow of gas thought the sample chamber of the instrument s photometer and the total gas flow being output While both are stored in the calibrator s memory and used to compensate the final concentration calculations for changes in atmospheric pressure they are calculated quite differently PHOTOMETER SAMPLE GAS FLOW RATE This flow rate is measured directly by a flow sensor located pressure flow sensor PCA A slope factor stored in the calibrators memory the last time a PHOTO FLOW calibration operation see Section 8 4 1 was performed is and applied to the reading from that sensor The calculated photometer sample gas flow value is viewable on the instrument s front panel using the PHOTO FLOW test function and can be output via the M703E s TEST CHANNEL output using the SAMPLE FLOW function OUTPUT GAS FLOW RATE This flow rate is calculated by applying a separate slope factor also stored in the calibrator s memory to interpolated valued based on the following table of internal gas pressure as measured by the gas input pressure sensor The output flow slope value is determined by performing an OUPUT FLOW calibration operation see Section 8 4 2 Table 8 2 M703E Gas Pressure to Output Flow conversion Table
83. The M703E is equipped with an analog output channel accessible through a connector on the back panel of the instrument The standard configuration for this output is 0 5 VDC It can be set by the user to output one of a variety of diagnostic test functions see Section 6 9 To access these signals attach a strip chart recorder and or data logger to the appropriate analog output connections on the rear panel of the calibrator Pin outs for the analog output connector at the rear panel of the instrument are ANALOG OUT Figure 3 5 M703E the TEST CHANNEL Connector 05744 Rev B 13 TELEDYNE API Getting Started M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 3 2 3 CONNECTING THE STATUS OUTPUTS The status outputs report calibrator conditions via optically isolated NPN transistors which sink up to 50 mA of DC current These outputs can be used interface with devices that accept logic level digital inputs such as programmable logic controllers PLC s Each Status bit is an open collector output that can withstand up to 40 VDC All of the emitters of these transistors are tied together and available at D NOTE Most PLC s have internal provisions for limiting the current that the input will draw from an external device When connecting to a unit that does not have this feature an external dropping resistor must be used to limit the current through the transistor output to less than 50 mA At 50 mA the transistor will drop approxi
84. The control input bits can be tested by applying a trigger voltage to an input and watching changes in the status of the associated function under the SIGNAL I O submenu EXAMPLE to test the A control input 1 Under the DIAG gt SIGNAL I O menu See Section11 1 3 scroll through the inputs and outputs until you get to the output named 0 CONTROL_IN_1 Connect a jumper from the pin on the appropriate connector to the U on the same connector Connect a second jumper from the V pin on the connector to the A pin The status of 0 CONTROL IN 1 should change to read ON 05744 Rev B 193 TELEDYNE API General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operators Manual 11 4 8 5 Control Outputs Table 11 12 Control Outputs Pin Assignments and Corresponding Signal I O Functions Check PIN LEFT TO RIGHT STATUS 1 CONTROL_OUT_1 CONTROL OUT 2 CONTROL OUT 3 CONTROL OUT 4 CONTROL OUT 5 CONTROL OUT 6 CONTROL OUT 7 CONTROL OUT 8 CONTROL OUT 9 CONTROL OUT 10 CONTROL OUT 11 CONTROL OUT 12 NI aJa AJOJN test the Control Output electronics 1 2 3 4 Connect a jumper between the E pin and the V pin on the status output connector Connect 1000 ohm resistor between the pin and the pin for the status output that is being tested Connect a voltmeter between the
85. V pin and the pin of the output being tested see Table 11 12 Under the DIAG SIGNAL I O menu See Section11 1 3 scroll through the inputs and outputs until you get to the output in question Alternately turn on and off the output noting the voltage on the voltmeter e It should vary between 0 volts for ON and 5 volts for OFF 11 4 9 CPU There are two major types of failures associated with the CPU board complete failure and a failure associated with the Disk On Chip on the CPU board If either of these failures occur contact the factory For complete failures assuming that the power supplies are operating properly and the wiring is intact the CPU is bad if on powering the instrument The vacuum fluorescent display shows a dash in the upper left hand corner The CPU Status LED DS5 is not flashing See Section 11 1 4 1 There is no activity from the primary RS 232 port on the rear panel even if lt ret gt is pressed In some rare circumstances this failure may be caused by a bad IC on the motherboard specifically U57 the large 44 pin device on the lower right hand side of the board If this is true removing U57 from its socket will allow the instrument to startup but the measurements will be incorrect If the calibrator stops part way through initialization there are words on the vacuum fluorescent display then it is likely that the DOC has been corrupted 194 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrato
86. XXXX X MV 118 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual M703E Calibration and Verification 8 2 CALIBRATING THE GENERATOR The 7 calibrator s software includes a routine for automatically calibrating the generator A calibration table of drive voltages stored in the M703E s memory is the basis for this calibration This table is used by the M703E to set initial O3 generator drive settings 8 2 1 03 GENERATOR CALIBRATION TABLE When the M703E is operated in BENCH mode this table is used for the initial setting only After a short delay time the bench feedback control will take over and control the O3 generator drive to servo in to the exact concentration requested When the 7 is operated in CONST mode the initial generator drive setting will be set by the calibration table and does not change When the M703E is operated in REF mode the calibration table sets the initial drive setting and then the reference detector feedback takes over to maintain the lamp at a constant intensity as measured by the reference detector The target value for the reference detector for a particular target concentration is also stored in this calibration table The instrument software will interpolate between two values in the table when an intermediate concentration is requested For each point included in the table used by the M703E to calibrate the optional generator the user can set a
87. a measurable decrease in UV intensity is short enough approximately 42 cm that the light beam is only required to make one pass through the Absorption Tube Therefore no complex mirror system is needed to lengthen the effective path by bouncing the beam back and forth Finally the UV passes through a similar window at the other end of the absorption tube and is detected by a specially designed vacuum diode that only detects radiation at or very near a wavelength of 254nm The specificity of the detector is high enough that no extra optical filtering of the UV light is needed The detector reacts to the UV light and outputs a current signal that varies in direct relationship with the intensity of the light shining on it This current signal is amplified and converted to a 0 to 5 VDC voltage analog signal voltage sent to the instrument s motherboard where it is digitized The CPU to be uses this digital data in computing the concentration of in the absorption tube Window Window UV Detector ABSORPTION TUBE 56 2 Analog current signal is output by l Detector 205 Sample Gas OUT UV Sample Gas IN Source i Absorption Path Length 42 cm LI O 5 VDC Photometer analog signal Pre amp to PCA Motherboard Figure 9 20 Photometer Absorption Path 9 6 1 4 Interferent Rejection It should be noted that the UV absorption method for de
88. dee eee 96 T1 6 9 Data ete kt IR Ge da ane eel ce RT cede RR 96 151 Status Reporting en cedri cem nr en eed 97 7 1 7 5 COM Port Password 98 7 2 Remote Access by Modem 0222 1 1 10 rni ters inrer nnn nnn snnt nnns 99 7 3 Multidrop RS 232 Set Up n eee ete eee vec uve lu He n eee 101 7 4 RS 485 Configuration of COMJ nti De ED ER rd dE EE PEE ere ER eee E 103 7 5 Remote Access via the 105 7 5 1 Ethernet Card COM2 Communication Modes and Baud 105 7 5 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface Option using 105 7 5 2 1 Manually Configuring the Network IP 4 108 7 5 3 Changing the Calibrators 5 nre nnns 110 7 6 APICOM Remote Control 111 8 M703E CALIBRATION AND VERIFICATION essen nennen nnne nnn 113 8 1 Verifying and Calibrating the M703E s eene 113 8 1 1 Setup for VERIFYING AND calibrating the 113 8 1 1 1 Calibration Manifold Exhaust Vent eene 114 8 1 2 Verifying Ph
89. default offset for all ranges is 0 VDC To change the output range press From the CONFIGURATION SUBMENU See Section 6 9 1 1 DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR AOUTS CALIBRATED NO CAL DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT 5V OVR NOCAL Pressing ENTR records lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT the new setting and These keys set returns d previous HERRA TEVA Pressing EXIT ignores the and type of the DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT RANGE 5V new setting and returns to pases the previous men channel 0 1V 1V 5V 10V ENTR EXIT previou 17 66 05744 TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator 6 9 1 4 Turning the TEST CHANNEL Over Range Feature ON OFF In its default configuration a 5 over range is available on each of the M703E s TEST CHANNEL output This over range can be disabled if your recording device is sensitive to excess voltage or current To turn the over range feature on or off press From the CONFIGURATION SUBMENU See Section 6 9 1 1 DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR AOUTS CALIBRATED NO CAL DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT 5V OVR NOCAL lt SET SET gt EDIT DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT RANGE 5V SET gt EDIT DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT OVERRANGE ON lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT Toggle this key TEST_OUTPUT OVERRANGE ON to turn the Over Range ENTR EXIT feature ON OFF TEST_OUTPUT OVERRANGE OFF ENTR EXIT 05744 Rev B 67 TELEDYN
90. delay O generator reference adjustment frequency O generator reference filter size REF INTEG 0 1 generator reference PID integral coefficient REF_DERIV 0 2 generator reference PID derivative coefficient BENCH_DELAY 120 generator bench feedback control delay BENCH_FREQ 10 generator bench adjustment frequency BENCH_FSIZE 3 generator bench filter size BENCH INTEG 0 2 generator bench PID integral coefficient BENCH_DERIV 0 5 generator bench PID derivative coefficient generator drive stability limit to update DRIVE_STABIL 0 01 100 concentration cache CACHE RESOL PPB 0 1 20 generator cache un normalized concentration T resolution O3 LAMP CYCLE 0 5 30 generator lamp temperature control cycle period E O generator lamp temperature PID proportional O3 LAMP PROP 1 DegC 0 2 0 10 coefficient O3 LAMP INTEG Gain 0 01 0 10 Os generator lamp temperature PID integral coefficient T O generator lamp temperature PID derivative O3 LAMP DERIV 0 2 0 10 coefficient ourPUT FLOW SLOPE 0001100 Slope term to correct output flow rate 12 05745 Rev TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX 2 Setup Variables For Serial I O Software Version C 0 M703E SETUP VARIABLES FOR LATEST REVISION NUMERI DEFAULT SETUP VARIABLE C UNITS VALUE VALUE RANGE DESCRIPTION BitFlag 0 65535 RS 232 COM1 mode flags Add values to com
91. drive voltage and a dwell time for that point Each point can also be individually turned off or on 05744 Rev B 119 TELEDYNE API M703E Calibration and Verification M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 8 2 2 VIEWING GENERATOR CALIBRATION POINTS To view these calibration points press STANDBY ACT STANDBY Make sure that the M703E is in standby mode lt TST TST gt GEN STBY SEQ PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG CLK PASS MORE SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG SETUP X X ENTER PASSWORD ENTR Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD DIAG SIGNAL I O PREV NEXT Continue pressing NEXT until DIAG O3 GEN CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR DIAG O3 GEN CALIBRATION CAL DIAG O3GEN 1 500 MV 5 0 MIN ON PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Toggle these keys to move between calibration points 120 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual M703E Calibration and Verification 8 2 3 ADDING OR EDITING GENERATOR CALIBRATION POINTS To add a calibration point to the table or edit an existing point press Make sure that M703E CEN STBY SEQ SETUR is in standby mode PRIMARY SETUP MENU SECONDARY SETUP MENU DIAG Continue pressing NEXT until 2 GEN CALIBRATION ENTER PASSWORD PREV NEXT ENTR Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD O3 GEN CALIBRATION 1 500 MV 5 0 MIN ON
92. equalizes any charges that occur across the whole bag it does not prevent the build up of static charges If laying on a conductive grounded surface these bags will allow charges to bleed away but the very charges that build up on the surface of the bag itself can be transferred through the bag by induction onto the circuits of your ESD sensitive device Also the liquid impregnating the plastic is eventually used up after which the bag is as useless for preventing damage from ESD as any ordinary plastic bag Anti Static bags made of plastic impregnated with metal usually silvery in color provide all of the charge equalizing abilities of the pink poly bags but also when properly sealed create a Faraday cage that completely isolates the contents from discharges and the inductive transfer of static charges Storage bins made of plastic impregnated with carbon usually black in color are also excellent at dissipating static charges and isolating their contents from field effects and discharges Never use ordinary plastic adhesive tape near an ESD sensitive device or to close an anti ESD bag The act of pulling a piece of standard plastic adhesive tape such as Scotch tape from its roll will generate a static charge of several thousand or even tens of thousands of volts on the tape itself and an associated field effect that can discharge through or be induced upon items up to a foot away 208 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator
93. for PCB 05701 05703 A Orcad B B Date 17 Jun 2008 Sheet of 8 File N Pcbmgr 05701dn E motherboard gen4 Sdiirre 3411 a DDB 1 2 3 4 5 6 DS1 DS2 2 gt 1 1 4 2 LS LED RED smt 1206 7 LED GRN smt 1206 TX for Com1 RX for Com1 RII R12 4 9K 5 4 9K 5 J12 i 1 2 RTSO 3 4 CTSO o f 5 RS GNDO 1 1 6 RXI 7 RTSI 8 TXI ________ 9 CISI LLL 1 LLL 1 10 RS GNDI 11 12 13 14 R2 R13 INLINE 12 22K 59 O NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED Rid NOT INSTALLED N LED GRN smt 1206 LED RED smt 1206 TX for Com2 RX for Com2 TPI3 TP14 TPI5 6 7 8 C C C C VCC 12V 12VRET 15V A A A 1 1 1 1 1 1 J15 12V CHASGND MOLEX 10 8 AUXUIDC OPOWERUIN 12 1 15V A asy 6 gt o ASD 5V 5 EGND 10 1 x N SA DI D9 amp R35 must be within 1 of J15 15V A TVI TV ARRAY SMDAISLCC R111 Je e TV ARRAY anon TV2 DTE veu SMDAISLCC USIC SW1001 SW PUSHBUTTON 4PDT MT6 MT7 MT8 MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MTI MT2 MT3 MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE 1010 DB9 FEMALE 2 1 5 e TXI Q a RS GNDI
94. gas Figure 9 11 shows a block diagram of this software functionality API FIRMWARE Calibrator Operations Calibration Procedures Configuration Procedures PC 104 BUS Calibration Data Autonomic Systems system Status Data Diagnostic Routines Memory Handling CALIBRATOR HARDWARE Interface Handling Sensor input Data Display Messages Measurement Keypad Algorithms for Analog Output Data PC 104 BUS photometer RS232 amp RS485 External Digital 1 Figure 9 12 Schematic of Basic Software Operation 150 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 5 O GENERATOR OPERATION 9 5 1 PRINCIPLE OF PHOTOLYTIC GENERATION Ozone is a naturally occurring substance that is sometimes called activated oxygen It contains three atoms of oxygen O3 instead of the usual two found in normal oxygen O2 that is essential for life Because of its relatively short half life ozone cannot be bottled and stored for later use and there fore must always be generated on site by an ozone generator The two main principles of ozone generation are UV light and corona discharge While the corona discharge method is most common because of its ability to generate very high concentrations up to 50 it is inappropriate for calibration needs since the level of fine control over the concentration is poor Also the corona discharge method produces a s
95. gen4 5diraw Bla DDB 1 2 3 4 6 1 2 4 5 6 VCCO e dam DIGITAL OUTPUTS RN7 510x8 016 PS2702 4 SHDN 16 E 017 U59C 74 574 N 15 10000 pF 14 55 8 S LS 13 10000 5i Qi 19 12 L32 74HC32 D2 02 18 Nw 17 11 D3 Q3 KE D E cw 9 pod 21008 1 D7 7 1 Pe oxo U18 PS2702 4 3 lt 010 7 16 136 CONTROL OUTPUTS SZ SK _ _15 5 14 8 10 12 i NN CORTE 15 10 14 SK DIGIO4 IOW 159 FE BEAD 10000 pF PS2702 4 BE k 16 15 14 13 12 10000 10000 pF 2 74HC32 1 3 10 D2 4 D3 5 9 6 ps 05 L B 12VO D5 7 D6 Q6 14 ra D6 8 13 KI RELAY SPDT 5 5 D7 Q7 D7 9 D8 08 12 2 7 4 DIODE SCHOTTKY m P 7 3 10000 pF 11009 Ql 1 ee PRO 2 K 4 RELAY SPDT 2 2K 5 K2 5 EXTERNAL SO2222 DIODE SCHOTTKY 6 REAR PANEL 7 ALARM OUTPUTS RELAY SPDT 8 9 10 11 12 TERMBLOCK 12 2 2K 5 DIODE SCHOTTKY 502222 04 R8 P K Title Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702 RET Size Number Revision Orcad B 05703 Date 17 Jun 2008 Sheet Sof 8 File N Pcbmgr 05701dn E motherboard gen4 s iirre0 BY a DDB 1 2 4 5 6
96. in which case you may have to configure the calibrator s Ethernet properties manually See your network administrator 106 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports To view the above properties listed in Table 7 5 press GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID ADDR INET EXIT SETUP X X ENTER PASSWORD 818 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X DHCP ON SET SET EDIT EXI SETUP X X INST IP 0 0 0 0 lt SET SET EDIT key is disabled SETUP X X GATEWAY IP 0 0 0 0 when DHCP is ON SET SET SETUP X X SUBNET MASK IP 0 0 0 0 SET SET EXI DO NOT alter unless instructed to by Teledyne SETUP X X TCP PORT 3000 Instruments customer SET SET EDIT EXI Service personnel SETUP X X HOSTNAME TMS 9000 SET SET EDIT EXI SETUP X X INITIALIZING INET 0 INITIALIZATION process proceeds automatically SETUP X X INITIALIZATION SUCCEEDED SETUP X X INITIALIZATION FAILED SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID ADDR INET EXIT Contact your IT Network Administrator 05744 Rev B 107 TELEDYNE API Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 7 5 2 1 Manually Configuring the Network IP Addresses There are several circumstances when you may need to configure the interface settings of the calibrator
97. is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG ENTER PASSWORD Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD SETUP 0 03_ PHOTO_LAMP 58 0 DegC In all cases EXIT discards the new setting DO NOT CHANGE NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT these settings unless specifically instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel SETUP X X 1 PHOT LAMP 58 0 DegC ENTR accepts the new setting 7 PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT 2 O3 CONC RANGE 500 0 PPB PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT O3 CONC RANGE 500 0 PPB ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to set the upper span point of the 3 O3 PHOTO BENCH ONLY OFF PHOTO CONC Test PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT Channel signal PHOTO ONLY OFF ENTR EXIT Toggle this key turn this SETUP X X 4 ZA PUMP ENAB ON mode ON OFF PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT ZA PUMP ENAB ON ENTR EXIT SETUP X X 5 STD TEMP 25 0 DegC Toggle this key turn this mode ON OFF DO NOT CHANGE PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT gt these settings unless specifically instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel SETUP X X 6 STD PRESS 29 92 In Hg PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X X 7 CLOCK_ADJUST 0 Sec Day PREV JUMP EDIT ENTR EXIT CLOCK ADJUST 0 Sec Day ENTR EXIT Enter sign and number of seconds per day the clock gains or loses 76 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E C
98. loaded into the new the Disk on Chip on power up To change the Disk on Chip follow this procedure 1 Turn off power to the instrument 2 Fold down the rear panel by loosening the captive Phillips head screws on each side 3 Locate the Disk on Chip in the rightmost socket near the right hand side of the CPU assembly Remove the IC by gently prying it up from the socket 4 Reinstall the new Disk on Chip making sure the notch in the end of the chip is facing upward 5 Close the rear panel and turn on power to the machine 11 9 TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE If this manual and its trouble shooting repair sections do not solve your problems technical assistance may be obtained from TELEDYNE API CUSTOMER SERVICE 9480 CARROLL PARK DRIVE SAN DIEGO CALIFORNIA 92121 5201 USA Toll free Phone 800 324 5190 Phone 858 657 9800 Fax 858 657 9816 Email api sales teledyne com Website http www teledyne api com Before you contact customer service fill out the problem report form in Appendix C which is also available online for electronic submission at http www teledyne api com forms USER NOTES 05744 Rev B 203 TELEDYNE API General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operators Manual USER NOTES 204 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual A Primer on Eletro Static Discharge 12 A PRIMER ON ELECTRO STATIC DISCHARGE Teledyne Instruments con
99. lt 145 115 gt Rene S o e peeJje sayq7 Jo 1511 uBnouu sejp o y sjeedde Bunsixe oN 53 8 8 Mau e suesu LNYd SNI 4 dNLlas 4 NIVIN 0 2 5 SIL nuajy XIGN3ddV 5 10 101211122 3202 3NAG3 T3L 290 OL V SALON 8935 s 10j amp 1edQ 1012291122 FEOZN 0 2 Nuayy aseMYoS 1 XIGN3ddV ANAGA TAL TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX A 2 Setup Variables For Serial I O Software Version C 0 APPENDIX 2 Setup Variables For Serial I O Software Version C 0 Table 1 M703E Setup Variables Software Version C 0 M703E SETUP VARIABLES FOR LATEST REVISION NUMERI DEFAULT SETUP VARIABLE C UNITS VALUE VALUE RANGE DESCRIPTION Low Access Level Setup Variables 818 password 58 PHOTO_LAMP Warnings 0 100 Peres lamp temperature set point and warning 56 61 48 E 1 generator lamp temperature set point and O3 GEN LAMP Warnings 0 100 warning limits 43 53 0 0 1 20000 concentration range for test channel analog output bench control flag ON turns on pump and FF switches measure reference valve only in bench generation mode 0 ON OFF ON Zero air pump control ON turns on zero
100. minutes verify that the software properly supports any hardware options that are installed 8 Check to make sure that the calibrator is functioning within allowable operating parameters Appendix C includes a list of test functions viewable from the calibrator s front panel as well as their expected values These functions are also useful tools for diagnosing problems with your calibrator see Section7 5 2 The enclosed Final Test and Validation Data sheet part number 05760 lists these values before the instrument left the factory To view the current values of these parameters press the following key sequence on the calibrator s front panel Remember until the unit has completed its warm up these parameters may not have stabilized STANDBY ACT STANDBY TST TST GEN STBV SEQ MSG CLR SETUP e ACT GENERATE Value PPB e TARG GENERATE Value PPB e OUTPUT FLOW Value LPM e REG PRESSURE Value PSIG e BOX TEMP Value C e GEN MV e GEN DRIVE Value MV LAMP TEMP Value C PHOTO MEASURE Value MV e PHOTO FLOW Value LPM PHOTO LAMP TEMP Value C PHOTO SPRESS Value IN HG A PHOTO STEMP Value C PHOTO SLOPE Value e PHOTO OFFSET Va ue PPB PHOTO STABIL Value PPB e TESTz Value MV e TIMEZ HH MM SS Toggle lt TST TST gt keys to scroll through list of functions Only appears when warning messages are active
101. of 40 text characters each Information is organized in the following manner see Figure 9 10 MODE FIELD Displays the name of the calibrator s current operating mode e MESSAGE FIELD Displays a variety of informational messages such as warning messages operation data and response messages during interactive tasks e KEY DEFINITION FIELD Displays the definitions for the row of keys just below the display These definitions dynamic context sensitive and software driven 148 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 3 1 4 Keyboard Display Interface Electronics to Relay Board 1 C to from CPU Key Press Detect Keypad 2 Decoder Interface Serial Sample LED Green Display Data Decoder Keyboard Interrupt Status Bit Display Controller Display Power Watchdog Parallel Data Display Write From 5 VDC Power Supply Optional Maintenance ra 2 Lang 1 Switch 1 4 CalLED Yellow 2x40 CHAR VACUUM FLUORESCENT DISPLAY Fault LED Red KEYBOARD Beeper Figure 9 11 Keyboard and Display Interface Block Diagram The keyboard display interface electronics of the 7 Calibrator watches the status of the eight front panel keys alerts the CPU when keys are depressed translates data from parallel to serial and back and manages commun
102. of the UV Lamp reported in C e PHOTO STEMP The temperature of the Sample gas in the absorption tube reported in C 160 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 6 4 2 Pneumatic Sensors for the Photometer The several sensors located on the pneumatic sensor just to the left rear of the generator assembly measure the absolute pressure and the flow rate of gas inside the photometer s absorption tube This information is used by the CPU to calculate the O3 concentration of the sample gas See Equation 9 7 Both of these measurements are made downstream from the absorption tube but upstream of the pump A critical flow orifice located between the flow sensor and the pump maintains the gas flow through the photometer at 800 cm min The following TEST functions are viewable from the instrument s front panel e PHOTO FLOW The flow rate of gas through the photometer measured in LPM PHOTO SPRESS the pressure of the gas inside the absorption tube This pressure is reported in inches of mercury absolute in Hg A i e referenced to a vacuum zero absolute pressure This is not the same as PSIG USER NOTES 05744 Rev B 161 TELEDYNE API Theory of Operation M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual USER NOTES 162 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures 10 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE amp P
103. on as soon as the power is supplied e If they do not check the circuit breaker built into the ON OFF switch on the instruments front panel CAUTION SHOULD THE AC POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP INVESTIGATE AND CORRECT THE CONDITION CAUSING THIS SITUATION BEFORE TURNING THE CALIBRATOR BACK ON 186 05744 Rev B M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE API General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator 11 4 3 POWER SUPPLY If you have determined that the calibrator s AC mains power is working but the unit is still not operating properly there may be a problem with one of the instrument s switching power supplies The supplies can have two faults namely no DC output and noisy output To assist tracing DC Power Supply problems the wiring used to connect the various printed circuit assemblies and DC Powered components and the associated test points on the relay PCA follow a standard color coding scheme as defined in the following table Figure 11 4 Location of DC Power Test Points on Relay Table 11 6 DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Codes NAME TEST POINT TP AND WIRE COLOR Dgnd 1 Black 5V 2 Red Agnd 3 Green 15V 4 Blue 15V 5 Yellow 12R 6 Purple 12V 7 Orange 05744 Rev B 187 TELEDYNE API General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operators Manual A voltmeter should be use
104. orifice directly upstream of the pump but down stream from the absorption tube The critical flow orifice installed in the pump supply line is tuned to create a gas flow of 800 cm min pressure sensor and a flow sensor located on the generator photometer pressure flow sensor PCA monitor the pressure and flow rate of the gas passing through the photometers absorption tube See Figures 9 18 and 9 19 for depictions of the gas flow related to the photometer 05744 Rev B 159 TELEDYNE API Theory of Operation M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 9 6 4 PHOTOMETER ELECTRONIC OPERATION MOTHER BOARD PC 104 CPU Card 104 onverter eS Disk on Chip Flash Photometer Bus 7 Sample Gas Thermistor Interface Pressure sjndu Josues Sensor _ _ O RELAY 1 E Photometer M R Valve Located on 0 Photometer ness Generator Assembly UV Lenno NND MM PRAE Temperature Temperature Detector Photometer Photometer Lamp Heater qa _ _ _ __ __ _____ __ ___ ___ __ ___ _ __ __ __ _______ __ _____ Figure 9 22 Photometer Electronic Block Diagram Like the generator the photometer and its subcomponents act as peripheral devices operated by the CPU via the motherboard Communicati
105. outputs 5 defined 7 spare 2 ports 1x RS 232 1x RS 485 or RS 232 configurable Serial Q Communication speed 300 115200 baud user selectable EN61326 1997 w A1 98 Class FCC Part 15 Subpart B Section 15 107 Class Gene A ICES 003 Class A ANSI C63 4 1992 amp AS NZS 3548 w A1 amp A2 97 ertifications Class A IEC 61010 1 90 A1 92 A2 95 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API Specifications Approvals and Warranty M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Table 2 3 M703E Specifications for Ozone Generator Maximum Output 6 ppm LPM 100 ppb LPM Response Time 180 Sec 98 Optical Feedback Standard Minimum Output Table 2 4 M703E Specifications for Photometer Full Scale Range 100 ppb to 10 ppm User Selectable Precision 1 0 ppb Linearity 1 0 of Full Scale Rise Fall Time lt 20 sec photometer response Zero Drift 1 0 ppb 7 days Span Drift lt 1 24 hours lt 2 7 days Minimum Gas Flow Required 800 cc min 2 2 MARK COMPLIANCE EMISSIONS COMPLIANCE The Teledyne Instruments M703E Photometric Calibrator is designed to be fully compliant with EN61326 1997 w A1 98 Class A FCC Part 15 Subpart B Section 15 107 Class A ICES 003 Class A ANSI C63 4 1992 amp AS NZS 3548 w A1 amp A2 97 Class A Test status Pending SAFETY COMPLIANCE The Teledyne Instruments M703E Photometric O3 Calibrator is designed to be fully compliant w
106. s heating zones and some of its valves as well as a general operating watchdog indicator Table 11 2 shows the states of these LEDs and their respective functionality D9 Green Photometer Pump Status 07 Green Photometer Meas Ref Valve ae 0000000 lo 090000 D6 Green Ext Zero Air Valve 015 Yellow Photometer Lamp Heater D16 Yellow Generator Lamp Heater 4 D1 RED Watchdog Indicator H Figure 9 6 Status LED Locations Relay PCA 05744 Rev B 141 TELEDYNE API Theory of Operation M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Table 9 1 Relay Board Status LEDs LED COLOR DESCRIPTION FUNCTION EV D1 Red Watchdog Circuit bus Blinks when IC bus is operating properly operation D2 Yellow Dry Air Pump Status When lit the zero air AC pump is running D3 6 SPARE 07 Green Photometer Meas Ref Valve valve opent REFERENCE gas path D8 SPARE D9 Green Ext Zero Air valve Status De bie Extems Zero SIE valve is D10 14 SPARE D15 Yellow Photometer Heater Status lit the photometer eivsdmp heater D16 Yellow Generator Lamp Heater E lit the generator UV lamp heater 9 2 3 4 Relay PCA Watchdog Indicator D1 The most important of the status LEDs on the relay board is the red lC Bus watchdog LED Itis controlled directly by the calibrator s CPU over the lC bus Special c
107. supply PCA see Figure 9 21 e 800 mVDC 10 mVDC between TP1 and e If this voltage is incorrect either the UV lamp power supply PCA is faulty or the 2 bus is not communicating with the UV lamp power supply PCA e 5VDC between TP3 and TP4 grnd e If this voltages is less than 4 8 or greater than 5 25 either the 5 VDC power supply or the UV lamp power supply PCA are faulty Ifthe above voltages check out it is more likely that a problem is due to the UV Lamp than due to the Lamp Power Supply e Replace the Lamp and if the problem persists replace the Lamp Power Supply 05744 Rev B 201 TELEDYNE API General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operators Manual 11 8 REPAIR PROCEDURES 11 8 1 REPAIRING SAMPLE FLOW CONTROL ASSEMBLY The critical flow orifice is housed in the flow control assembly Teledyne Instruments part number 001760400 located on the top of the optical bench A sintered filter protects the jewel orifice so it is unusual for the orifice to need replacing but if it does or the filter needs replacement please use the following procedure see the Spare Parts list in Appendix B for part numbers and kits 1 off power to the calibrator 2 Locate the assembly to be repaired see Figure 3 3 3 Disconnect the pneumatic connection from the flow assembly 4 Remove the fitting and the components as shown in the exploded view in Figure 11 6
108. the DC power supplies are operating properly e The vacuum fluorescent display is good if on power up a character is visible on the upper left hand corner of the display e is no character on the display at power up and D1 on the Relay or D2 on the valve driver PCA is flashing then the Keyboard Display Interface PCA is bad e The CPU Status LED DS5 is flashing but there is no character on the display at power up 188 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator lf the calibrator starts operation with a normal display but pressing a key on the front panel does not change the display then there are three possible problems e One or more of the keys are bad e The interrupt signal between the Keyboard Display interface and the motherboard is broken or e The Keyboard Display Interface PCA is bad 11 4 6 RELAY PCA The Relay PCA can be most easily checked by observing the condition of the status LEDs located along its upper edge see Section 11 3 2 and Figure 11 3 Relay PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting and using the SIGNAL I O submenu under the DIAG menu see Section 11 1 3 to toggle each LED ON or OFF If D1 on the Relay PCA is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question Pump power Heater power Valve Drive etc toggles properly using the Signal I O function then the associ
109. used operations that can then be mixed and matched by an overhead sequence To insert an EXECSEQ step into a sequence press Starting at the STEPS Submenu INSERT STEP Submenu SETUP X X INSERT STEP GENERATE PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Use the PREV and NEXT keys to scroll though the list of available instructions SETUP X X INSERT STEP EXECSEQ ENTR SETUP EXECUTE SEQUENCE A1 NEXT ENTR Use these keys to Eee 1 scroll though the list of available Sequences 3 7 3 DURATION 10 0 MIN PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXECUTE SEQUENCE Q ENTR EXIT This message appears if there are no other sequences already programmed into the M703E 05744 Rev B 53 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 5 2 5 The CC OUTPUT Step This instruction causes the sequence to set or reset the M703E s digital control outputs It is very useful in situations where the control outputs are being used to trigger other devices that need to be turned off and on in synch with the operation of the calibrator as it progress through the sequence To insert a CC OUTPUT step into a sequence press Starting at the STEPS Submenu INSERT STEP Submenu SETUP X X INSERT STEP GENERATE PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Use the PREV and NEXT keys to scroll though the list of available instructions INSERT STEP PURGE ENTR EXIT SETUP CC OUTPUT DISABLED
110. zal diis Pump Fan Photometer Photometer M R valve Pump Controlled O5 Generator ia UV Lamp Mene Figure 9 7 M703E Power Distribution Block diagram 05744 Rev B 145 TELEDYNE API Theory of Operation M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 9 2 6 AC POWER CONFIGURATION The E Series digital electronic systems will operate with any of the specified power regimes As long as instrument is connected to 100 120 or 220 240 VAC at either 50 or 60 Hz it will turn on and after about 30 seconds show a front panel display Internally the status LEDs located on the Relay PCA Motherboard and CPU should turn on as soon as the power is supplied On the other hand some of the calibrator s the dry air pump must be properly configured for the type of power being supplied to the instrument Figure 2 3 shows the location of the Pump AC Configuration jumper JP7 Pump Configuration Figure 9 8 Location of the AC Configuration Jumper for the Dry Air Pump 9 2 6 1 AC configuration Internal Pump JP7 AC power configuration for the internal dry air pump is set using Jumper set JP7 Table 9 2 AC Power Configuration for Internal Pumps JP7 JUMPER LINE LINE JUMPER POWER FREQUENCY COLOR ee E Connects pump pin to 110 115 VAC power line WHITE Connects pump pin 3 to 110 115 VAC power line 110VAC Connects pump pins 2 amp 4 to Neutral 115 VAC Connects pump to 110 115 VAC power line BLACK Conn
111. 0 15 uF ceramic wh wit DACIV AGND3 AGND3 L w 8 6 6 7 B4 A4 AGND4 A4 AGND4 POT DIGITAL POT DIGITAL Y D7 ae MBRS340CT ML m 4 Schematic for Series Motherboard 05702 D7 and D8 MBRS340CT Size Number Revision Must be located Orcad B 05703 Within 1 of 032 8 U34 Date 17 Jun 2008 Sheet3of 8 File N Pcbmgr 05701dn E motherboard gen4 auncs 05 701a DDB 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 15V RN14 15V 100 8 5527 gt 15V 15V R43 100 A J109 222 ANALOG INPUTS 1 CH7 2 CH6 a RNI5 C40 C41 3 100Kx8 0 15 uF ceramic 0 15 uF ceramic 4 CH3 10 uF 35V TANTALUM CH2 052 CHI R45 induces CHI 19 OP AMP PRECISION 7 INI OUT offset in analog CH2 Ltt tt 20 6 8 IN2 TC7 signal to give 9 CH3 21 3 SS live 0 f 1M 196 1206 CHIP 52 IN TV ive 0 for sensors R45 10 23 INA with 0 or slightly T CH6 54 n VSS negative output E vcc L CHI 25 147 GND n MICROFIT 12 CH8 26 IN8 C44 054 1 10 IN9 VREF 229289 C45 9 NH 0224F 4 compe 8 8 5 17 10 uF 35V TANTALUM IN 12 7 VCC 6 16 R46 6 IN 13 DG444DY 7 AGND J110 5 IN 14 A2 3 gt GND CH14 1 IN 15 Al DI e FOUT A CHI3 INIG an p2 vcc 2 CHI2
112. 00 EXIT discards the 0 6 ENTR EXIT pH new setting ENTR accepts the new setting gt Toggle these keys to enter starting day month and year EXIT discards the ENTR EXIT ad new setting NE NER ENTR accepts the Toggle these keys to enter the starting HOUR MINUTE new setting 7 time 05744 Rev B 45 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator To set the delta timer press M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Make sure that the M703E E bs is in standby mode GEN COIBY SEQ PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT his display only appears if there are no sequences currently programmed into the 7 OTHERWISE END OF SEQUENCES INS 1 SEQ NAME X STEPS INS DEL EDIT 1 SETUP 0 Deletes the sequence shown Edits the sequence shown in the message field in the message field ein UII Continue pressing SET gt until existing sequences SET gt EDIT SETUP X X TIMER DELTA 001 00 00 SET SET EDIT TIMER DELTA 0 Days EXIT discards the 0 ENTR EXIT new setting Toggle these keys to enter ENTR accepts the number of days to wait between before running sequence again new setting gt TIMER PELTN 00 00 EXIT discards the ENTR EXIT PE new setting INE ENTR accepts the new setting IZ Toggle these keys to enter the starting MINUTE time 46 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M
113. 00008870 001060470 pueog 00008Scv0 001060470 pueog 002020070 O 3 Ssed 001060470 peog ASt 00 0600 0 O 3 Ssed 001060470 pueog ejau 002020070 O 3 Ssed 0290 ZHO 004060070 O 3 Ssed 010d 00700290 peoga y oN 002020070 O 3 Ssed 0290 peoga y oN 000010070 Ugy 001060470 pueog 000010070 uej 001060470 peog 000002170 dwe uoueg 001060470 peog ejau 00000170 dwe yousg 001062970 pueog 000002170 uoueg 1ed AN 00 020 50 peoga y oN SE CO CO CO 000002170 001077170 uoueg 19d AN w134 L H LH O o oo x 3 ALS 00 020 50 001060470 peoga y oN 202 NOILNAI peog Aejay LHO 91518 TWNDIS 8 HMd 189 Act 001008 0 Nd Ajquessy Nd Ajquessy jeubis OL NOILO3NNOO NOILO3NNOO PHOTOCELL 15V __01 15V m 15V VCC U2 15V VR2 LT1460S3 2 5 NIA GB 1 2 REF 2 5V
114. 00290 peoga 001062970 pueog ASH 0290 001062970 peog 0290 peoga 001062470 pueog 007020290 peoga oN 001062970 pueog 0290 peoga 001062470 peog AS 6 8 Z 9 5 L 00 020 50 001060470 peoga oN peog Aejay INIM SE LO ON OO 001062470 Z00000NO peog 59195 3 142 JOMOd 001060470 peog Aejay 20000039 U9IIMS peu9IMS OV 001060470 pueog Aejay 20000039 U9IIMS JOMOd PSYOUMS eur OV 42000005 GLF G LSd 200000NO 42000005 GLF G LSd 200000NO U9IIMS peu9IMS OV 42000005 2400000 5 U9IIMS PSYOUMS aur OV 8 00000Sd 21 254 2400000 5 8 00000Sd 6 GLF G LSd 20000039 U9IIMS 5 OV QN 8 00000Sd 21 254 21 Sd Z00000NO U9IIMS 5 eur OV 00006S S0 51558 0 200000NO 1900000 5 0181495
115. 05744 Rev TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator 6 OPERATING THE M703E CALIBRATOR The M703E calibrator is a computer controlled calibrator with a dynamic menu interface for easy and yet powerful and flexible operation All major operations are controlled from the front panel display and keyboard through these user friendly menus To assist in navigating the system s software a series of menu trees can be found in Appendix A of this manual NOTE The flowcharts in this chapter depict the manner in which the front panel display keyboard interface is used to operate the M703E Photometric Calibrator They depict typical representations of the display during the various operations being described They are not intended to be exact and may differ slightly from the actual display of your system NOTE When editing values in the software the ENTR key may disappear if you select a value that is invalid or out of the allowable range for that parameter e g such as trying to set the 24 hour clock to 25 00 00 Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value the ENTR key will re appear 05744 Rev B 35 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 1 TEST FUNCTIONS A variety of TEST FUNCTIONS are available for viewing at the front panel whenever the calibrator is at the MAIN MENU These measurements provide information about
116. 1 2 3 4 5 6 P2 4 LAMP OUTPUT d2 Ti 3 TP2 TEST PLUG PE 6196 R5 4 di Oo TIP126 5 15V Q1 4 7K 2W 6 1 9 7 2 4 C4 i4 3 L TP4 READ c2 c3 Aan 4 TEST_PLUG Asis 04 220 100 HEADER 4 m oe 05 B D1 SZ 771N4148 IRF520 IRF520 Q2 Q3 1N4148 1N4148 a R2 R3 2 7154148 5 1K EK R6 NV VA 330 vcc e RP2C 4 7K U3 C6 Vdd GND 033 us JP1 Wut TEST PLUG JUMPER2 ou O np2A U1B AD5321 RM8 1 6 LM358 R14 7 10 4 7K aay 2 o 47K 3 sc 9 16 _VREF 15V R12 11 1 4 OUTPUT A NONINV INPUT gt R13 14 R1 OUPUT B CT TP3 2 24K 22 8 TEST PLUG SOFT START DISCHARGE 1 INV INPUT RT 99 10 1 0 1 SHUTDOWN GROUND 4 osc OUTPUT COMP U2 4040 1 3 5039525 15V NOTE THIS SCHEMATIC APPLIES TO THE FOLLOWING PCA S PCA 04166 0000 NOTE M400E BENCH AND 125 LAMP SUPPLY SHUNT INSTALLED IN J1 FOR BENCH SUPPLY SHUNT NOT INSTALLED IN J1 FOR IZS SUPPLY A c1 C1 470 CHANGE NOTES CHANGE DESCRIPTION INITIAL The information herein is the property of API and is INITIAL RELEASE KL submitted in strictest con fidence for reference only Unauthorized use by anyone for any other purposes is prohibited This document or lany information contained in it may not be duplicated without proper authorization um TELEDYNE APPROVALS DATE DRAWN DRAWING NO REVISION 04421 APP
117. 120T d L vaa RST MMBT3904 U6 02 2 N 485VDTCT SPR_I O_1 SPR_I 0_2 Title Schematic for PCA 04258 and PCB 04257 Keyboard Display Interface for E series DISP_RET Size Number 04259 Revision lt B a Date 21 Mar 2002 Sheet of File NAYHWorkWI300BWeyboardV04257a04259A ddDrawn 6 1 2 3 4 15V R2 1 1K 51 n VR2 D ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR 2 2 3 3 1 0UF T 1 LM4040CIZ TP4 TP5 2 1 51 54 OUT S2 OUT S3 OUT 10V REF GND 15V Q Q 0 J1 3 6 Cd ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR 2 ME MINIFIT6 2 ___________ 4 5 15V 5 iG R1 499 53 1 VR1 FLOW SENSOR 2 2 FM_4 MO CN 647 X3 1 15V 4040 j TELEDYNE STRUMENT j ed The information herein is the f APPROVALS DATE property of API and is submitted in strictest con fidence for reference only Unauthorized use by anyone for any other purposes is CHECKED B DRAWING NO REVISION prohibited This document or 04354 any information contained SCH PCA 04003 PRESS FLOW E SERIES in it may not be duplicated APPROVED LAST MOD without proper authorization 3 Dec 2007 B D
118. 3 4 I SDA Io SPR 2 DISP_PWR_EN must 11 Re be high for display to 5 DEFAULT ADDRESS SELECTS FOR I2C TO PARALLEL i OPT LANG SWITC peer be powered S E ADRS SLCTS D X Ous 2 KEYBOARD 0 A2 M Hn DISPLAYCONTROL ud DISPL CONTROL DISP CN 0 1 um 011 us DISP CN 1 5 4 45 DISP SDA KYBRD INT 2 i 5 TP4 TPS DISP_CN_A2 3 6 E SDA KYBRD INT NOTES 2 7 _DISP 1 This schematic is based on SCL id 5 9 DISP_RET BUSY SCL the PWB PN 03974 and SDA 15 ps 10 TPS TPO applies to PCA PN 03975 po HL xc DISP BUSY SCL P7 12 gt 5_DISP 2 INT 5 vcc 02 04 045 1 6 so DISP RET SP T 3 K PCF8574 5_DISP 2 7 ___ 8 12 220pF 220pF 220pF 100uF E mata Al SONALERT J3 TO FRM DISPLAY MAINT_LED_V Layout Instructions 1 Minimum trace width 8 mil would like to have 10 mil traces if possible 2 Please run traces on both and backside but where possible fill one side with GND 3 Minimum width for 5_DISP DISP_PWR DISP_RET is 40 mil except to test points 4 Minimum width for VCC GND Vdd Vss is 30 mil except to test points DISP_WR DISP_BUSY V DISP_PWR 5_DISP DISP_RET VCC xi 45 DISP I IE 1500uF 1 i 44507 1 5 DISP WR DISP BUSY DISP PWR OVR DISP PWR E T MAINT_LED Mcp
119. 5 Replace the o rings p n 000001 and the sintered filter p n FL000001 6 If replacing the critical flow orifice itself P N 000941000 make sure that the side with the colored window usually red is facing downstream to the gas flow Apply new Teflon tape to the male connector threads Re assemble in reverse order 2 Pneumatic Connector 1 8 X P NFT 70 um Sprin P N HW 20 Sintered Filter P N FL 01 cA Critical Flow Orifice P N 000941000 __7 Make sure it is placed with the jewel down O Ring mp P N OR_01 Purge Housing P N 000850000 Figure 11 5 Critical Flow Restrictor Assembly Disassembly 202 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator 11 8 2 DISK ON CHIP REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE NOTE Printed circuit assemblies PCAs are sensitive to electro static discharges too small to be felt by the human nervous system Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty See Chapter 12 for more information on preventing ESD damage Replacing the Disk on Chip may be necessary in certain rare circumstances or to load new instrument software This will cause all of the instrument configuration parameters to be lost However a backup copy of the operating parameters are stored in a second non volatile memory and will be
120. 5V C analog output AD5321 default address 1A hex O3 GEN DRIVE 0 Os generator lamp drive 0 5V 05745 Rev C A 21 TELEDYNE API APPENDIX A 5 Terminal Command Designators Software Version 0 M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX A 5 Terminal Command Designators Software Version C 0 Table A 5 Terminal Command Designators Software Version C 0 COMMAND ADDITIONAL COMMAND SYNTAX DESCRIPTION ID Display help screen and commands list LOGON ID password Establish connection to instrument LOGOFF ID Terminate connection to instrument SET ALL name hexmask Display test s T ID LIST ALL name hexmask NAMES HEX Print test s to screen name Print single test CLEAR ALL name hexmask Disable test s SET ALL name hexmask Display warning s W ID LIST ALL name hexmask NAMES HEX Print warning s name Clear single warning CLEAR ALL name hexmask Clear warning s ZERO LOWSPAN SPAN 12 Enter calibration mode ASEQ number Execute automatic sequence C ID COMPUTE ZERO SPAN Compute new slope offset EXIT Exit calibration mode ABORT Abort calibration sequence LIST Print all I O signals name value Examine or set I O signal D ID LIST NAMES Print names of all diagnostic tests ENTER name Execute diagnostic test EXIT Exit diagnostic test RESET DATA CONFIG exitcode Reset instrument LIST Print setup variables na
121. 7 vas 001060470 peog Aejay 001099170 jddng SZI 105 001060470 peog Aejay 001099170 jddng 57 001060470 pueog Aejay 001099170 Aiddns 57 ASL 001060470 peog Aejay 000076670 preog 3 AS TOO SECO QN L0 CO SF CO SE 001060470 000020 0 peog Aejay mN SE CO SE CO LO SF CO 000076670 001060470 preog 3 pueog 302 IWNDIS 182 AecL 00101990 000020 0 001060470 peog 000022450 O 001060470 peog ejau 000022450 O 001062970 pueog 000022450 004d 001060470 pueog 000022450 000002170 19 ZI T 001060470 00 020 50 peog 2 p1eoqueuiol 000078750 000006 70 19 ZI 0290 peoga y oN 000002170 19 ZI 001062970 pueog ASL 000002170 19 ZI 001062970 peog ASL 00008Scv0 001060470 pueog 00008Scv0 001060470 pueog
122. 703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator 6 5 1 5 Setting Up Control Inputs for a Sequence The M703E calibrator control inputs allow the entire sequence to be triggered from an external source This feature allows the calibrator to operate in a slave mode so that external control sources such as a data logger can initiate the calibration sequences Each of the M703E calibrator s control outputs located on the back of the instrument see Figure 3 2 12 separate ON OFF switches assigned to separate calibration sequences or e A 12 bit wide bus allowing the user to define activation codes for up to 4095 separate calibration sequences To assign a CC INPUT pattern code to a particular sequence press Make sure that the M703E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU SEQ MORE SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT EXIT his display only appears if there are no sequences currently programmed into the M703E OTHERWISE END OF SEQUENCES INS 1 SEQ NAME X STEPS INS DEL EDIT SETUP 0 gt EXIT Deletes the sequence shown dits the sequence shown in the message field in the message field Scrolls back and forth between Continue pressing SET gt until existing sequences SETUP X X CC INPUT DISABLED SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X CC INPUT ENABLE OFF EXIT discards the OFF ENTER EXIT new setting Toggle this ke meer
123. 703E Control Input Pin Assignments and Corresponding Signal I O Functions 193 05744 Rev B ix TELEDYNE API Table of Contents M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Table 11 12 Control Outputs Pin Assignments and Corresponding Signal I O Functions 194 Table 12 1 Static Generation Voltages for Typical mem 205 Table 12 2 Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD sse eme 206 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Table of Contents LIST OF APPENDICES APPENDIX A VERSION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION APPENDIX A 1 Model 703E Software Menu Trees Revision C 0 APPENDIX 2 Model 703E Setup Variables Available Via Serial I O Revision C 0 APPENDIX A 3 Model 703E Warnings and Test Measurements via Serial I O Revision C 0 APPENDIX 4 Model 703E Signal I O Definitions Revision C 0 APPENDIX A 5 Model 703E Terminal Command Designators Revision C 0 APPENDIX B Model 703E SPARE PARTS LIST APPENDIX Model 703E REPAIR QUESTIONNAIRE APPENDIX D Model 703E ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS USER NOTES 05744 Rev B xi TELEDYNE API Table of Contents M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual USER NOTES xii 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual GENERAL INFORMATION SECTION GENERAL INFORMATION 05744 Rev B 1 TELEDYNE API GENERAL INFO
124. 99 ENTR accepts the turn the CC input ON OFF new setting 7 SETUP X X CC INPUT 0 00000000000 CH CH 0 ENTER EXIT EXIT discards the Moves the 3 new setting cursor one character left or ENTR accepts the right new setting I Toggle this key to turn the selected bit ON OFF 0 or 1 Each bit shown on the display represents one of the control input pins located on the back of the 7 see Figure 3 2 The left most bit is Bit 1 the next bit to the right bit 2 progressing rightward to bit 12 see Figure 3 9 for connector pin assignments 05744 Rev B 47 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 5 1 6 Setting Up Control Outputs for a Sequence The M703E calibrator s control outputs allow the entire sequence to be triggered from an external source This feature allows the calibrator to control devices that accept logic level digital inputs such as programmable logic controllers PLC s dataloggers or digital relays valve drivers They can be used as 12 separate ON OFF switches assigned to separate calibration sequences or e 12 bit wide bus allowing the user to define activation codes for up to 4095 separate calibration sequences They can be set to e Be active whenever a particular calibration sequence is operating or e Activate deactivate as individual steps within a calibration sequence are run See S
125. AIR IN CONTROL ASSEMBLIES VENT TO ANALYZER 1 GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD Figure 9 1 Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies 9 1 1 2 Photometer Critical Flow Orifice Critical flow orifices are a remarkably simple way to regulate stable gas flow rates They operate without moving parts by taking advantage of the laws of fluid dynamics By restricting the flow of gas though the orifice a pressure differential is created This pressure differential combined with the action of the calibrator s pump draws the gas through the orifice As the pressure on the downstream side of the orifice the pump side continues to drop the speed that the gas flows though the orifice continues to rise Once the ratio of upstream pressure to downstream pressure is greater than 2 1 the velocity of the gas through the orifice reaches the speed of sound As long as that ratio 05744 Rev B 135 TELEDYNE API Theory of Operation M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual stays at least 2 1 the gas flow rate is unaffected by any fluctuations surges or changes in downstream pressure because such variations only travel at the speed of sound themselves and are therefore cancelled out by the sonic shockwave at the downstream exit of the critical flow orifice The actual flow rate of gas through the orifice volume of gas per unit of time depends on the size and shape of the aperture in the orifice The lar
126. ALIBRATOR Information and instructions for interacting with the M703E calibrator via its several remote interface options e g via RS 232 Ethernet its built in digital control inputs outputs etc M703E VALIDATION AND VERIFICATION Methods and procedures for validating and verifying the correct operation of your M703E Photometric Calibrator SECTION TECHNICAL INFORMATION THEORY OF OPERATION An in depth look at the various principals by which your calibrator operates as well as a description of how the various electronic mechanical and pneumatic components of the calibrator work and interact with each other A close reading of this section is invaluable for understanding the calibrator s operation MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE AND PROCEDURES Description of preventative maintenance procedures that should be regularly performed on you calibrator to assure good operating condition GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR OF THE M703E CALIBRATOR This section includes pointers and instructions for diagnosing problems with the calibrator in general as well as instructions on performing repairs A PRIMER ON ELECTRO STATIC DISCHARGE This section describes how static electricity occurs why it is a significant concern and how to avoid it and avoid allowing ESD to affect the reliable and accurate operation of your calibrator APPENDICES For easier access and better updating some information has been separated out of the manual and placed in a
127. AMPLE de temperature of gas Possible causes of faults are the same as PHOTO STEMP from in the photometer 0 C 70 C TEMP Table 11 2 absorption tube Possible failure of Bench lamp heater Bench lamp temperature sensor MS EUM ere 70 C Relay controlling the bench heater Entire Relay PCA Bus Hot Lamp 03 LAMP The temperature of the TEMP generator s UV 0 mV 5000 mV Same as PHOTO LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 11 1 lamp The temperature inside oe the 7 chassis 0C 70 Pa dg causes of faults are the same as BOX TEMP from Table same as BOX TEMP Bus malfunction Gas flow problem through the photometer Electronic failure of the photometer subsystems The current Failure or pressure temperature sensors associated with the O3 PHOTO concentration of Os hotometer CONC being measured by the p photometer Bad incorrect Span Gas concentration Contamination of the Zero Air supply Malfunction of the generator Internal A D converter problem 05744 Rev B 183 TELEDYNE API General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operators Manual 11 3 USING THE INTERNAL ELECTRONIC STATUS LEDS Several LEDs are located inside the instrument to assist in determining if the calibrators CPU 2 bus and Relay PCA are functioning properly 11 3 1 CPU STATUS INDICATOR DS5 a red LED that is located on upper portion of the motherboard just to the right of the CPU board f
128. ANENS 9 dl AVMALVD di z Sjeeddesip nueuiqns ZOD 1eujeur3 ueuMw S jeuondo ji sueedde nueuiqns Ovid dNLAS AHVONOO3S 995 SS WW HHITAV 49019 L en eA SSadd ALS 9 ais s HJO NO 8VN3 VZ v HH40 NO A1NO HON38 g8dd an eA 359NvVH ONOO EO Z oBegrenjeA 2dWv T NAD EO 1 oBegfenjeA 2dWv T O LOHd 0 818 GYOMSSVd INdd 4 4 4 818 GUOMSSVd SUVA 1 1631 L JJO NO GNVWWOO 0414 SXVHSONVH 3HVMOHVH 3MVHSQNVH J3OX NOX 318vN3 085 98 54 L L 3 L e 3 Allunoas ualndWoo 19100 002911 009 9 00786 00261 0096 0072 001 00 15391 4 LIGA lt LAS 145 gt a 2400 LWOO JHON d 113S NN3W GI 300 IN 941195 01 sey eseui HlN3 0 0Z GI 3NIHOVN 3WVNISOH 140 21 2ISVW LINGNS zl AVMALVO zd LNAWNELSN us iu 340 NO J LIGA lt 145 145 gt 1 818 QHOMSSVd YALNA LANI 5 10 21 8 0 1012291122 3202 0 2 5
129. ASSWORD 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT _____ _ _ Toggle these keys until PASSWORD 717 03 PHOTOMETER BENCH CAL CAL BENCH CAL XZRO Press the ZERO key if using the Internal ZERO XZRO O3 Generator a Press the XZRO Key if using an External The Message field displays Os Generator BCALXZRO TEST FUNCTION Message Field the Test currently selecte ZERO Allow zero air to enter the PHOTOMETER IN port at the rear of the calibrator Wait A MINIMUM OF 10 MINUTES BCAL XZRO TEST FUNCTION Message Field ZERO BCAL XZRO ARE YOU SURE Press YES to changes the YES NO OFFSET amp SLOPE values mE for the measurement Press NO to leave the photometer calibration values unchanged 116 05744 M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE API M703E Calibration and Verification 8 1 3 2 Photometer Span Calibration To set the response SLOPE for M703E Photometric Calibrator s photometer press Toggle these keys until PASSWORD 717 Press the SPAN key if using the Internal O3 Generator Press the XSPN Key if using an External O3 Generator Wait A MINIMUM OF 10 MINUTES Toggle these keys to enter the exact span cal value as measured by the reference photometer see figures 8 3 and 8 4 GEN STBY SEQ PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE O3 GAS CONFIG PHOT O3 GAS CONFIG BCAL DARK O3 PHOTOMETER BENCH CAL BENCH CAL XSPN SPAN X
130. C Programming Plug ZRA i 3 Short TCX_JGAINA to TCX_JGAINB on TC Programming Plug 2 U7B 4 Leave TCX_KCOMPX pins of the plug unconnected 47V 1 TC2 224 DEFAULT OUTPUT IS 10 mV PER DEG gis 68K 7 ZR6 10K 6 15V 3 R26 R8 2 14 3K 20K C15 1 0 01 TC2 JGAINA TC2 JGAINB THERMOCOUPLE CONNECTOR N HAMITHERM U10 TC2 GND 0 01 3 gt R28 TOUT 2 5 TC2 SMVB 5K J 8 2 C14 7 2 KCOMPB 0 1 3 R27 10K 1025 Title Schem M100E M200E M400E Relay PCB Size Number Revisio Printed documents are uncontrolled B 04524 D Date 16 May 2007 Sheet3 of 3 File N APCBMGR04522ce source 04522 By 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fe Fe U2 74 154 U6A Yo p 1 4 TX 0c Bap lcu DIGIOI 10W 2 CLK 1108 A0 __5 ___ 0 20 5 5 4 re 54 DIGIO3 D 9 p Ql 12 DOO 06 30 AI 1525 74HC32 Di 8 13 DOI DI4 Al D DIGIO3 D2 2 __ 2212 29 2 gt 6 D2 7 14 DO2 D2 A2 D DIGIO4 gt D EL 3 28 3 N D3 6 15 DO3 DIO A3 Yo D TEMP _9 p 42 298
131. CONDITIONS ETIAM Possible causes of faults are the same as 03 GEN REFERENCE WARNING from Table 11 1 Gas flow problems directly affect the concentration accuracy of the M703E s calibration gases This number is computed using data from the calibrator s QUTEUTECOW Check for Gas Flow problems Check the pressure regulator 03 GEN DRIVE Check the generator heater and temperature sensors Possible causes of faults are the same as O3 GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 11 1 Incorrect Lamp temperature can affect the efficiency and durability of the generators lamp Possible causes of faults the same as 3 GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 11 1 Same as REGULATOR PRESSURE WARNING from Table 11 1 If the Box Temperature is out of range make sure that Box Temperature typically runs 7 C warmer than ambient temperature BOX TEMP The Exhaust Fan is running The there is sufficient open space to the side and rear of instrument to allow adequate ventilation O3 LAMP TEMP table continued 180 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator Table 11 2 Test Functions Indicated Failures TEST FUNCTION DIAGNOSTIC RELEVANCE AND CAUSES OF FAULT CONDITIONS If the value displayed is too high the UV Source has become brighter Adjust the variable gain potentiometer on the UV Preamp Board in the optical bench If
132. D can also be used for to identify any one of several calibrators attached to the same network but situated in different physical locations 94 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports 7 1 7 TERMINAL OPERATING MODES The M703E can be remotely configured calibrated or queried for stored data through the serial ports As terminals and computers use different communication schemes the calibrator supports two communicate modes specifically designed to interface with these two types of devices e Computer mode is used when the calibrator is connected to a computer with a dedicated interface program e Interactive mode is used with a terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal or a dumb computer terminal The commands that are used to operate the calibrator in this mode are listed in Table 7 2 7 1 7 1 Help Commands in Terminal Mode Table 7 2 Terminal Mode Software Commands Control T Switches the calibrator to terminal mode echo edit If mode flags 1 amp 2 are OFF the interface can be used in interactive mode with a terminal emulation program Control C Switches the calibrator to computer mode no echo no edit CR A carriage return is required after each carriage return command line is typed into the terminal computer The command will not be sent to the calibrator to be executed until this is done On personal computers this is achie
133. DARY SETUP MENU COMM DIAC Continue pressing NEXT until ENTER PASSWORD O3 GEN CALIBRATION 8 1 8 ENTR PREV NEXT ENTR Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD SIGNAL O3 GEN CALIBRATION CAL PNTS PREV NEXT 1 500 MV 5 0 MIN ON PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT Continue pressing PREV amp NEXT until your reach the point to be deleted 8 1500 MV 5 0 MIN ON PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT DELETE YES NO DELETED 8 2000 MV 5 0 MIN ON PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT 122 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual M703E Calibration and Verification 8 2 5 TURNING O GENERATOR CALIBRATION POINTS ON OFF To enable or disable an existing calibration point press Make sure that the M703E is in standby mode STBY SEQ SETUP gt PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM DIAG Continue pressing NEXT until ENTER PASSWORD O3 GEN CALIBRATION ENTR PREV NEXT ENTR Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD O3 GEN CALIBRATION gt SIGNAL PREV NEXT CAL DENTS 1 500 MV 5 0 MIN ON PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT L Continue pressing PREV amp NEXT until your reach the point to be turned ON OFF 8 1500 MV 5 0 MIN ON PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT CAL POINT DRIVE 0 MV SET SET EDIT Continue pressing SET until CAL POINT ENABLELD ON SET CAL
134. DS102 7 E MEMW 499R TT LINK 10 gt C104 45V C104 ELCS LINKLED Hoo K 1 C0561AD L qy 14 22pF Xa MT2 no PLINI Leg M m HE us mii wc PLi0143 CE ae BSTWIUS ROT 2 x 5V C105 1 5 macko R114 22pF 18 432MHz lesouT AK8 C109 sv PL101 1 D ERE nes 23 100nF 5 PL101 15 x co aig 22 ae 50 Isai T101 57 m A18 8 5 52 5 18 V TG43 1406N 5y cmb md 49 A15 53 2 1 sU 16 6 x PL101 2 2 geld AIS T Soros ES R101 102 o 2110s ie 3 30 sara R115 2 z 4 99K mE x AT 100R 12 65 URTINT 10 54 46 SA10 91 3 14 3 status PL101 12 LMSEL aot 22 5 9 RXD 4 1 106 5V 5V 5 4 5 8 8116 M MAX237 V Te en 2483 5 536 525 TxD 88 12 try 119 id 75 R103 104 ALS 47 184 100 FS C120 gi 5 499 499 5 25 34 39 2 2 8117 pu 7 10 x urie TS s i T 5 7 5 2483 P v u or c2 1 55 m 7 4 8 at 8 1e V 27 015 70 79 5015 _ X 5 NC C121 e DS103 DS104 Sy NCI 014 11 25 8014 Nez 7RS SENS TXD D13 22 2 C110 16V P x52 NCB 012 ig 5012 100nF X79 u e gt e 16 25 83 10 DB 9 PIN NUMBERS IN PARENS 7 ae m 7
135. E API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 9 1 5 Adding a Recorder Offset to the TEST CHANNEL Some analog signal recorders require that the zero signal be significantly different from the baseline of the recorder in order to record slightly negative readings from noise around the zero point This can be achieved in the M703E by defining a zero offset a small voltage 10 of span To add a zero offset to a specific analog output channel press Toggle these keys to set ther value of the desired offset From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU See Section 6 9 1 1 DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET gt CAL EXIT Continue pressing SET gt until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT 5V OVR NOCAL SET SET EDIT DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT OUTPUT 5V SET EDIT Continue pressing SET until DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT REC OFS 0 mV SET SET EDIT DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT REC OFS 0 mV 0 0 ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT REC OFS 10 mV B 0 0 1 0 ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT REC OFS 10 mV SET SET EDIT EXI 68 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator 6 9 2 TEST CHANNEL CALIBRATION TEST CHANNEL calibration needs to be carried out on first startup of the analyzer performed in the factory as part of the configura
136. EPS INS DEL EDIT ____ SETUP 0 SET gt EDIT EXIT Deletes the sequence shown Edits the sequence shown in the message field in the message field Scrolls back and forth between Continue pressing SET gt until existing sequences STEPS Submenu SETUP X X PROGRESS MODE REM lt SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X PROGRESS MODE REM STEP PCT ELAP REM ENTR EXIT Use these keys to choose a PROGRESS MODE gt SETUP PROGRESS lt 5 EDIT EXIT 05744 Rev B 49 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 5 2 ADDING SEQUENCE STEPS To insert an instruction step into a sequence navigate to the INSERT STEP submenu by pressing Make sure that the M703E GEN STBY SEQ SETUP is in standby mode PRIMARY SETUP MENU SEQ SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT EXIT his display only appears if there are no sequences currentl programmed into the 7 OTHERWISE END OF SEQUENCES INS 1 SEQ NAME X STEPS INS DEL EDIT a SETUP 0 SET gt EDIT EXIT Deletes the sequence shown Edits the sequence shown in the message field in the message field Ree IL ein Continue pressing SET gt until existing sequences STEPS Submenu SETUP X X PROGRESS MODE REM lt SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X PROGRESS MODE REM STEP PCT ELAP REM ENTR EXIT i Use these keys to choose a PROGRESS MODE SETUP X X PRO
137. FTWARE REVISION B 0 The revision level of the i firmware installed in your BOOT PROGRESS XXXXXXXX 80 _ 1 analyzer is briefly displayed STANDBY SYSTEM RESET Firmware fully c TEST STBY SEQ MSG i SETUP booted Press CLR to clear initial warning messages The calibrator should automatically switch to STANDBY mode after completing the boot up sequence 05744 Rev B 21 TELEDYNE API Getting Started M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 3 4 2 WARM UP The M703E Photometric calibrator requires a minimum of 30 minutes for all of its internal components to reach a stable operating temperature During that time various portions of the instrument s front panel will behave as follows See Figure 3 1 for locations Table 3 4 Front Panel Display during System Warm Up Name Behavior Main Message Displays Warning messages and Test Field Function values At initial start up the various warning messages will appear here see Section 3 4 3 below STATUS LEDs Unit is operating in STANDBY mode Active Green OFF This LED glows green when the instrument is actively producing calibration gas Auto Yellow OFF This LED only glows when the calibrator is performing an automatic calibration sequence The calibrator is warming up and therefore many of its subsystems Fault BLINKING are not yet operating within their optimum ranges Various warning messages will appear
138. G FAULT CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES The CPU cannot Bus failure RELAY BOARD WARN communicate with the Failed relay PCA Relay PCA Loose connectors wiring The computer has This message occurs at power on rebooted If it is confirmed that power has not been interrupted SYSTEM RESET Failed 5 VDC power Fatal error caused software to restart Loose connector wiring 11 1 2 FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH TEST FUNCTIONS Besides being useful as predictive diagnostic tools the test functions viewable from the calibrators front panel can be used to isolate and identify many operational problems when combined with a thorough understanding of the calibrators Theory of Operation see Chapter 9 The acceptable ranges for these test functions are listed in the Nominal Range column of the calibrator Final Test and Validation Data Sheet shipped with the instrument Values outside these acceptable ranges indicate a failure of one or more of the calibrator s subsystems Functions whose values are still within the acceptable range but have significantly changed from the measurement recorded on the factory data sheet may also indicate a failure A worksheet has been provided in Appendix C to assist in recording the value of these Test Functions Table 11 2 contains some of the more common causes for these values to be out of range Table 11 2 Test Functions Indicated Failures TEST FUNCTION DIAGNOSTIC RELEVANCE AND CAUSES OF FAULT
139. GRESS MODE ELAP SET EDIT EXIT 50 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator 6 5 2 1 The Generate Step This step operates and is programmed similarly to the GENERATE gt AUTO At the end of the programming sequence the M703E firmware will automatically insert a DURATION step that needs to be defined To insert GENERATE step into a sequence press Starting at the INSERT STEPS Submenu INSERT STEP Submenu SETUP X X INSERT STEP GENERATE PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SETUP X X GENERATE ZERO ZEROENTR EXIT Toggle this key to switch between ZERO AIR and modes SETUP X X GENERATE 0 0 PPB O3 0 0 0 00 PPB ENTR EXIT Toggle this key to to scroll through the available units of measure SETUP X X GENERATE 0 0 PPB O3 0 0 0 0 PCT EXIT EXIT discards the new l target concentration Toggle these keys to set the target ENTR accepts the new concentration target concentration 7 SETUP DURATION 1 0 MIN 0 0 1 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to set DURATION of this step 7 SETUP X X 3 DURATION 10 0 MIN PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT 05744 Rev B 51 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 5 2 2 The STANDBY Step The STANDBY step places the calibrator into STANDBY mode To insert STANDBY step into a sequence press SETUP X X PREV NEXT 6 5 2 3 The DURAT
140. INAL dINV1 OLOHd OLOHd AW OLOHd AW OLOHd AW enjeAJ dINAL O AW N39 O AW 48 N39 20 o fenjepJ dINAL SISd 55 933 LNdLNO LOW 151 gt seouenbes fL YLNA 0832 NUS dNLAS 995 Bunsixe X E OM3Z 31VH3N39 SejKo seBesseui eui uBnouui opo AGGNVLS 9AgoE 0 SS9Jd 01 JojeJqi Eo ssaJd ue 1 SS9Jd OLnv dfil3S 412 28 1035 918 N39 0 2 UOISJ9A SIJIL NU W XIGNAddV 1531 0 2 5 saa1 1 V XIGN3ddV ANAGAT3L 5 10 2198 0 1012291122 3202 290 rv 591528 ANNIN dNLAS ASVINISHId 2 eJnBi4 490 9 2 Jnou 91195 0 soy 9599 10 8 Je1deu ees uoueq amp JO smoly eouenbes e LON eunpoooud 5 y so nuiu 991195 01
141. ION Step Starting at the STEPS Submenu INSERT STEP Submenu INSERT STEP GENERATE INSERT STEP STANDBY Use the PREV and NEXT keys to scroll though the list of available instructions ENTR ENTR EXIT EXIT The duration step causes the 7 to continue performing whatever action was called for by the preceding step of the sequence If that step put the instrument into STANDBY mode the calibrator stays in STANDBY mode for the To insert a DURATION step into a sequence press period specified by the DURATION step If that step put the instrument into GENERATE mode the will continue to GENERATE whatever calibration mixture was programmed into that step for the period specified by the DURATION step Toggle these keys to set DURATION of this step LU INSERT STEP Submenu INSERT STEP GENERATE PREV NEXT PREV NEXT Starting at the STEPS Submenu Use the PREV and NEXT keys to scroll though the list of available instructions DURATION 1 0 MIN 3 DURATION 10 0 MIN INS DEL EDIT ENTR EXIT INSERT STEP DURATION ENTR EXIT ENTR EXIT 52 05744 Rev B M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator 6 5 2 4 The EXECSEQ Step The EXECSEQ step allows the sequence to call another already programmed sequence This is a very powerful tool in that it allows the user to create a toolbox of often
142. LAMP REPLACEMENT This procedure details the steps for replacement of the UV source lamp in the optical bench assembly This procedure should be done whenever the lamp can no longer be adjusted as described in Section 10 2 3 Turn the analyzer off Remove the cover from the analyzer Locate the Optical Bench Assembly see Figure 3 3 1 2 3 4 Locate the UV lamp at the rear of the optical bench assembly see Figure 10 3 5 Unplug the lamp cable from the power supply connector on the side of the optical bench 6 Slightly loosen do not remove the UV lamp setscrew and pull the lamp from its housing 7 Install the new lamp in the housing pushing it all the way in Leave the UV lamp setscrew loose for now Turn the analyzer back on and allow to warm up for least 15 minutes Turn the UV detector gain adjustment pot See Figure 10 3 clockwise to its minimum value The pot should click softly when the limit is reached 10 Perform the UV Lamp Adjustment procedure described in Section 10 5 with the following exceptions Slowly rotate the lamp in its housing up to turn in either direction until a MAXIMUM value or 4600 mVDC is observed e Make sure the lamp is pushed all the way into the housing while performing this rotation If the PHOTO DET will not drop below 5000 mV while performing this rotation contact T API Customer Service for assistance Once a lamp position is found that corresponds to a maximum ob
143. LINE VOLTAGE TRACE SPACING FIX D RJ 5 16 07 Add alternate thermocouple connectors e e e e e e C 5 e 5 5 e Title 4 4 2 gt 4 Schem M100E M200E M400E Relay PCB e e e 210 e e 2 0 Size Number 04524 Revision CONIOTHROUGH CONIOTHROUGH OTHROUGH CONIOTHROUGH CONIOTHROUGH B CONIOTHROUGH CONIOTHROUGH Printed documents are uncontrolled Date 16 May 2007 Sheet 1 of 3 File N APCBMGR04522cce source 04522 By 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fe Line Aux Relay Connector 18 16 PIN FEE JP6 Heater Config Jumper E COMMON3 OAD RELAY3 RELAY3 RN2 RELAY4 330 COMMONT 7 4 RELAY4 RELAY3 RELAY4 A K4 K5 1 1 Neutral DC Vcc pa 4 1 7 Configuration Standard Pumps World Pumps 60 Hz 3 8 60Hz 100 115V 3 8 4 9 2 7 EUMP 50 Hz 2 7 5 10 50Hz 100 115V 3 8 4 9 2 7 5 10 60Hz 220 240V 3 8 1 6 MINERIT UM 50Hz 220 240V 3 8 1 6 5 10 AC Neutral IO3 1010 v O 1013 Valve4 Valve5 Valve6 e Valve7 17 1014 15V TVS p 22 uF VCC U3F 1015 12 19 12 O 1 2 VCC 0 1 MINIFIT 2 U2F Q2 IRL3303 13 218 12V 1 MINIFIT 2 Q4 Q3 Use 50 mil traces K4IRL3303 KHIRL3303 J21 NV m Title 4 12RETO 12 Schem M100E M200E M400E Relay PCB MINIFIT 2 N Revisi Size umber 04524 evision Printed documents are u
144. Manual 6 9 3 AIN CALIBRATION This is the sub menu calibrates the analyzer s A to D conversion circuitry This calibration should only be necessary after major repair such as a replacement of CPU motherboard or power supplies To perform an AIN CALIBRATION press From the CONFIGURATION SUBMENU See Section 6 9 5 1 DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR AOUTS CALIBRATED NO CAL AIN CALIBRATED NO CAL CALIBRATING A D ZERO CALIBRATING A D SPAN AIN CALIBRATED YES CAL 74 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator 6 10 SETUP gt MORE gt VARS INTERNAL VARIABLES VARS The M703E has several user adjustable software variables which define certain operational parameters Usually these variables are automatically set by the instrument s firmware but can be manually re defined using the VARS menu The following table lists all variables that are available within the 818 password protected level See Appendix A2 for a detailed listing of all of the 7 variables that are accessible through the remote interface Table 6 11 Variable Names VARS ALLOWED DEFAULT VARIABLE DESCRIPTION VALUES VALUES 58 C 1 2 Sets the photometer lamp temperature set Warning limits PHOTO_LAMP point and warning limits 56 C E 48 C i 43 C 53 C Set the upper span point of the O3 O3 CONC RANGE concentration range for TEST
145. N DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE Dry Air AC Pump HN E Control Relay Connectors Figure 9 4 Relay Board PCA with AC Relay Retainer Removed This version of the Relay PCA include one AC relays that controls the AC powered Dry Air zero air pump and A plastic insulating safety shield covers the remaining empty AC Relay sockets CAUTION NEVER REMOVE THIS SAFETY SHIELD WHILE THE INSTRUMENT IS PLUGGED IN AND TURNED ON THE CONTACTS OF THE AC RELAY SOCKETS BENEATH THE SHIELD CARRY HIGH AC VOLTAGES EVEN WHEN NO RELAYS ARE PRESENT 140 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 2 3 1 Valve Control The relay board also hosts two valve driver IC s each of which can drive up four valves In the M703E the relay PCA controls only those valves associated with the O3 generator and photometer options 9 2 3 2 Heater Control The relay PCA controls the DC heaters for the generator and photometer lamp housing MOTHER BOARD AID Converter Thermistor s VIF e g photometer sample gas temp photometer UV lamp temp O3 generator lamp temp ect RELAY PCA Generator Lamp Heater PHOTOMETER Lamp Heater Figure 9 5 Heater Control Loop Block Diagram 9 2 3 3 Relay PCA Status LEDs amp Watch Dog Circuitry Thirteen LEDs are located on the calibrator s relay board to indicate the status of the calibrator
146. NAL 1 PHOTOMETER OUTLET om ANALYZER ZERO AIR IN VENT M Figure 10 1 Pneumatic setup for performing Pressure Leak Checks END OF INSERTION 168 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures If you cannot locate the leak by the above procedure obtain a leak checker similar to the Teledyne Instruments part number 01960 which contains a small pump shut off valve and pressure gauge Alternatively a tank of pressurized gas with the two stage regulator adjusted to lt 15 psi a shutoff valve and pressure gauge may be used CAUTION Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution do not apply re apply vacuum as this will cause soap solution to be drawn into the instrument contaminating it DO NOT EXCEED 15 PSI PRESSURE 1 Turn OFF power to the instrument Install a leak checker or tank of gas as described above on the sample inlet at the rear panel Install caps on the following fittings on the rear panel e Exhaust e Vent e Internal Vent e Zero e Air Inlet e Both CALGAS OUT fittings 05744 Rev B 169 TELEDYNE API Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures M703E Calibrator Operators Manual NOTE The M703E calibrator cannot be leak checked with the pump in line due to internal leakage that normally occurs in the pump
147. NG THE M703E CALIBRATOR sssssssssssessessesessessessesecsessessesesseesesssesseeneeseaes 35 6 1 Test Runcis ea an T 36 05744 iii TELEDYNE API Table of Contents M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 2 Overview of Operating modes sse eene entente nre n nennen retener nnne nnns 37 6 3 STANDBY MOG oi ton neatis dicet I 38 6 4 General Information about the GENERATE 39 6 4 1 GENERATE gt AUTO Basic Generation of Calibration Gas sse 39 6 5 AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION SEQUENCES sssssssssseeeee enne 40 6 5 1 SETUP gt SEQ Programming Calibration 40 6 5 1 1 Activating a Sequence from the M703E Front 41 0 5 1 2 Naming a Sequence utet de Db Y RR RR RE ERA RR otter 42 6 5 1 3 Setting the Repeat Count for a Sequence 43 6 5 1 4 Using the M703E s Internal Clock to Trigger 5 44 6 5 1 5 Setting Up Control Inputs for a 47 6 5 1 6 Setting Up Control Outputs for a Sequence 48 6 5 1 7 Setting the PROGRESS Reporting Mode for the
148. O3 GEN TEMP Failed AC Relay e Faulty Connectors Wiring 05744 Rev B 185 TELEDYNE API General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operators Manual 11 4 SUBSYSTEM CHECKOUT The preceding sections of this manual discussed a variety of methods for identifying possible sources of failures or performance problems within the M703E calibrator In most cases this includes a list of possible components or subsystems that might be the source of the problem This section describes how to check individual components or subsystems to determine if which is actually the cause of the problem being investigated 11 4 1 VERIFY SUBSYSTEM CALIBRATION A good first step when troubleshooting the operation of the M703E calibrator is to verify that its major subsystems are properly calibrated These are e Test Channel D gt A conversion see Section 6 9 2 e Gas pressure calibration see Section 8 3 When optional components are installed you should also check e Photometer calibration see Section 8 1 e Os generator calibration see Section 8 2 11 4 2 AC MAIN POWER The 7 calibrator s electronic systems will operate with any of the specified power regimes As long as system is connected to 100 120 VAC or 220 240 VAC at either 50 or 60 Hz it will turn on and after about 30 seconds show a front panel display e Internally the status LEDs located on the Relay PCA Motherboard and CPU should turn
149. OP NETWORK If your unit has a Teledyne Instruments RS 232 multidrop card Option 62 see Section 7 3 for instructions on setting it up 18 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started 3 3 PNENUMATIC CONNECTIONS OPTIONAL Teledyne Instruments NM MODEL 701 I Zero Gas Generator Sample Inlet GAS OUT Teledyne Instruments GAS OUT E Series Gas Analyzer ZERO AIR IN DRY AIR IN M703E Sample Inlet Photometric O3 Calibrator Teledyne Instruments E Series Gas Analyzer Figure 3 9 Basic Pneumatic Setup of M703E 3 3 1 DRY AIR IN When using the internal zero air pump a source of dry air should be connected to the port labeled Dry Air In on the rear panel This air should be supplied at atmospheric pressure The supplied air should have a dew point of 20 C or less Teledyne API can supply an optional desiccant cartridge that can be used to supply dry air to the 7 3 3 2 ZERO AIR IN An external pressurized source of zero air can be supplied at the Zero Air port on the rear panel This is the standard configuration when the zero air pump is not installed This zero air should be scrubbed of ozone and have a dew point of 20 C orless The pressure of the zero air should be regulated to 20 35 psig NOTE When connecting an external source of zero air to an M703E with an internal zero air pump i
150. Operation M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 9 2 4 5 External Digital I O The external digital performs two functions The STATUS outputs carry logic level 5V signals through an optically isolated 8 pin connector on the rear panel of the calibrator These outputs convey on off information about certain calibrator conditions such as CONC VALID They can be used to interface with certain types of programmable devices The CONTROL outputs can be used to initiate actions by external peripheral devices in conjunction with individual steps of a calibration sequence see Section 6 5 1 6 The CONTROL inputs can be initiated by applying 5V DC power from an external source such as a PLC or data logger Section 6 5 1 5 Zero and span calibrations can be initiated by contact closures on the rear panel 9 2 4 6 lC Data Bus C is a two wire clocked digital serial I O bus that is used widely in commercial and consumer electronic systems A transceiver on the motherboard converts data and control signals from the PC 104 bus to The data are then fed to the keyboard display interface and finally onto the relay board Interface circuits on the keyboard display interface and relay board convert the lC data to parallel inputs and outputs An additional interrupt line from the keyboard to the motherboard allows the CPU to recognize and service key strokes on the keyboard 9 2 4 7 Power up Circuit This circuit monitors the 5V power supp
151. Operator s Manual A Primer on Eletro Static Discharge 12 4 2 BASIC ANTI ESD PROCEDURES FOR ANALYZER REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE 12 4 2 1 Working at the Instrument Rack When working on the analyzer while it is in the instrument rack and plugged into a properly grounded power supply 1 Attach you anti ESD wrist strap to ground before doing anything else e Use a wrist strap terminated with an alligator clip and attach it to any bare metal portion of the instrument chassis e This will safely connect you to the same ground level to which the instrument and all of its components are connected Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away Open the casing of the analyzer and begin work Up to this point the closed metal casing of your analyzer has isolated the components and assemblies inside from any conducted or induced static charges If you must remove a component from the instrument do not lay it down on a non ESD preventative surface where static charges may lie in wait Only disconnect your wrist strap after you have finished work and closed the case of the analyzer 12 4 2 2 Working at an Anti ESD Work Bench When working on an instrument of an electronic assembly while it is resting on a anti ESD work bench 1 Plug you anti ESD wrist strap into the grounded receptacle of the work station before touching any items on the work station and while standing at least a foot or so away This will a
152. Q 101219122 3202 0 2 uoIsJ9A 5 59911 nuajy o4MjOS 1 V XIGN3dd V 3NAG3 131 290 10 9 eeg deis peyoejes 10 syp3 nueuiqns NOILVYNSISNOD ADNANOAS dNLAS v eJnBi4 Jeuuny 9 ees uoee uo deis mau e suesu ON 89 SNI eouenbes Jo 151 uBnoiu eouenbes e 5 esn oj eui JEU enjee au sejqesiq Jo sejqeu3 jeyouieJ seouenbes y pesn zey e3iBip syoyeiqijeo eu sejgesiq Jo sejqeu3 Jeuueuo y jo eui 5 eouenbes ON 53 Lida uoneJnp uoneunp 9135 630 S Jo 101 Sj 5359315 eui se e se moys NOIL V3InG Aeldsip 5 y eouenb
153. R To set the REPEAT COUNTER press Make sure that the M703E is in standby mode L GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT EXIT his display only appears if there are no sequences currently programmed into the M703E OTHERWISE END OF SEQUENCES INS 1 SEQ NAME X STEPS INS DEL EDIT Deletes the sequence shown dits the sequence shown in the message field in the message field Scrolls back and forth between Continue pressing SET until existing sequences SETUP X X 0 SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X REPEAT COUNT 1 SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP NAME 0 0 0 1 ENTER EXIT Doo EXIT discards the new NAME ENTR accepts the Toggle these keys to set the repeat count from 1 to 100 new NAME py Enter 0 to cause the sequence to loop indefinitely a 05744 Rev B 43 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 5 1 4 Using the M703E s Internal Clock to Trigger Sequences Sequences can be set to trigger based on the M703E s internal clock The sequence can be set up to start at a predetermined date and time It can also be set to repeat after a predetermined delay time So activate and sequence timer press Make sure that the M703E GEN STBY SEQ SETUP is in standby mode PRIMARY SETUP MENU SEQ MORE SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT EXIT his display only appears if th
154. R ZERO OUT Capped Set for Verifying Optional Photometer Using Internal Generator External Zero Air Source U LSU L_ Enclosure Wall U ZERO AIR CALIBRATION MANIFOLD ven line Max Length 3 meters 10 feet Vent line Length 3 meters 10 feet Figure 8 2 Set for Verifying Optional Photometer Using an External Generator NOTE The manifolds as shown in the above drawing are oriented to simplify the drawing All unused ports should be capped A Minimum of 1 1 LPM is required for the external zero air source 8 1 1 1 Calibration Manifold Exhaust Vent Line The manifold s excess gas should be vented to a suitable vent outside of the room This vent should be of large enough internal diameter to avoid any appreciable pressure drop and it must be located sufficiently downstream of the output ports to assure that no ambient air enters the manifold due to eddy currents or back diffusion NOTE It is recommended that the calibration manifold s exhaust vent have a minimum internal diameter of 3 8 inch and a maximum length of 3 meters or 10 feet 114 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual M703E Calibration and Verification 8 1 2 VERIFYING PHOTOMETER PERFORMANCE To verify the performance of the M703E s optional internal photometer perform the following steps STANDBY ACT STANDBY
155. RATE GENERATE 0 0 PPB O3 0 0 0 0 PPB ENTR EXIT Toggle this key to to scroll through the available units of measure GENERATE 0 0 PPB O3 EXIT discards the new gas type amp 0 0 0 0 PPB O3 ENTR EXIT target concentration Toggle these keys ENTR accepts the new gas type amp to set the target target concentration concentration es STANDBY ACT CAL 30 PPB TEST GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP The M703E will stay in generate mode until the STBY button is pressed The M703E will now enter GENERATE mode 05744 Rev B 39 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 5 AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION SEQUENCES The M703E calibrator can be set up to perform automatic calibration sequences of multiple steps These sequences can perform all of the calibration operations available for manual operation and can be set up to be triggered by using the front panel buttons the M703E s internal timer the external digital control inputs the RS 232 interface via the optional Ethernet interface or even as sub processes in another sequence 6 5 1 SETUP SEQ PROGRAMMING CALIBRATION SEQUENCES A sequence is a database of single or multiple steps where each single step is an instruction that causes the instrument to perform an operation These steps are grouped under a user defined SEQUENCE NAME For each sequence seven attributes must be programmed They are
156. RMATION M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual USER NOTES 2 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Introduction 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 M703E CALIBRATOR OVERVIEW The Model 703E is a microprocessor based ozone calibrator for calibration of ambient ozone analyzers such as the T API M400E The M703E features an internal ozone photometer that provides very accurate closed loop feedback control of the ozone concentration As many as 50 independent calibration sequences may be programmed into the M703E covering time periods of up to one year The setup of sequences is simple and intuitive These sequences may be actuated manually automatically or by a remote signal The sequences may be uploaded remotely including remote editing All programs are maintained in non volatile memory The M703E design emphasizes fast response repeatability overall accuracy and ease of operation It may be combined with the Model 701 Zero Air Generator to provide the ultimate in easy to use precise calibration for your ozone analyzers Some of the exceptional features of your M703E Photometric O3 Calibrator are e Advanced E Series electronics e Lightweight for transportability e Optional Ethernet connectivity e 12 independent timers for sequences e Nested sequences up to 5 levels e Internal ozone generator and photometer allows use as primary or transfer standard 1 2 USING THIS MANUAL NOTE Throughout t
157. ROCEDURES Predictive diagnostic functions including failure warnings and alarms built into the calibrator s firmware allow the user to determine when repairs are necessary without performing painstaking preventative maintenance procedures For the most part the M703E calibrator is maintenance free there are however a minimal number of simple procedures that when performed regularly will ensure that the M703E photometer continues to operate accurately and reliably over its the lifetime Repairs and troubleshooting are covered in Section 11 of this manual 10 1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Table 10 1 below shows the recommended maintenance schedule for the M703E Please note that in certain environments i e dusty very high ambient pollutant levels some maintenance procedures may need to be performed more often than shown NOTE A Span and Zero Calibration Check see CAL CHECK REQ D Column of Table 10 1 must be performed following certain of the maintenance procedure listed below See Section 8 1 for instructions on performing a calibration check CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE PERFORMING ANY OF THE FOLLOWING OPERATIONS THAT REQUIRE ENTRY INTO THE INTERIOR OF THE ANALYZER NOTE THE OPERATIONS OUTLINED IN THIS CHAPTER ARE TO BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL ONLY 05744 Rev B 163 TELEDYNE API Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures M703E Photometric
158. ROVED LAST MOD ux 1 Aug 2002 3 4 97 SCH UV LAMP DRIVER M450 6 MI M2 M3 M4 M6 M5 M7 M9 M8 MIO T MF4 MAINT SW MAINT SW RET MAINT LED V MAINT LED LANG SW LANG SW RET SPR 1 0_0 SPR I O RET SPRIO 1 SPR I O RET SPR 1 0_2 SPR I O RET GND vcc TPI TP2 q TP3 R O 5 DISP_PWR TP6 es 7 DISP_PWR DISP_RET Wi VCC VCC GRN RI 1000 ONLY c KEYBOARD LED amp HORN e U2 5 4 KBD_AO 21 3 0 POO KBDAI 21 5 KBD_A2 1 AS INT pos SCL 22 SCL P05 9 MAINT SW SDA 23 SDA P06 10 LANG_SELCT po7 P10 13 GRN LED 14 Pre RED LED Pl4 P15 H2 NMONNET 2 Q PH 20 SPR I O 0 5 E gt CLR 9 MM74HC74A m vcc O Ex 1 1000 ONLY e U4 7 MAINT SWITCH DISP_DA_AO 1 AO 5 P S12 DISP DA AI 2 Al PI DISP_DA_A2 3 A2 P2 ont ox SCL HM H manr SW SDA 15 ps A MAINT_LED_V Fo 1 gt MAINT LED 8574 P7 5 D LANG_SELCT DISPLAY DATA 2 TNT 13 gt 5 SPR_I O_0 DISP DA 0 JP2 I2C TERMINATION e 8 5 DISP_CN_AO DISP DA AI Ji 2 LL SCL de 9 E SPR_I O_1 DISP CN AI DISP DA A2 pi
159. T POINT Regulator Pressure Sensor REG PRESSURE PSIG Capped fitting on backside of regulator assembly See Figure 8 4 Use monitor to measure ambient Photometer Sample Gas PHOTO SPRESS IN HG A atmospheric pressure at the calibrator s Pressure Sensor location 8 3 1 1 Gas Pressure Sensor Calibration Set Up The procedures described in this section require an independent calibrated pressure meter monitor be attached at the following location M703E Chassis ff Pressure PHOTOMETER BENCH ay Monitor I DRY Ai R 0 GAS INPUT PRESSURE SENSOR Fiter e I2 5 E PHOTOMETER 5 Pressure PRESSURE SENSOR 2 GEN PHOTOMETER On Back Panel PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR PHOTOMETER INLET uagasnu s TWOSYVHD Flow Control 800 cm 4 PHOTOMETER ZERO IN rome EXHAUST A PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT 071 1 eee 0 6 1 58 El 0 5 8 gt 3 c x ZERO AIR IN 001 J0 3u02 4 INTERNAL VENT PHOTOMETER OUTLET ANALYZER ANALYZER VENT GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD Figure 8 3 Pressure Calibration Monitor Points 05744 Rev B 125
160. TO 1 Automatically COM1 TEST PORT PREV NEXT OFF 05744 Rev B 93 TELEDYNE API Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 7 1 6 MACHINE ID Each type of Teledyne Instruments calibrator is configured with a default ID code The default ID code for all M703E calibrators is 700 The ID number is only important if more than one calibrator is connected to the same communications channel such as when several calibrators are on the same Ethernet LAN in a RS 232 multidrop chain See Section 7 3 or operating over a RS 485 network See Section 7 4 If two calibrators of the same model type are used on one channel the ID codes of one or both of the instruments needs to be changed so To edit the instrument s ID code press GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID COM1 2 MACHINE ID 700 ID EXIT discards the new setting 0 7 0 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to _ cycle through the ENTR accepts the new setting J available character set 0 9 The ID number is only important if more than one calibrator is connected to the same communications channel e g a multi drop setup Different models of Teledyne Instruments calibrators have different default ID numbers but if two calibrators of the same model type are used on one channel for example two M703E s the ID of one instrument needs to be changed The I
161. URGE delete the following duration step 05744 Rev B 55 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 5 3 DELETING A SEQUENCE To delete a sequence from the M703E calibrator s memory press Make sure that the M703E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT 3 SEQ NAME X STEPS PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT Scrolls back and forth between existing sequences SEQUENCES SEQUENCE DELETED END OF SEQUENCES INS 56 05744 Rev B M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator 6 6 SETUP gt CFG Pressing the CFG key displays the instrument s configuration information This display lists the calibrator model serial number firmware revision software library revision CPU type and other information Use this information to identify the software and hardware when contacting customer service Special instrument or software features or installed options may also be listed here GEN STBY SEQ SETUP X X SETUP MENU O3 Press NEXT of PREV to move back and forth through the following list of Configuration information SETUP X X M703E Cailbrator MODEL TYPE AND NUMBER PART NUMBER PREV NEXT return to the SERIAL NUMBER SOFTWARE REVISION LIBRARY REVISION iCHIP SOFTWARE REVISION Only appears if INET option is installed CPU TYPE amp
162. Version C 0 M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual M703E SETUP VARIABLES FOR LATEST REVISION NUMERI DEFAULT SETUP VARIABLE C UNITS VALUE VALUE RANGE DESCRIPTION COMMAND_PROMPT long interface NONE PHOTO MEAS O3 PHOTO REF O3 GEN REF OUTPUT FLOW REGULATOR PRESSURE Diagnostic analog output ID Enclose value in TEST_CHAN_ID SAMPLE double quotes when setting from the RS 232 PRESSURE interface SAMPLE FLOW SAMPLE TEMP PHOTO LAMP TEMP O3 LAMP TEMP CHASSIS TEMP O3 PHOTO CONC ON enables passwords PASS_ENABLE ON OFF ON OFF disables them Any string of exactly 12 Default contact closure output pattern when not characters executing a sequence Enclose value in double consisting of the quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface digits 0 and 1 only LAMP_PWR_ENABLE ON OFF ON ON Signe POSSE lamp power cycling OFF disables it LAMP PWR PERIOD 0 01 1000 Photometer lamp power cycling period LAMP OFF DELAY 0 02 5 Length of photometer lamp is turned off DET_VALID_DELAY 1 300 Delay until valid concentration is computed Photometer reference standard deviation must be REF_SDEV_LIMIT 1 1 0 below this limit to switch out of startup mode RS 232 interface command prompt Displayed only if Cmds character set U enabled with RS232_MODE variable Enclose value to 100 in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 DEF_CC_OUTPUT 5 PATH_LENGTH 41 96 0 01
163. XIT discards the OFF new setting Toggle this key turn the CC input ENTR accepts the ON OFF new setting 7 EXIT discards the Moves the new setting cursor one character left or ENTR accepts the right new setting 7 Toggle this key to turn the selected bit ON OFF 0 1 Each bit shown on the display represents one of the control output pins located on the back of the M703E see Figure 3 2 The left most bit is Bit 1 the next bit to the right bit 2 progressing rightward to bit 8 see Figure 3 8 for connector pin assignments ge 86 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports 7 OPERATING THE M703E OVER THE SERIAL I O PORTS 7 1 USING THE ANALYSER S COMMUNICATION PORTS The M703E is equipped with two serial communication ports located on the rear panel accessible via 2 DB 9 connectors on the back panel of the instrument See Figure 3 2 The COM1 connector is a male DB 9 connector and the COM2 is a female DB9 connector Both ports operate similarly and give the user the ability to communicate with issue commands to and receive data from the calibrator through an external computer system or terminal e RS 232 port COM1 can also be configured to operate in single or RS 232 multidrop mode option 62 See Section 5 2 3 and7 3 The COM2 port can be configured for standard RS 232 operation half duplex RS 485 communication or for a
164. ZRO XSPN BCAL XSPN TEST FUNCTION Message Field ZERO Allow calibration gas to gas to enter the PHOTOMETER IN port at the rear of the calibrator BCAL XSPN TEST FUNCTION Message Field ZERO SPAN BCAL XSPN ACTUAL CONC 400 0 PPB 0 0 4 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT BCAL XSPN ARE YOU SURE YES NO The Message field displays the Test Function currently selected It is recommended that you use an Span concentration of 400 PPB EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting JA Press YES to changes the OFFSET amp SLOPE values for the measurement Press NO to leave the photometer calibration values unchanged 05744 Rev B 117 TELEDYNE API M703E Calibration and Verification M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 8 1 4 0 PHOTOMETER DARK CALIBRATION The Dark Calibration Test turns off the Photometer UV Lamp and records any offset signal level of the UV Detector Preamp Voltage to Frequency Converter circuitry This allows the instrument to compensate for any voltage levels inherent in the Photometer detection circuit that might affect the output of the detector circuitry and therefore the calculation of O3 concentration GEN STBY SEQ PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE 03 GAS CONFIG PHOT 03 GAS CONFIG BCAL DARK CALIBRATING DARK OFFSET DARK CAL 34 COMPLETE The DARK CAL procedure progresses automatically until DARK CAL Successful No INVALID DARK CAL OFFS
165. a good conductor that is not grounded the resulting positive or negative charge cannot bleed off and becomes trapped in place or static The most common example of triboelectric charging happens when someone wearing leather or rubber soled shoes walks across a nylon carpet or linoleum tiled floor With each step electrons change places and the resulting electro static charge builds up quickly reaching significant levels Pushing an epoxy printed circuit board across a workbench using a plastic handled screwdriver or even the constant jostling of Styrofoam pellets during shipment can also build hefty static charges Table 12 1 Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities MEANS OF GENERATION 65 90 RH 10 25 RH Walking across nylon carpet 1 500V 35 000V Walking across vinyl tile 250V 12 000V Worker at bench 100V 6 000V Poly bag picked up from bench 1 200V 20 000V Moving around in a chair padded 1 500V 18 000V with urethane foam 05744 Rev B 205 TELEDYNE API A Primer on Eletro Static Discharge M703E Calibrator Operators Manual 12 2 HOW ELECTRO STATIC CHARGES CAUSE DAMAGE Damage to components occurs when these static charges come into contact with an electronic device Current flows as the charge moves along the conductive circuitry of the device and the typically very high voltage levels of the charge overheat the delicate traces of the integrated circuits melting them or even vaporizing parts of them When examined by mi
166. able of Contents M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual LIST OF FIGURES Figure 3 1 M703E Front Panel Layout nennen nennen nn innen nennen ennt nennen inneren 10 Figure 3 2 M703E Rear Panel 10 Figure 3 3 M7O3E Internal Layout Top 11 Figure 3 4 M703E Pneumatic nnne inen nennen nennen 12 Figure 3 5 M703E the TEST CHANNEL 13 Figure 3 6 Status Output Connector iaeiiio niini rniii ein Eesavi en nene eren ia ENE 14 Figure 3 7 M703E Digital Control Input 16 Figure 3 8 M703E Digital Control Output Connector eem nennen nennen nnns 17 Figure 3 9 Basic Pneumatic Setup 19 Figure 3 10 Location of Pressure Regulator Adjustment 26 Figure 5 1 M703E with Carrying Strap Handle and Rack Mount 29 Figure 5 1 MZ 0SE Multidrep eo ined eno tan eni 30 Figure 5 2 oM 03E Ethemet edited o ene adie 31 Figure 5 3 7 Rear Panel with Ethernet meme 31 Figure 6 1 Eront Panel Display tee ee ode eee ene ees 37 Figur
167. ach case e The left digit will be a number between 1 and 4 representing the binary setting of bits 1 through 4 and The right digit will be a number between 1 and 4 representing the binary setting of bits 5 through 8 84 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator LEVEL ID STATUS BLOCK 1 setting 0000 0100 25 150 PPB O3 04 83 1000 0011 STATUS BLOCK 2 setting CONCENTRATION Figure 6 5 LEADS Level Display Format 05744 Rev B 85 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 12 6 CONFIGURING LEVEL STATUS BLOCKS There are two STATUS BLOCKS associated with LEADS LEVELS e BLOCK 1 This block corresponds to the physical CONTROL OUTPUT connections located on the back panel of the M703E see Figure 3 2 Figure 3 8 and Section 3 2 5 e BLOCK 2 The second status block does not correspond to any physical output but is used to communicate status over the serial data port To configure the either of the STATUS BLOCKS press Make sure that the M703E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ PRIMARY SETUP MENU O3 LEVL SEQ See LEVEL ID Gas Conc Status Block Set g Figure 6 5 INS DEL EDIT Toggle these keys until the number of the LEVEL to be edited is reached SETUP LEVEL NUMBER 12 SET SET EDIT SETUP X X STATUS BLOCK 2 DISABLED SET SET EDIT SETUP X X STATUS BLOCK 2 E
168. ad level tables 05744 Rev B 79 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 12 3 LEVELS A LEVEL is a combination of several parameters e An D number for the LEVEL e An action e g GENERATE STANDBY e Atarget concentration value e An output flow rate if applicable Configuration for one or both of two status output blocks Up to twenty levels can be defined and used with the M703E using a range of ID numbers from 0 98 Level 99 is reserved for standby Are not time based and do not include characteristics such as start time or duration therefore a single LEVEL can not switch between different concentration levels and flow rates Separate flow and concentration outputs must be programmed into separate LEVELs which are then individually started and stopped either by an operator at the calibrator s front panel or through a serial data operation over the RS 232 or Ethernet ports 6 12 4 ACTIVATING AN EXISTING LEVEL To activate an existing defined LEVEL press Make sure that the M703E is in standby GEN STBY SEQ SETUP mode STANDBY SYSTEM RESET LEVL AUTO EXIT STANDBY LEVEL 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT Le Toggle these keys until the designation of the existing defined level program is reached MANUAL ACT 7 500 LPM 100 0 PPB The M703E will continue TST TST gt GEN STBY SETUP generrating calibration gas at the LEVEL chosen until the STBY button is pressed 80 05744 R
169. afety Messages SAFETY MESSAGES Your safety and the safety of others are very important We have provided many important safety messages in this manual Please read these messages carefully A safety message alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others Each safety message is associated with a safety alert symbol These symbols are found in the manual and inside the M703E Photometric O3 Calibrator The definition of these symbols is described below GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD Refer to the instructions for details on the specific hazard CAUTION Hot Surface Warning CAUTION Electrical Shock Hazard TECHNICIAN SYMBOL operations marked with this symbol are to be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only CAUTION The M703E Photometric O3 Calibrator should only be used for the purpose and in the manner described in this manual If you use the 7 in a manner other than that for which it was intended unpredictable behavior could ensue with possible hazardous consequences NOTE Technical Assistance regarding the use and maintenance of the M703E or any other Teledyne Instruments product can be obtained by Contacting Teledyne Instruments Customer Service Department at 800 324 5190 or Via the internet at http www teledyne api com forms 05744 Rev B i TELEDYNE API Safety Messages M703E Dynamic Operator s Manual USER NOTES
170. air pump when generating ozone 25 0 100 Standard temperature for unit conversions STD_PRESS 29 92 15 50 Standard pressure for unit conversions CLOCK ADJ Sec Day 60 60 Time of day clock speed adjustment Medium Access Level Setup Variables 929 password O3 CONC RANGE 5 O3 PHOTO BENCH ONLY ZA_PUMP_ENAB B STD_TEMP C 9 Selects the language to use for the user interface LANGUAGE SELECT ENGL Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface 25 Time until automatically switching out of software MAINT_TIMEOUT 95100 controlled maintenance mode O3 DWELL 2 Dwell time after switching measure reference valve O3 SAMPLE Number of detector readings to sample DARK OFFSET 1000 1000 0 dark offset for measure and reference FILT SIZE 3 FILT_ASIZE FILT_DELTA 2 1 100 Moving average filter size FILT_DELAY Absolute concentration difference to trigger adaptive 1 1000 filter 1 100 Percent concentration difference to trigger adaptive filter 0600 Delay before leaving adaptive filter mode OFF ON ON enables adaptive filter OFF disables it mV PB FILT ADAPT PDELTA GAIN 2 200 200 Multiplied by difference between measure and Hg reference pressure and added to concentration 2 i 0 1 20 Duration of pressure compensation calibration procedure O3 SLOPE CONST 0 1 10 Constant factor to keep visible slope near 1 O3 SLOPE 0 850 1 150 pho
171. al Operating the M703E Calibrator 6 5 1 7 Setting the PROGRESS Reporting Mode for the Sequences As sequences run the M703E calibrator reports progress by displaying a message in the MODE field of the front panel display See Figure 3 1 There are several types of report modes available Table 6 5 Sequence Progress Reporting Mode MODE DESCRIPTION e Shows the progress as the sequence name and step number This is the traditional display Example 502 Test 2 Shows the progress as a percent 0 100 of the total sequence duration Example SEQ 48 e Shows the progress as days hours minutes and seconds elapsed counting up 0 ELAP Example 1 day T 01 30 25 i e 1 hour 30 minutes 25 seconds elapsed Example gt 1 day T 1d30 25 i e 1 day 30 hours 25 minutes elapsed e Shows the progress as days hours minutes and seconds remaining counting down to 0 REM Example 1 day 01 30 25 i e 1 hour 30 minutes 25 seconds remaining Example gt 1 day 1430 25 i e 1 day 30 hours 25 minutes remaining STEP PCT To select a PROGRESS report mode press Make sure that the M703E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ SETUP gt PRIMARY SETUP MENU SEQ MORE SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT EXIT his display only appears if there are no sequences currentl programmed into the M703E OTHERWISE END OF SEQUENCES INS 1 SEQ NAME X ST
172. alibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator 6 11 OPERATING THE M703E CALIBRATOR AS AN PHOTOMETER The M703E can easily be configured to measure an external source of ozone 6 11 1 SET UP FOR OPERATING THE M703E AS AN PHOTOMETER To convert the 7 from an calibrator to and photometer 1 Remove the two loop back tubing assemblies on the rear panel connected to the PHOTO IN and PHOTO REF IN fittings 2 Connect the ozone source to be measured to the PHOTO IN fitting e This gas must be supplied at atmospheric pressure 3 Connect a reference gas Zero Air for the photometer to the PHOTO REF IN e This gas must be supplied at atmospheric pressure To avoid interference effects the reference gas should be from the same source than is being used to feed the ozone generator that is being assayed REFERENCE GAS SOURCE SOURCE TO BE MEASURED PHOTOMETER I NLET PHOTOMETER OUTLET Capped PHOTOMETER ZERO IN PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT EXHAUST line Max Length 3 meters or 10 feet EXHAUST ZERO AIR IN DRY AIR IN CAL GAS OUT Capped CAL GAS OUT M703E Photometric O3 Calibrator Minimum input gas flow for Photometer is 800 cc min Figure 6 4 Set up for Using the M703E to Measure an External Source 05744 Rev B 77 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Man
173. als warning limits voltages etc They consist of an optional plus or minus sign followed by zero or more digits an optional decimal point and zero or more digits At least one digit must appear before or after the decimal point Scientific notation is not permitted For example 7 0 1234 5678 0 1 1 are all valid floating point numbers e Boolean expressions are used to specify the value of variables or I O signals that may assume only two values They are denoted by the keywords ON and OFF e Text strings used to represent data that cannot be easily represented by other data types such as data channel names which may contain letters and numbers They consist of a quotation mark followed by one or more printable characters including spaces letters numbers and symbols and a final quotation mark For example 1 123abc and lt gt are all valid text strings It is not possible to include a quotation mark character within a text string e Some commands allow you to access variables messages and other items When using these commands you must type the entire name of the item you cannot abbreviate any names 7 1 7 4 Status Reporting Reporting of status messages as an audit trail is one of the three principal uses for the RS 232 interface the other two being the command line interface for controlling the instrument and the download of data in electronic format You can effectively disable the
174. any failure messages PLEASE COMPLETE THE FOLLOWING TABLE PARAMETER RECORDED VALUE ACCEPTABLE VALUE ACT PPB 196 OF TARG TARG PPB 50 1000 PPB OUTPUT FLOW LPM 2 5LPM REG PRESSURE PSIG 15 2 PSIG 5 LPM BOX TEMP 20 35 C GEN REF mV 0 5000 mV O GEN DRIVE mV 0 5000mV LAMP TEMP eC 48 190 PHOTO MEASURE mV 2500 4700 mV PHOTO REFERENCE mV 2500 4700 mV PHOTO FLOW LPM 0 720 0 880 LPM PHOTO LAMP TEMP 58 1 PHOTO SPRESS IN HG A 1 AMBIENT IN HG A PHOTO STEMP 25 48 PHOTO SLOPE 1 0 15 PHOTO OFFSET PPB 0 10PPB Depending on options installed not all test parameters shown below will be available in your calibrator If ozone generator option installed 2 If photometer option installed permeation tube installed What is measured photometer flow rate What is measured generator flow rate What is the photo reference value while generating SPAN TELEDYNE API CUSTOMER SERVI CE EMAIL api customerservice teledyne com PHONE 858 657 9800 TOLL FREE 800 324 5190 05747 Rev B ZERO Continue on back if necessary cc min cc min FAX 858 657 9816 Warranty Repair m m TELEDYNE Questionnaire ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION Operator 5 Teledyne Technologies Company Manual Model 703E What are the failure symptoms
175. apter 9 For information on navigating the calibrator s software menus see the menu trees described in Appendix A 1 3 4 1 START UP After all of the electrical and pneumatic connections are made turn on the instrument The exhaust fan and should start immediately If the instrument is equipped with an internal photometer installed the associated pump should also start up The display should immediately display a single horizontal dash in the upper left corner of the display This will last approximately 30 seconds while the CPU loads the operating system Once the CPU has completed this activity it will begin loading the calibrator firmware and configuration data During this process string of messages will appear on the calibrator s front panel display System waits 3 seconds then automatically begins its initialization routine START No action required CHECKING FLASH STATUS 1 System is checking the format of L the instrument s flash memory chip SELECT START OR REMOTE 3 STARTING INSTRUMENT CODE 1 If at this point FLASH FORMAT INVALID appears contact customer service STARTING INSTRUMENT W FLASH 4 The instrument loading configuration and calibration data from the flash chip M703E CALIBRATOR The instrument is loading the calibrator firmware BOOT PROGRESS XXXXX 50 _____ SO
176. are Spare PHOTO LAMP HEATER 14 0 Os photometer lamp heater on 1 off O3 GEN HEATER 0 Os generator lamp heater on 1 off Front panel rc keyboard default address 4E hex MAINT MODE 5 input 0 2 maintenance mode _ LANG2_SELECT 6 input 0 select second language 1 select first language English SEQUENCE_LED 8 output 0 2 sequence LED on executing sequence 1 off AUTO TIMER LED 9 output 0 automatic timer LED on automatic sequence timer enabled 1 off FAULT LED 10 output 0 fault LED on 1 off AUDIBLE BEEPER 14 output 0 beeper on for diagnostic testing only 1 off 6 Photometerfow 22 5 REGULATOR PRESS PHOTO FLOW OUTPUT FLOW _____ o SSCS 20 05745 TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX A 4 Signal I O Definitions Software Version C 0 M703E I O Signal List for Latest Revision Signal Name Bit or Description Channel Number PHOTO_LAMP_TEMP Photometer lamp temperature O3 GEN TEMP Os generator lamp temperature Rear board DAC MUX analog inputs DAC channel 0 loopback DAC channel 1 loopback DAC CHAN 1 DAC CHAN 2 DAC CHAN 3 DAC channel 2 loopback DAC CHAN 4 DAC channel 3 loopback Rear board analog outputs concour o Concentration outputs SSCS is analog output AD5321 default address 18 hex PHOTO LAMP DRIVE Os photometer lamp drive 0
177. around the target concentration until finally stabilizing A Perform an 03 Gen Calibration See Section 8 2 Why does the ENTR key sometimes disappear on the front panel display Sometimes the ENTR key will disappear if you select a setting that is invalid or out of the allowable range for that parameter such as trying to set the 24 hour clock to 25 00 00 gt Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value the ENTR key will re appear How do make the RS 232 Interface Work See Chapter 7 When should change the sintered filter s in the calibrators flow control s and how do change them The sintered filters do not require regular replacement Should one require replacement as part of a troubleshooting or repair exercise see Section 11 8 1 FD How often should rebuild the photometer pump on my calibrator gt The photometer pump has been designed longer service life than standard diaphragm pumps When the pump wears out the entire pump must be replaced Q How long do the UV lamps of the generator and photometer last A The typical lifetime is about 2 3 years 4 2 GLOSSARY Acronym A short form or abbreviation for a longer term Often artificially made up of the first letters of the phrase s words APICOM Name of a remote control program offered by Teledyne API to its customers ASSY Acronym for Assembly metric abbreviation for cubic centimeter Same as the
178. ated control device on the Relay PCA is bad Several of the control devices are in sockets and can be easily replaced The table below lists the control device associated with a particular function Table 11 8 Relay PCA Control Devices FUNCTION EE IN SOCKET UV Lamp Heater Q2 No Gen Heater Q3 No All Valves U5 Yes AC Dry air Pump K1 No DC Photometer Pump U1 No 11 4 7 PHOTOMETER O3 GENERATOR PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR ASSEMBLY This assembly is only present in calibrators with O3 generator and or photometer options installed The pressure flow sensor located at the rear of the instrument between the generator and the photometer pump see Figure 3 3 can be checked with a Voltmeter The following procedure assumes that the wiring is intact and that the motherboard as well as the power supplies are operating properly BASIC PCA OPERATION e Measure the voltage across C1 it should be 5 VDC x 0 25 VDC If not then the board is bad e Measure the voltage between TP2 and TP1 C1 it should be 10 VDC 0 25 VDC If not then the board is bad 05744 Rev B 189 TELEDYNE API General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operators Manual PHOTOMETER PRESSURE SENSOR 1 Measure the pressure on the inlet side of S1 with an external pressure meter 2 Measure the voltage across TP4 and 1 e The expected value for this signal should be Pressure Expected mVDC
179. ations The option consists of a Teledyne Instruments designed Ethernet card see Figures 5 7 and 5 8 and a 7 foot long CAT 5 network cable terminated at both ends with standard RJ 45 connectors DC Power Connector Female RJ 45 Connector RS 232 connector to the Motherboard Figure 5 2 M703E Ethernet Card ETHERNET OPTION Rear Panel CPU Ethernet as seen from inside Card gt RJ 45 Card Connector Analog Out Link MEPR LED ese dy CONTROLIN Activity LNK LED ABODE IU ACT LED Transmit LED xD LED B RxD LED 7 Receive LED Exterior View Interior View Figure 5 3 M703E Rear Panel with Ethernet Installed For more information on setting up and using this option see Section7 5 05744 Rev B 31 TELEDYNE API Optional Hardware and Software M703E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator Operator s Manual 5 2 5 ETHERNET MULTIDROP OPT 64 This option allows the instrument to communicate on both RS 232 and ETHERNET networks simultaneously includes the following e RS232 MODEM CABLES OPT 60A e ETHERNET CABLE OPT 60B RS 232 MULTIDROP OPT 62 e ETHERNET OPT 63 5 3 ADDITIONAL MANUAL OPT 70 Additional copies of the printed user s manual can be purchased from the factory Please specify the serial number of your calibrator so that we can match the manual version This operator s manual is also available on CD The el
180. ator Ee Adjustment Pot Os B Generator Reference Detector PCA Figure 10 5 Location of Generator Reference Detector Adjustment Pot 174 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures 9 Perform the following procedure Make sure that the M703E GEN STBY SEQ SETUP is in standby mode PRIMARY SETUP MENU 03 O3 GAS CONFIG MODE ADJ ACT CAL 0 000LPM lt TST TST gt Press lt TST or TST gt until O3 GEN REF 2500 0 MV lt TST TST gt Slowly rotate the lamp up to a 74 turn in either direction to until the DRIVE displays the lowest value I s YES Is the value of O3 GEN DRIVE between 2500 0 MV and 4600 0 MV a Se Using an insulated pot adjustment tool turn the O3 GENERATOR DETECTOR ADJUSTMENT POT until the value of O3 GEN DRIVE is between 2500 0 MV and 4600 0 MV ADJUSTMENT COMPLETE 10 Tighten the two set screws 11 Replace the calibrator s cover 12 Perform an auto leak check See Section 10 2 1 13 Calibrate the Ozone Generator calibration see Section 8 2 Calibrating the O3 Generator 05744 Rev B 175 TELEDYNE API Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures M703E Calibrator Operators Manual USER NOTES 176 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrato
181. ator s rear panel Table 3 2 M703E Control Input Pin Assignments CONNECTOR INPUT DESCRIPTION T 1106 Can be used as either 6 separate on off switches as bits 1 through x 6 of a 12 bit wide binary activation code see Section 6 5 1 5 Bott 7 to 12 Can be used as either 6 separate on off switches or as bits 7 through onom 8 12 of a 12 bit wide binary activation code see Section 6 5 1 5 BOTH Chassis ground Input pin for 5 VDC required to activate pins A F This can be from Top an external source or from the pin of the instruments STATUS connector Input pin for 5 required to activate pins G L This can be from Bottom an external source or from the pin of the instruments STATUS connector BOTH Internal source of 5V that can be used to actuate control inputs when connected to the U pin 05744 Rev B 15 TELEDYNE API Getting Started M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual There are two methods for energizing the control inputs The internal 5V available from the pin labeled is the most convenient method However if full isolation is required an external 5 VDC power supply should be used CONTROL Bit 01 Example of Local Power Connections o 9 a 2 CONTROL Bit 03 CONTROL Bit 04 CONTROL Bit 05 CONTROL Bit 06 Example of External Power Connections CONTROL Bit 03 7 CONTROL Bit 04 CONTROL Bit
182. be used to limit the current through the individual transistor outputs to S50mA 120 for 5V supply The pin assignments for the control outputs are Table 3 3 M703E Control Input Pin Assignments PINE STATUS DEFINITION CONDITION Outputs 1 through 12 respectively Closed if the sequence or sequence step activating output is operating Emitter BUSS The emitters of the transistors on pins 1 to 8 are bussed together Digital Ground The ground level from the calibrator s internal DC power supplies 05744 Rev B 17 TELEDYNE API Getting Started M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 3 2 6 CONNECTING THE SERIAL PORTS If you wish to utilize either of the calibrator s two serial interface COMM ports refer to Section 7 1 of this manual for instructions on their configuration and usage 3 2 7 CONNECTING TO A LAN OR THE INTERNET If your unit has a Teledyne Instruments Ethernet card Option 63 and 64 plug one end into the 7 5 cable supplied with the option into the appropriate place on the back of the calibrator and the other end into any nearby Ethernet access port NOTE The M703E firmware supports dynamic IP addressing or DHCP If your network also supports DHCP the calibrator will automatically configure its LAN connection appropriately If your network does not support DHCP see Section 7 5 2 1 for instructions on manually configuring the LAN connection 3 2 8 CONNECTING TO A MULTIDR
183. bine flags 1 quiet mode 2 computer mode 4 enable security 8 enable hardware handshaking 32 enable multi drop 64 enable modem 128 ignore RS 232 line errors 256 disable XON XOFF support 512 disable hardware FIFOs 1024 enable RS 485 mode 2048 even parity 7 data bits 1 stop bit 4096 enable command prompt 8192 even parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit iod 2400 4800 RATE 19200 38400 57600 115200 AT YO amp DO f 810 Any character in S0 2 amp B0 the allowed RS 232 COM1 modem initialization string Sent MODEM INIT RNE amp MO character set Up verbatim plus carriage return to modem on power up 10 100 characters or manually EO Qt long RS 232 COM2 mode flags 0 65535 Same settings as RS232_MODE 1200 2400 4800 BAUD_RATE2 19200 9600 RS 232 COM2 baud rate 19200 38400 57600 115200 AT YO amp DO 810 Any character S0 2 80 the allowed RS 232 COM2 modem initialization string Sent 2 RNE amp MO character set Up verbatim plus carriage return to modem on power up 10 100 characters or manually EO Qt amp WO long RS232 PASS 940331 0 999999 RS 232 log on password LINE DELAY m o 0 1000 RS 232 inter line transmit delay 0 disabled MACHINE ID 70 0 9999 Unique ID number for instrument 05745 Rev C A 13 TELEDYNE API APPENDIX A 2 Setup Variables For Serial I O Software
184. ble 3 5 Possible Warning Messages at Start Up MESSAGE MEANING ANALOG CAL WARNING The calibrators A D converter or at least one analog input channel has not been calibrated CONFIG INITIALIZED Stored Configuration information has been reset to the factory settings or has been erased DATA INITIALIZED The calibrators data storage was erased FRONT PANEL WARN is unable to communicate with the front The firmware is unable to communicate with either the EARP ORVER ony O3 generator or photometer lamp driver chips The generator lamp temperature is outside of O3 GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING b allowable limits The pump associated with the O3 photometer has failed O3 PUMP WARNING to turn on The photometer lamp temperature is outside of PHOTO LAMP TEMP WARNING 5247 allowable limits The photometer reference reading is outside of PHOTO REFERENCE WARNING nid allowable limits REAR BOARD NOT DET The calibrator s motherboard was not detected during power up RELAY BOARD WARN The firmware is unable to communicate with the calibrator s relay board SYSTEM RESET The calibrator has been turned off and on or the CPU was reset O3 GEN REFERENCE WARNING The generator s reference detector has dropped below the minimum allowable limit 05744 Rev B 23 TELEDYNE API Getting Started M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 3 4 4 FUNCTIONAL CHECK 7 After the calibrators components have warmed up for at least 30
185. ccess via an LAN by installing the Teledyne Instruments Ethernet interface card see Section 5 2 4 and 7 5 7 1 1 RS 232 DTE AND DCE COMMUNICATION RS 232 was developed for allowing communications between data terminal equipment DTE and data communication equipment DCE Basic data terminals always fall into the DTE category whereas modems are always considered DCE devices Electronically the difference between the DCE amp DTE is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and Data Transmit functions e DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3 devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2 A switch located below the serial ports on the rear panel allows the user to switch between DTE for use with data terminals or DCE for use with modems Since computers can be either DTE or DCE check your computer to determine which mode to use 05744 Rev B 87 TELEDYNE API Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 7 1 2 COMM PORT DEFAULT SETTINGS AND CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS Received from the factory the calibrator is set up to emulate an RS 232 DCE device e RS 232 COM1 RS 232 fixed DB 9 male connector o Baud rate 19200 bits per second baud Data Bits 8 data bits with 1 stop bit o Parity None e 2 RS 232 configurable to RS 485 DB 9 female connector o Baud rate 115000 bits per second baud o Data Bits 8 data bits with
186. ce causing the device to fail immediately More likely the trace will be only partially occluded by the damage causing degraded performance of the device or worse weakening the trace This weakened circuit may seem to function fine for a short time but even the very low voltage and current levels of the device s normal operating levels will eat away at the defect over time causing the device to fail well before its designed lifetime is reached These latent failures are often the most costly since the failure of the equipment in which the damaged device is installed causes down time lost data lost productivity as well as possible failure and damage to other pieces of equipment or property e Static Charges can t build up on a conductive surface There are two errors in this statement Conductive devices can build static charges if they are not grounded The charge will be equalized across the entire device but without access to earth ground they are still trapped and can still build to high enough levels to cause damage when discharged A charge can be induced onto the conductive surface and or discharge triggered in the presence of a charged field such as a large static charge clinging to the surface of a nylon jacket of someone walking up to a workbench e As long as my analyzer is properly installed it is safe from damage caused by static discharges It is true that when properly installed the chassis ground of your analyzer is tied t
187. croscope the damage caused by electro static discharge looks a lot like tiny bomb craters littered across the landscape of the component s circuitry A quick comparison of the values in Table 12 1 with the those shown in the Table 12 2 listing device susceptibility levels shows why Semiconductor Reliability News estimates that approximately 60 of device failures are the result of damage due to electro static discharge Table 12 2 Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD DAMAGE SUSCEPTIBILITY VOLTAGE DEVICE RANGE DAMAGE BEGINS CATASTROPHIC OCCURRING AT DAMAGE AT MOSFET 10 100 VMOS 30 1800 NMOS 60 100 GaAsFET 60 2000 EPROM 100 100 JFET 140 7000 SAW 150 500 Op AMP 190 2500 CMOS 200 3000 Schottky Diodes 300 2500 Film Resistors 300 3000 This Film Resistors 300 7000 ECL 500 500 SCR 500 1000 Schottky TTL 500 2500 Potentially damaging electro static discharges can occur Any time a charged surface including the human body discharges to a device Even simple contact of a finger to the leads of a sensitive device or assembly can allow enough discharge to cause damage A similar discharge can occur from a charged conductive object such as a metallic tool or fixture When static charges accumulated on a sensitive device discharges from the device to another surface such as packaging materials work surfaces machine surfaces or other device In some case
188. d Circuit cece eeeeee aces eene 145 9 2 6 AC Power Config ratlon but acted tea edo Ee ep dei E ud Ped pi adero 146 9 2 6 1 AC configuration Internal Pump 146 9 3 Front Panel Interface dem e le te he be redeat DA 147 9 3 1 1 Calibrator Status 2 212 2 4 0 0 0 411 0 148 9 3 1 2 148 9 3 1 9 DISplay ke ee Ant eis tke ona ch 148 9 3 1 4 Keyboard Display Interface 149 9 4 Software Op ration dense entem qiu qe ic eei n DR et idee eus 150 g5 0 generator Operation eet rd RD dte eat en eee ge e era 151 9 5 1 Principle of Photolytic Generation nennen nnnm nennen 151 9 5 2 Generator Pneumatic 152 9 5 3 Og Generator Electronic 152 9 5 3 1 Generator Temperature 154 9 6 Photormieter Operation aged eee e et wc gen debi quee eS 155 9 6 1 Measurement Method ritu Leere tente Lee de teda hene ee b de He dee ao ad baee eaa re deu o 155 9
189. d recorded Calibration of the photometer is performed in software and does not require physical adjustments Two internal variables a slope and offset are used to adjust the calibration of the photometer The CPU uses these calibration values the UV absorption measurements made on the sample gas in the absorption tube along with data regarding the current temperature and pressure of the gas to calculate a final O3 concentration 9 6 1 MEASUREMENT METHOD 9 6 1 1 Calculating Concentration The basic principle by which photometer works is called Beer s Law also referred to as the Beer Lambert equation It defines the how light of a specific wavelength is absorbed by a particular gas molecule over a certain distance at a given temperature and pressure The mathematical relationship between these three parameters for gasses at Standard Temperature and Pressure STP is Equation 9 5 aLC 5 Where is the intensity of the light if there was no absorption is the intensity with absorption L is the absorption path or the distance the light travels as it is being absorbed is the concentration of the absorbing gas In the case of the Model 703E Ozone A is the absorption coefficient that tells how well O3 absorbs light at the specific wavelength of interest To solve this equation for C the concentration of the absorbing Gas in this case O3 the application of a little algebra is requir
190. d to verify that the DC voltages are correct per the values in the table below and an oscilloscope in AC mode with band limiting turned on can be used to evaluate if the supplies are producing excessive noise gt 100 mV p p Table 11 7 DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels CHECK RELAY PCA TEST POINTS wwe NAME 11 4 4 BUS Operation of the 2 bus can be verified by observing the behavior of D1 on the relay PCA amp D2 on the valve driver PCA in conjunction with the performance of the front panel display Assuming that the DC power supplies are operating properly the bus is operating properly if e f D10n the relay and 02 of the Valve Driver are flashing or Pressing a key on the front panel results in a change to the display There is a problem with the 2 bus if Both D1 on the relay and 02 of the Valve Driver are ON OFF Constantly and pressing a key on the front panel DOES NOT results in a change to the display If the keyboard interface is working but either of the two Watchdog LEDs is not flashing the problem may be a wiring issue between the board and the motherboard 11 4 5 KEYBOARD DISPLAY INTERFACE The front panel keyboard display and Keyboard Display Interface PCA can be verified by observing the operation of the display when power is applied to the instrument and when a key is pressed on the front panel Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that
191. d will output an analog VDC signal that rises and falls in relationship with the value of the parameter Pin outs for the analog output connector at the rear panel of the instrument are ANALOG OUT Fri Figure 6 2 M703E the TEST CHANNEL Connector 6 9 1 CONFIGURING THE TEST CHANNEL ANALOG OUTPUT 6 9 1 1 The Analog I O Configuration Submenu Table 6 7 lists the analog I O functions that are available in the M703E calibrator Table 6 7 DIAG Analog I O Functions SUB MENU FUNCTION AOUTS Shows the status of the analog output calibration YES NO and initiates a calibration CALIBRATED of all analog output channels CAL_OUT_1 NOT USED ON THE M703E CAL_OUT_2 TEST OUTPUT Configures the 11 analog output RANGE Selects the DCV full scale value of the output OVERRANGE Turns the 5 over range feature ON OFF for this output channel _ 5 Sets voltage offset not available when RANGE is to CURRent loop AUTO CAL Sets the channel for automatic or manual calibration CALIBRATED Performs the same calibration as AOUT CALIBRATED but on this one channel only AIN CALIBRATED Shows the calibration status YES NO and initiates a calibration of the analog to digital converter circuit on the motherboard Changes to RANGE or REC OFS require recalibration of this output To configure the analyzer s TEST CHANNEL set the electronic signal type of each channel a
192. de RS 232 An electronic communication protocol of a serial communications port RS 485 An electronic communication protocol of a serial communications port SLPM Acronym for standard liters per minute liters per minute of a gas at standard temperature and pressure TCP IP Acronym for Transfer Control Protocol Internet Protocol the standard communications protocol for Ethernet devices and the Internet VARS Acronym for variables the variables menu or settings of the system USER NOTES 28 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator Operator s Manual Optional Hardware and Software 5 OPTIONAL HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE This includes a brief description of the hardware and software options available for the M703E Photometric Calibrator For assistance with ordering these options please contact the Sales department of Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instruments at TOLL FREE 800 324 5190 FAX 858 657 9816 TEL 858 657 9800 E MAIL api sales teledyne com WEB SITE www teledyne api com 5 1 CARRYING STRAP HANDLE OPT 29 The chassis of the M703E calibrator allows to attach a strap handle for carrying the instrument Figure 5 The handle is located on the right side and pulls out to accommodate a hand for transport When pushed in the handle is nearly flush with the chassis only protruding out about 9 mm 3 8 Figure 5 1 M703E with Carrying Strap Handle and Rack Mount Brackets Install
193. default I O address 325 hex CONTROL IN 7 0 5 0 input asserted CONTROL IN 12 1 de asserted U17 J1008 control outputs pins 1 8 bits 0 7 write default I O address 321 hex CONTROL_OUT_8 de asseried U21 J1008 control outputs pins 9 12 bits 0 3 write default I O address 325 hex CONTROL_OUT_12 1 de asserted U7 J108 internal inputs pins 9 16 bits 0 7 read default I O address 322 hex ST_SYSTEM_OK 0 system OK 1 any alarm condition or in diagnostics mode ST_CAL_ACTIVE 2 0 executing sequence BN 1 not in diagnostic mode ST_TEMP_ALARM 4 0 any temperature alarm a 5 0 any pressure alarm BEP CNN ST PRESS ALARM 027 J1018 B status outputs pins 1 8 bits 0 7 write default I O address 324 hex Relay board digital output PCF8575 write default address 44 hex RELAY WATCHDOG Alternate between 0 and 1 at least every 5 seconds to keep relay board active ZERO AIR PUMP 1 0 pump on for zero air 1 off s 7 05745 Rev C 19 TELEDYNE API APPENDIX A 4 Signal I O Definitions Software Version 0 M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual M703E I O Signal List for Latest Revision Bit or Signal Name Description Channel Number PHOTO_REF_VALVE 0 photometer valve in reference position 1 measure position ZA_SHUTOFF_VALVE 7 0 open zero air shutoff valve 1 close O3 PUMP ON 0 pump on for photometer to measure 1 off 9 13 Sp
194. e 6 2 7 the TEST CHANNEL Connector sss 62 Figure 6 3 Setup for Calibrating the TEST 72 Figure 6 4 Set up for Using the M703E to Measure an External Source 77 Figure 6 5 LEADS Level Display 85 Figure 7 1 Default Pin Assignments for Back Panel COMM Port connectors RS 232 DCE 8 DTE 88 Figure 7 2 Default Pin Assignments for CPU COM Port connector 5 232 88 Figure 7 3 Location of JP2 on RS232 Multidrop option 62 101 Figure 7 4 RS232 Multidrop Host Calibrator Interconnect 102 Figure 7 5 CPU card Locations of RS 232 485 Switches Connectors and 5 103 Figure 7 6 Back Panel connector Pin Outs for COM2 in RS 485 mode 104 Figure 7 7 CPU connector Pin Outs for COM2 RS 485 mode sss eee 104 Figure 7 8 APICOM Remote Control Program 111 Figure 8 1 Set up for Verifying Optional Photometer Using Internal 114 Figure 8 2 Set up for Verifying Optional Photometer Using an External Generator 114 Figure 8 3 Pressure Calibration Monitor
195. e DIAG Menu see Section 11 1 3 This parameter will vary with ambient temperature but at 30 C 6 7 above room temperature the signal should be 1450 mV 11 4 11 2 Photometer Sample Chamber Temperature The temperature of the gas in the photometer sample chamber should read approximately 5 0 C higher than the box temperature 11 4 11 3 UV Lamp Temperature There are three possible causes for the UV Lamp temperature to have failed e The UV Lamp heater has failed Check the resistance between pins 5 and 6 on the six pin connector adjacent to the UV Lamp on the Optical Bench e t should be approximately 30 Ohms e Assuming that the 2 bus is working and that there is no other failure with the Relay board the FET Driver on the Relay Board may have failed e Using the PHOTO LAMP HEATER parameter under the SIGNAL I O function of the DIAG menu as described above turn on and off the UV Lamp Heater D15 on the relay board should illuminate as the heater is turned on Check the DC voltage present between pin 1 and 2 on J13 of the Relay Board If the FET Driver has failed there will be no change in the voltage across pins 1 and 2 e Ifthe FET Driver Q2 checks out OK the thermistor temperature sensor in the lamp assembly may have failed e Unplug the connector to the UV Lamp Heater Thermistor PCB and measure the resistance of the thermistor between pins 5 and 6 of the 6 pin connector e The resistance near the 58 C set
196. e called sequence is completed Up to 5 levels of nested sequences can be programmed Allows the sequence to activate the M703E s digital control outputs Similar to the SETCGOUTPUT CC OUPUT attribute but can be set and reset by individual steps NOTE It is generally a good idea to end each calibration sequence with an instruction to return the instrument to STANDBY mode 40 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator To create a sequence use the instructions in the following sections to name the sequence set it associated parameters and define the steps to be included 6 5 1 1 Activating a Sequence from the M703E Front Panel To activate an already programmed sequence from the front panel press Make sure that the M703E is in GEN STBY SEQ SETUP STANDBY mode STANDBY EXECUTE SEQUENCE A1 PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Use these keys to scroll though the list of available sequences M703E begins to execute sequence Progress of sequence Progress Field ACT 0 000LPM reported here in the format chosen during lt TST TST gt GEN STBY SEQ SETUP sequence entry gt M703E returns to remains in mode set by last sequence instruction 05744 Rev B 41 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 5 1 2 Naming a Sequence The first step of creating a calibration sequence is to assig
197. e configured to operate in a number of different modes listed in Table 7 1 As modes are selected the calibrator sums the Mode ID numbers and displays this combined number on the front panel display For example if quiet mode 01 computer mode 02 and Multi Drop enabled mode 32 are selected the Calibrator would display a combined MODE ID of 35 Table 7 1 COMM Port Communication Modes ID DESCRIPTION Quiet mode suppresses any feedback from the calibrator such as warning messages to the remote device and is typically used when the port is communicating with a QUIET 1 computer program where such intermittent messages might cause communication problems Such feedback is still available but a command must be issued to receive them COMPUTER 2 Computer mode inhibits echoing of typed characters and is used when the port is communicating with a computer operated control program SECURITY 4 When enabled the serial port requires a password before it will respond The only command that is active is the help screen CR When turned on this mode switches the COM port settings from E 7 1 2048 No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit to Even parity 7 data bits 1 stop bit RS 485 1024 Configures the CON2 Port for RS 485 communication RS 485 mode has precedence over multidrop mode if both are enabled MULTIDROP 32 Multidrop protocol allows a multi instrument configuration on a single communicat
198. e used as diagnostic tools See Section 6 9 for instruction on activating the analog output and selecting a function Table 11 3 Test Channel Outputs as Diagnostic Tools TEST FULL CAUSES OF EXTREMELY CHANNEL DESCRIPTION ZERO SCALE HIGH LOW READINGS NONE TEST CHANNEL IS TURNED OFF If the value displayed is 25000 mV The UV source has become brighter Adjust the UV Detector Gain potentiometer 03 PHOTO The raw output of the lt 100mvV Bad UV lamp or UV lamp power supply MEAS photometer during its 5000 mV lt 2000mV Lamp output has dropped adjust UV Preamp measure cycle Board or replace lamp If the value displayed is constantly changing Bad UV lamp Defective UV lamp power supply 2 The raw output of the Pe Bus 03 PHOTO photometer during its 5000 mv If the PHOTO REFERENCE value changes by more than reference cycle 10 between zero and span gas Defective leaking M R switching valve O3 GEN ofthe 5000 mV Possible causes of faults are the same as OUTPUT FLOW from 3 REF reference detector Table ie Output flow rate OUTPUT Possible causes of faults are the same as O3 GEN REFERENCE FLOW sd eai OLPM 6000 LPM WARNING from Table 11 1 SAMPLE The pressure of gas in the photometer 0 Hg 40 Hg In A Check for Gas Flow problems PRESSURE absorption tube SAMPLE The gas flow rate 3 FLOW through the photometer 0 cm min 1000 cc m Check for Gas Flow problems S
199. ection 6 5 2 5 To assign a CC OUTPUT pattern code to a particular sequence press Make sure that the 7 TEENS is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU SEQ MORE SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT EXIT his display only appears if there are no sequences currently programmed into the M703E OTHERWISE END OF SEQUENCES INS 1 SEQ NAME X STEPS INS DEL EDIT L SETUP 0 Deletes the sequence shown dits the sequence shown in the message field in the message field Sulis ewe Tonin een Continue pressing SET until existing sequences SETUP X X CC OUTPUT DISABLED SET EDIT EXIT SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X CC OUTPUT ENABLE OFF EXIT discards the OFF ENTER EXIT M new setting ENTR accepts the new setting Toggle this key turn the CC input ON OFF SETUP X X CC OUTPUT 0 00000000000 CH CH 0 EXIT discards the ENTER EXIT Moves the 2 new setting cursor one character left or right ENTR accepts the new setting 7 Toggle this key to turn the selected bit ON OFF 0 1 Each bit shown on the display represents one of the control output pins located on the back of the M703E see Figure 3 2 The left most bit is Bit 1 the next bit to the right bit 2 progressing rightward to bit 12 see Figure 3 10 for connector pin assignments P 48 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manu
200. ector Outlets Inlet for Inlet for External DCE DTE COMM Ports Control Inputs Serial No Tag Dry Air Zero Air Source Switch Figure 3 2 M703E Rear Panel Layout 10 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started Ethernet PCA Gas Inlets amp Outlets AC Power installed here Connector Optional Photometer A _ _ _ _ Pump Motherboard 4 Relay Generator amp Photometer Pressure Flow Sensor PCA Generator Generator Assembly Dry Air DC Power Photometer Pump Inlet supplies M R Valve Dry Air ump Outlet O Generator Lamp Driver Dry Air Pump Z Outlet to O3 Pressure Generator Check Regulator Valve Inlet 5 1 LPM Flow T 1 Control Assy Inlet to Regulator 3 L IL ITI tp tm tm Switch Front Panel 5LPM DFUFilters Flow Control Pressure Charcoal Assy Regulator Scrubber on Inlet Top Figure 3 3 M703E Internal Layout Top View 05744 Rev B 11 TELEDYNE API Getting Started M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual M703E Chassis PHOTOMETER BENCH DRY AIR IN GAS INPUT PRESSURE SENSOR PHOTOMETER INLET Pressure Regulator me zm PHOTOMETER o 5 PRESSURE SENSOR 5 GEN PHOTOMETER PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR PCA uaggnu s WOSYVHD
201. ectronic document is stored in Adobe Systems Inc Portable Document Format PDF and is viewable with Adobe Acrobat Reader software which can be downloaded for free at http www adobe com The electronic version of this manual can also be downloaded free at http www teledyne api com manuals Note that the online version is optimized for fast download and may not print with the same quality as the manual on CD 5 4 EXTENDED WARRANTY OPT 92 An extended two year warranty is available for the 7 calibrator This option must be specified upon ordering the calibrator 5 5 NIST TRACEABLE PRIMARY STANDARD CERTIFICATION The Model 703E can be used as a Primary Ozone Standard For this application the performance of the M703E Photometric Calibrator calibrated to Standard Reference Photometer SRP Calibrators ordered with this option are verified and validated in accordance with the procedures prescribed by the U S Environmental Protection Agency EPA under Title 40 of the Code of Federal Regulations Part 50 Appendix D 40 CFR Part 50 An NIST traceable Certificate of Calibration and accompanies the instrument USER NOTES 32 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator Operator s Manual OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS SECTION II OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 05744 Rev B 33 TELEDYNE API OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS M703E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator Operator s Manual USER NOTES 34
202. ects pump pin 3 to 110 115 VAC power line Connects pump pins 2 amp 4 to Neutral BROWN Connects pump pins 3 and 4 together Connects pump pin 1 to 220 240VAC power line 240 VAC BLUE Connects pump pins 3 and 4 together Connects pump pin 1 to 220 240VAC power line A jumper between pins 5 and 10 be present on the jumper plug assembly but is only functional on the M300E and has no function on the Models 7 M703E 220VAC 146 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 110 VAC 115 VAC 220 VAC 240 VAC a N Present on 50 Hz version of jumper set and only functional for M300E Figure 9 9 Pump AC Power Jumpers JP7 9 3 FRONT PANEL INTERFACE FASTENER MODE FIELD LOCKING SCREW MESSAGE FIELD FASTENER TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS A Tsaa Cima PHOTOMETRIC O4 CALIBRATOR MODEL 703E am LL HIE LL LLL KEY DEFINITION FIELD KEYBOARD OFF SWITCH STATUS LED s Figure 9 10 M703E Front Panel Layout The most commonly used method for communicating with the 7 Photometric Calibrator is via the instruments front panel which includes a set of three status LEDs a vacuum florescent display and a keyboard with 8 context sensitive keys 05744 Rev B 147 TELEDYNE API Theory of Operation M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 9 3 1 1 Calibrator Status LEDs Three LEDS are used to inform the user of the instrume
203. ed to rearrange the equation as follows Equation 9 6 1 1 aL Unfortunately both ambient temperature and pressure influence the density of the sample gas and therefore the number of ozone molecules present in the absorption tube thus changing the amount of light absorbed 05744 Rev B 155 TELEDYNE API Theory of Operation M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual In order to account for this effect the following addition is made to the equation Equation 9 7 1 29 92inHg x x x aL 273 K sample ambient temperature in degrees Kelvin P ambient pressure in inches of mercury Finally to convert the result into Parts per Billion PPB the following change is made Equation 9 8 9 ae lo 10 T 29 92inHg aL 273 K P In a nutshell the M703E photometer e Measures each of the above variables ambient temperature ambient gas pressure the intensity of the UV light beam with and without present e Inserts know values for the length of the absorption path and the absorption coefficient and e Calculates the concentration of present in the sample gas 9 6 1 2 The Measurement Reference Cycle In order to solve the Beer Lambert equation it is necessary to know the intensity of the light passing through the absorption path both when is present and when it is not A valve called the measure reference valve physically located on front left co
204. ell foam closed cell foam and adhesive tape e DO NOT use standard adhesive tape as a sealer Use ONLY anti ESD tape 1 Never the component or assembly without placing it in an anti ESD bag or bin 2 Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate e f you are at the instrument rack hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to ground point f you are at an anti ESD workbench lay the container down on the conductive work surface e either case wait several seconds Place the item in the container 4 Sealthe container If using a bag fold the end over and fastening it with anti ESD tape e Folding the open end over isolates the component s inside from the effects of static fields Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming a complete protective envelope around the device NOTE If you do not already have an adequate supply of anti ESD bags or containers available Teledyne Instruments Customer Service department will supply them see Section 11 9 for contact information Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and workstation USER NOTES 05744 Rev B 211 TELEDYNE API A Primer on Eletro Static Discharge M703E Calibrator Operators Manual USER NOTES 212 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual
205. en an M703E calibrator is equipped with the optional LEADS software is used in conjunction with data loggers located central data analysis facility is possible to collect and buffer data between the various calibrators analyzers and metrological equipment remotely located at an air monitoring station Because LEADS was originally developed for use with TNRCC using Dasibi 5008 calibrators the LEADS version of the M703E includes support for Dasibi Dot serial data commands and operational LEVEL s NOTE For more information on the LEADS system please go to http www meteostar com 6 12 2 DOT COMMANDS The Dasibi Dot commands form a text based ASCII data protocol that is transmitted between a control computer XENO data logger in this case and a calibrator or ambient gas analyzer over an RS 232 connection The details of the protocol are beyond the scope of this document but in its simplest form the protocol is based on a two or three digit integer preceded by a control A and a period and then followed by a and a two digit checksum EXAMPLE A xxx nn For further information on dot commands please contact T API customer service An M703E equipped with LEADS software can be simultaneously operated over the same COM port using standard Teledyne Instruments serial data commands and is compatible with APIcom versions 3 7 3 and later which include an added feature that allows a user to edit upload and downlo
206. ensor Failed relay controlling the bench heater Failed Relay PCA Bus malfunction Hot Lamp Values outside range indicate Contamination of the Zero Air or Span Gas supply PHOTO SLOPE Instrument is miss calibrated Blocked Gas Flow Faulty Sample Pressure Sensor or circuitry Bad incorrect Span Gas concentration Contamination of the Zero Air supply Time of Day clock is too fast or slow To adjust see Section 6 7 2 Battery in clock chip on CPU board may be dead 05744 Rev B 181 TELEDYNE API General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operators Manual 11 1 3 USING THE DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL I O FUNCTION The Signal I O parameters found under the DIAG Menu combined with a thorough understanding of the instruments Theory of Operation found in Chapter 9 are useful for troubleshooting in three ways The technician can directly control the signal level Analog and Digital Output signals The technician can view the raw unprocessed signal level of the calibrator s critical inputs and outputs Many of the components and functions that are normally under algorithmic control of the CPU can be manually exercised This allows the technician to observe systematically the effect of directly controlling these signals on the operation of the calibrator Figure 11 1 is an example of how to use the Signal I O menu to view the raw voltage of an input signal or to control the state of an output
207. erator s Manual Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports 7 2 REMOTE ACCESS BY MODEM The M703E can be connected to a modem for remote access This requires a cable between the calibrator s COM port and the modem typically a DB 9F to DB 25M cable available from Teledyne Instruments with part number WRO0000024 Once the cable has been connected check to make sure e The DTE DCE is in the DCE position e The M703E COM port is set for a baud rate that is compatible with the modem e The Modem is designed to operate with an 8 bit word length with one stop bit The MODEM ENABLE communication mode is turned ON Mode 64 see Section 7 1 4 Once this is completed the appropriate setup command line for your modem can be entered into the calibrator The default setting for this feature is AT YO amp 00 amp HO 810 50 2 amp B0 amp N6 0 E0 Q1 amp WO This string can be altered to match your modems initialization and can be to 100 characters long To change this setting press GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU 03 MORE COM1 MODE 0 lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT az SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM Continue pressing lt SET or SET gt until COM1 PORT YO amp DO 410 COMMUNICATIONS MENU SET SET EDIT EXIT iD COM1 COM2 COM1 PORT INIT AT YO amp DO amp H 810 EXIT discards the CH CH INS DEL A ENTR EXIT new setting The CH and CH keys move the cursor left and right a
208. ere are no sequences currently programmed into the M703E OTHERWISE END OF SEQUENCES INS 1 SEQ NAME X STEPS INS DEL EDIT n SETUP XX 0 SET gt EDIT EXIT Deletes the sequence shown Edits the sequence shown in the message field in the message field Seal bees 580 Continue pressing SET until existing sequences SETUP X X TIMER ENABLE DISABLED SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X TIMER ENABLE OFF EXIT discards the OFF ENTER EXIT new setting Toggle this key ENTR accepts the turn the CC input new setting 7 ON OFF SETUP X X TIMER ENABLE ENABLED SET SET EDIT EXIT 44 05744 Rev B M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator To specify a starting time for the sequence press Make sure that the M703E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT his display only appears if there are no sequences currently programmed into the M703E OTHERWISE END OF SEQUENCES INS 1 SEQ NAME X STEPS INS DEL EDIT ___ SETUP 0 SET gt EDIT Deletes the sequence shown Edits the sequence shown in the message field in the message field Sells laste GTI tedn eias Continue pressing SET until existing sequences SETUP TIMER ENABLE ENABLED SET SET EDIT SETUP X X TIMER START 01 JAN 06 00 00 SET SET EDIT EXIT TIMER START 01 JAN 06 00
209. erly seated 5 Check the connectors of the various internal wiring harnesses and pneumatic hoses to make sure they are firmly and properly seated 6 Verify that all of the optional hardware ordered with the unit has been installed These are checked on the paperwork accompanying the calibrator 05744 Rev B 9 TELEDYNE API Getting Started M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual VENTILATION CLEARANCE Whether the calibrator is set up on a bench or installed into an instrument rack be sure to leave sufficient ventilation clearance AREA MINIMUM REQUIRED CLEARANCE Back of the instrument 10 cm 4 inches Sides of the instrument 2 5 1 inch Above and below the instrument 2 5 1 inch Various rack mount kits are available for this calibrator See Chapter 5 of this manual for more information 3 1 1 MODEL 703E CALIBRATOR FASTENER MODE FIELD LOCKING SCREW MESSAGE FIELD FASTENER TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Advanced Instrumentation ARM Pt PHOTOMETRIC CALIBRATOR MODEL 703E oo m0 00 0 00 00 _ KEY DEFINITION FIELD KEYBOARD ON OFF SWITCH STATUS LED s Figure 3 1 M703E Front Panel Layout Outletto Photometer Generator Photometer Gas Status Outputs Control Outputs Analog Output Optional Ethernet Photometer O Inlet Exhaust Connectors Card EN 2 2 4 DN Terenaeu FAN AC Power Cal Gas Conn
210. es y s ASQNVLS suni eouenbes sy usv ALVYANAD peinoexe euin deis eui BulAejdsip se sseJ8oJd mous ejdsip 5 eui e dsip ay sun eouenbes eu sy suns eouenbes y sy LIX3 HIN3 154 42315 53315 3718VN3 i i sjndino eunsojo 12e3uoo indino 99 sejqesi Jo LNdNI 22 i ejnoexe 0 Q JO INNOD 1V3d3M 1040 00 Alpes eouenbes y ejnoexe JO lt 135 195 gt Jo 1si uBnouu eouenbes Meu e sjyesu SNI 085 135 lt NN amp W NIVIN 0 2 5 saa1 1 V XIGN3ddV IdV 3NAG3 TAL jenueyy 5 1012198 0 1012291122 3202 60 Nua 135 ANVONOO3S 3L VH3N3O9 S S uw S S Ajuo S FWYN LSOH v siy 10 eui eBueuo JOU op ejeis eui Jo ssejp1eDei S 1 HOd dO L 330 S dOHQ Ajuo ASYN L
211. es the beeper e Informs the CPU when the optional maintenance and second language switches have been opened or closed see Chapter 5 for information on these options 05744 Rev B 149 TELEDYNE API Theory of Operation M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual DISPLAY DATA DECODER This decoder translates the serial data sent by the CPU in TTY format into a bitmapped image that is sent over a parallel data bus to the display DISPLAY CONTROLLER This circuit manages the interactions between the display data decoder and the display itself It generates a clock pulse that keeps the two devices synchronized It can also in response to commands from the CPU turn off and or reset the display DISPLAY POWER WATCHDOG The M703E calibrator s display can begin to show garbled information or lock up if the DC voltage supplied to it falls too low even momentarily To alleviate this a brownout watchdog circuit monitors the level of the power supply and in the event that the voltage level falls below a certain level resets the display by turning it off then back on 9 4 SOFTWARE OPERATION The M703E calibrator s core module is a high performance 386 based microcomputer running a version of DOS On top of the DOS shell special software developed by Teledyne Instruments interprets user commands from various interfaces performs procedures and tasks stores data in the CPU s memory devices and calculates the concentrations in the sample
212. eter pump Disconnect the two fittings on the photometer pump and install a union fitting in place of the pump Pressurize the calibrator with the leak checker allowing enough time to pressurize the instrument fully 0 Check each fitting with soap bubble solution looking for bubbles 05744 Rev B 167 TELEDYNE API Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures M703E Calibrator Operators Manual Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution e Do not re apply vacuum as it will draw soap solution into the instrument and contaminate it e Do not exceed 15 psi pressure 11 Once the leak has been located and repaired the leak down rate should be 1 in Hg 0 4 psi in 5 minutes after the pressure is shut off M703E Chassis PHOTOMETER BENCH DRY AIR IN GAS INPUT PRESSURE SENSOR PHOTOMETER PRESSURE SENSOR Pressure Regulator HOSN3S MO14 O PHOTOMETER INLET GEN PHOTOMETER PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR PCA uagsnu s TWODYVHD Flow Control 800 cm min 2 8 oi a 5 22 22 E d 5 5 5 5 5 yo z9 8 ZERO IN 3 33 gt ERG 2 8 2 red orn es 3 EXHAUST o2 92 lt 3 6 zi 8 ES ZERO OUT 9 2 INTER
213. ev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator 6 12 5 PROGRAMMING NEW LEVELS To begin programming a new LEVEL find the LVL submenu by pressing Make sure that the M703E is in standby mode SEN STBY PRIMARY SETUP MENU LEVL SEQ MORE This display only appears if there are no LEVELs currently programmed into the 7 OTHERWISE END OF LEVELS INS LEVEL ID Gas Conc Status Block Set INS DEL EDIT ACTION TO PERFORM GENERATE Deletes the LEVEL shown Edits the LEVEL shown in in the message field the message field Scrolls back and forth between existing LEVELS PREV NEXT Use these keys to scroll though the available instructions GENERATE amp MANUAL 05744 Rev B 81 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 12 5 1 Creating a GENERATE LEVEL To create a LEVEL using the M703E s AUTO generation function press Starting at the CHOOSE ACTION Submenu CHOOSE ACTION Submenu ACTION TO PERFORM GENERATE PREV NEXT ENTR SETUP X X GENERATE ZERO ZEROENTR EXIT Toggle this key to scroll through the available gas types as programmed during initial setup SETUP X X GENERATE 0 0 PPB O3 0 0 0 0 PPB ENTR EXIT Toggle this key to pj to scroll through the available units of measure Toggle these keys to set the target concentration SETUP X X GENERATE 0 0 PPB O3
214. ference detectorreading PHOTOREF PHOTO REFERENCE 3000 0 Photometer detector reference reading MV PHOTOSLOPE PHOTO SLOPE 1 000 Photometer slope computed during zero span bench calibration PHOTOOFFSET PHOTO OFFSET 0 0 PPB Photometer offset computed during zero span bench calibration PHOTOSTABIL PHOTO STABIL 0 1 PPB Photometer concentration stability standard deviation of 25 bench concentration samples taken 10 seconds apart TESTCHAN TEST 2753 9 MV Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog output selected with 5 _ _10 variable CLOCKTIME TIME 14 48 01 Current instrument time of day clock The name is used to request a message via the RS 232 interface as in T Os photometer stability measurement option 05745 Rev C A 17 TELEDYNE API APPENDIX A 3 Warnings and Test Functions Software Version C 0 M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual USER NOTES A 18 05745 Rev C TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX A 4 Signal I O Definitions Software Version C 0 APPENDIX A 4 Signal I O Definitions Software Version C 0 Table 4 M703E Signal I O Definitions Software Version C 0 M703E I O Signal List for Latest Revision Signal Name Description U11 J1004 control inputs pins 1 6 bits 0 5 read default I O address 321 hex 1 0 5 0 input asserted CONTROL_IN_6 1 de asserted U14 J1006 control inputs pins 1 6 bits 0 5 read
215. g sample gas temperature Gas inlet and outlet mounting blocks that rout sample gas into and out of the photometer e The vacuum diode UV detector that converts UV light to a DC current e A preamplifier assembly which convert the Detector s current output into a DC Voltage then amplifies it to a level readable by the A to D converter circuitry of the instrument s motherboard UV Lamp Power Sample Gas UV Lamp Thermistor UV Detector Absorption Tube Transformer Thermistor UV Lamp Heater Behind Thermistor Power connector dm from 15 VDC power supply Sample Gas Outlet UV Detector Sample Gas Inlet UV Lamp Power T Preamp PCA Supply UV Lamp 200 30 kHz UV Lamp Heater Control PCA Figure 9 21 Photometer Layout Top Cover Removed 9 6 3 PHOTOMETER PNEUMATIC OPERATION The flow of gas through the photometer is created by a small internal pump that pulls air though the instrument There are several advantages to this pull through configuration Placing the pump down stream from the absorption tube avoids problems caused by the pumping process heating and compressing the sample In order to measure accurately the presences of low concentrations of in the sample air it is necessary to establish and maintain a relatively constant and stable volumetric flow of sample gas through the photometer The simplest way to accomplish this is by placing a flow control assembly containing a critical flow
216. ger the hole the more gas molecules moving at the speed of sound pass through the orifice 9 1 2 INTERNAL GAS PRESSURE SENSORS There are two pressure sensors in the M703E See Figure 3 3 for the location of the Pressure Flow PCA A 100 psig pressure sensor on this PCA is used to monitor the downstream regulator pressure This value is displayed on the front panel as a test measurement called REG PRESSURE A second pressure located on the rear PCA measures the pressure of gas in the photometer s absorption tube This sensor is a 0 15 psia absolute pressure range sensor This data is used by the CPU when calculating the Os concentration inside the absorption tube This value is displayed on the front panel as test measurement called PHOTO SPRESS Note that this value is converted to units of Inches of Mercury IN HG A when displayed on the front panel 136 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 2 ELECTRONIC OPERATION 9 2 1 OVERVIEW Analog Outputs TEST CHANNEL f Aout 4 StatusOutputs e 1 OUTPUT 1 8 3 ptiona Control Outputs Multidrop Aout 2 1 42 Card Aout 1 2 NT Control Inputs 1 12 Optional Analog Outputs Sv D A External Digital Ethernet Card
217. gt 79 vent W GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD FLOW TO ANALYZER 4 METER Figure 8 5 Output Flow Calibration Monitor Point SN 130 05744 TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual M703E Calibration and Verification 8 4 2 2 Performing an Output Gas Flow Calibration During the PHOTO FLOW calibration the M703E software automatically turns the DC pump downstream from the photometer OFF and the AC dry air pump ON To perform a PHOTO FLOW calibration press Make sure that the M703E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU An external flow O3 SEQ MORE meter is needed to perform this operation SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM DIAG ENTER PASSWORD ENTR Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD SIGNAL I O PREV NEXT Continue pressing NEXT until FLOW CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR WAITING FOR FLOW DIAG FCAL ACTUAL PHOTO FLOW 1 000 LPM DON NOT press the ENTR button at this point 1 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT WAITING FOR FLOW DIAG FCAL ACTUAL OUTPUT FLOW 1 000 LPM 1 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new Toggle these keys to setting match the actual flow as Doing so will cause the slope applied to the Output Flow reading be recalculated IL measured by the external flow meter ENTR accepts the new setting 7 05744 Rev B 131 TELEDYNE API M703E Calibration and Ver
218. his manual words printed in capital bold letters such as SETUP or ENTR represent messages as they appear on the calibrator s display This manual is organized in the following manner TABLE OF CONTENTS Outlines the contents of the manual in the order the information is presented This is a good overview of the topics covered in the manual There is also a list of appendices figures and tables In the electronic version of the manual clicking on any of these table entries automatically views that section SECTION I GENERAL INFORMATION INTRODUCTION A brief description of the M703E calibrator architecture as well as a description of the layout of the manual and what information is located in its various sections and chapters SPECIFICATIONS AND WARRANTY Teledyne Instruments warranty statement 05744 Rev B 3 TELEDYNE API Introduction M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual GETTING STARTED Instructions for setting up installing and running your calibrator for the first time GLOSSARY Answers to the most frequently asked questions about operating the calibrator and a glossary of acronyms and technical terms OPTIONAL HARDWARE amp SOFTWARE A description of optional equipment to add functionality to your calibrator SECTION OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS USING THE M703E CALIBRATOR Step by Step instructions for using the display keyboard to set up and operate the M703E calibrator REMOTE OPERATION OF THE M703E C
219. ial Ports doce ite roce eee 18 3 2 1 Connecting to a or the Internet ioi etel EERE ETE bote 18 3 2 8 Connecting to a Multidrop 18 3 3 Pnenuimatic CONNECHONS ertt e Pee RR EP n RR ee 19 Si BINA ER 19 Zero AIr IS sese erem t e tu a deett re rs oet etc 19 3 3 3 Output Manifold cts 9 ean OI teas e ORA aa i odd 20 3 3 EXhaust ober uer Pre I E a new Puts ee l 20 3 3 5 Measuring An External Ozone 20 3 4 Initial Operation i e ed decet e b vs ee 21 344 START UP aiite ive eset ee ee ne el ad 21 3 4 2 PET 22 3 4 3 Warning Messages iecit ete ecce uet vb reed cv det e oae oce e Medi eae 22 3 4 4 Functional Check ede bee bet eri ee tee eb age ee eheu sul a seb dete eei aenea 24 3 4 5 Operating Modes for the Generator emere nemen nennen 25 3 4 5 1 CNST CONSTANT thee ree ut eben ae a eae ie lane ye sleet teddies 25 34 5 2 REF REFERENCE e n ee a Stalag det eri tod ct er eed 25 34 5 37 BNCH BENCH tt t ede ote dete d tet endete Medeae as 25 3 4 6 Setting the Generator
220. ications between the keyboard the CPU and the front panel display Except for the Keyboard interrupt status bit all communication between the CPU and the keyboard display is handled by way of the instrument s l C buss The CPU controls the clock signal and determines when the various devices on the bus are allowed to talk or required to listen Data packets are labeled with addresses that identify for which device the information is intended KEYPAD DECODER Each key on the front panel communicates with a decoder IC via a separate analog line When a key is depressed the decoder chip notices the change of state of the associated signal latches and holds the state of all eight lines in effect creating an 8 bit data word alerts the key depress detect circuit a flip flop IC translates the 8 bit word into serial data and sends this to the interface chip KEY PRESS DETECT CIRCUIT This circuit flips the state of one of the inputs to the interface chip causing it to send an interrupt signal to the CPU INTERFACE CHIP e This IC performs several functions e Using a dedicated digital status bit it sends an interrupt signal alerting the CPU that new data from the keyboard is ready to send e Upon acknowledgement by the CPU that it has received the new keyboard data the 2 interface chip resets the key depress detect flip flop e response to commands from the CPU it turns the front panel status LEDs and off and activat
221. icient generators of static electric charges To prevent damage from ESD Teledyne Instruments ships all electronic components and assemblies in properly sealed ant ESD containers Static charges will build up on the outer surface of the anti ESD container during shipping as the packing materials vibrate and rub against each other To prevent these static charges from damaging the components or assemblies being shipped make sure that you Always unpack shipments from Teledyne Instruments Customer Service by 1 Opening the outer shipping box away from the anti ESD work area 2 Carry the still sealed ant ESD bag tube or bin to the anti ESD work area 3 Follow steps 6 and 7 of Section 12 4 2 3 above when opening the anti ESD container at the work station 4 Reserve the anti ESD container or bag to use when packing electronic components or assemblies to be returned to Teledyne Instruments 210 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual A Primer on Eletro Static Discharge 12 4 2 5 Packing Components for Return to Teledyne Instruments Customer Service Always pack electronic components and assemblies to be sent to Teledyne Instruments Customer Service in anti ESD bins tubes or bags WARNING DO NOT use pink poly bags e NEVER allow any standard plastic packaging materials to touch the electronic component assembly directly e This includes but is not limited to plastic bubble pack Styrofoam peanuts open c
222. ification M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual USER NOTES 132 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual TECHNICAL INFORMATION SECTION TECHNICAL INFORMATION 05744 Rev B 133 TELEDYNE API TECHNICAL INFORMATION M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual USER NOTES 134 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 THEORY OF OPERATION 9 1 PNEUMATIC OPERATION 9 1 1 GAS FLOW CONTROL Gas flow rates are set by various flow control assemblies located in the gas stream s 9 1 1 1 Flow Control Assemblies M703E Chassis il PHOTOMETER BENCH DRY AIR IN uagsnu s WODYVHD gt QD Pressure Regulator ae Y 77 800 cm min 9 85 EI 9I PHOTOMETER 59 e 4 29 woo 25 Ss EXHAUST eee 8 1 red PHOTOMETER 55 ZERO OUT GAS INPUT PRESSURE SENSOR M PHOTOMETER 7 PRESSURE SENSOR ww GEN PHOTOMETER PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR PCA e e Flow Control REFMEAS Y pur Valve 85 yel On Back Panel pur INLET r WV INTERNAL a ANALYZER PHOTOMETER OUTLET ZERO
223. ing the strap handle prevents the use of the rack mount slides although the rack mount brackets Option 21 can still be used CAUTION A FULLY LOADED M703E WITH BOTH THE O GENERATOR AND PHOTOMETER OPTIONS INSTALLED WEIGHS ABOUT 16 3 KG 36 POUNDS TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY WE RECOMMEND TWO PERSONS LIFT AND CARRY THE CALIBRATOR MAKE SURE TO DISCONNECT ALL CABLES AND TUBING FROM THE CALIBRATOR BEFORE CARRYING IT 05744 Rev B 29 TELEDYNE API Optional Hardware and Software M703E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator Operator s Manual 5 2 COMMUNICATION OPTIONS 5 2 1 RS232 MODEM CABLES OPTS 60 AND 60A The analyzer can have come standard with a shielded straight through DB 9F to DB 9F cable of about 1 8 m length which should fit most computers of recent build This cable can be ordered as Option 60 Option 60A consists of a shielded straight through serial cable of about 1 8 m length to connect the calibrator s port to a computer a code activated switch or any other communications device that is equipped with a DB 25 female connector The cable is terminated with one DB 9 female connector and one DB 25 male connector The DB 9 connector fits the calibrator s RS 232 port 5 2 2 ETHERNET CABLE OPT 60B Option 60B consists of a 7 foot long CAT 5 network cable terminated at both ends with standard RJ 45 connectors This cable is used to connect the 7 to any standard ETHERNET socket 5 2 3 RS
224. ion modes for the COM2 port The baud rate is also automatically set at 115 200 kBaud 7 5 2 CONFIGURING THE ETHERNET INTERFACE OPTION USING DHCP The Ethernet option for you M703E uses Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP to configure its interface with your LAN automatically This requires your network servers also be running DHCP The calibrator will do this the first time you turn the instrument on after it has been physically connected to your network Once the instrument is connected and turned on it will appear as an active device on your network without any extra set up steps or lengthy procedures NOTE It is a good idea to check the INET settings the first time you power up your calibrator after it has been physically connected to the LAN Internet to make sure that the DHCP has successfully downloaded the appropriate information from you network server s The Ethernet configuration properties are viewable via the calibrator s front panel 05744 Rev B 105 TELEDYNE API Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Table 7 5 LAN Internet Configuration Properties PROPERTY DEFAULT STATE DESCRIPTION This displays whether the DHCP is turned ON or OFF DHCP STATUS On Editable EDIT key INSTRUMENT Configured by disabled when This string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each e g IP ADDRESS DHCP 192 168 76 55 is the address of the calibrat
225. ions PROTOCOL channel Multidrop requires the use of instrument IDs ENABLE 64 Enables to send a modem initialization string at power up Asserts certain lines in the MODEM RS 232 port to enable the modem to communicate ERROR 128 Fixes certain types of parity errors at certain Hessen protocol installations CHECKING XON XOFF 256 Disables XON XOFF data flow control also known as software handshaking HANDSHAKE Enables CTS RTS style hardwired transmission handshaking This style of data HARDWARE VIA E 8 transmission handshaking is commonly used with modems terminal emulation protocols as well as by Teledyne Instrument s APICOM software HARDWARE 512 Disables the HARDWARE FIFO First In First Out When FIFO is enabled it FIFO improves data transfer rate for that COM port COMMAND 4096 Enables a command prompt when in terminal mode PROMPT 1 Modes are listed in the order in which they appear in the SETUP gt MORE gt COMM gt CON 1 OR 2 gt MODE menu The default setting for this feature is ON Do not disable unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel Note Communication Modes for each COM port must be configured independently 05744 Rev B 91 TELEDYNE API Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Press the following keys to select communication modes for a one of the COMM Ports such as the following examp
226. ircuitry on the relay PCA watches the status of D1 Should this LED ever stay ON or OFF for 30 seconds indicating that the CPU or 2 bus has stopped functioning this Watchdog Circuit automatically shuts all valves and turns off all heaters and lamps 142 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 2 4 MOTHERBOARD This is the largest electronic assembly in the calibrator and is mounted to the rear panel as the base for the CPU board and all I O connectors This printed circuit assembly provides a multitude of functions including A D conversion digital input output PC 104 to lC translation temperature sensor signal processing and is a pass through for the RS 232 and RS 485 signals 9 2 4 1 A to D Conversion Analog signals such as the voltages received from the calibrator s various sensors are converted into digital signals that the CPU can understand and manipulate by the analog to digital converter A D Under the control of the CPU this functional block selects a particular signal input and then coverts the selected voltage into a digital word The A D consists of a voltage to frequency V F converter a programmable logic device PLD three multiplexers several amplifiers and some other associated devices The V F converter produces a frequency proportional to its input voltage The PLD counts the output of the V F converter during a specified time period and sends the result of tha
227. ith IEC 61010 1 90 A1 92 A2 95 Test status Pending 6 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Specifications Approvals and Warranty 2 3 WARRANTY WARRANTY POLICY 02024D Prior to shipment equipment is thoroughly inspected and tested Should equipment failure occur T API assures its customers that prompt service and support will be available COVERAGE After the warranty period and throughout the equipment lifetime T API stands ready to provide on site or in plant service at reasonable rates similar to those of other manufacturers in the industry All maintenance and the first level of field troubleshooting is to be performed by the customer NON API MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT Equipment provided but not manufactured by T API is warranted and will be repaired to the extent and according to the current terms and conditions of the respective equipment manufacturers warranty GENERAL During the warranty period T API warrants each Product manufactured by T API to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service Expendable parts are excluded If a Product fails to conform to its specifications within the warranty period API shall correct such defect by in API s discretion repairing or replacing such defective Product or refunding the purchase price of such Product The warranties set forth in this section shall be of no force or effect with respect to any P
228. ive failure In the unlikely event that the flash chip should fail the calibrator will continue to operate with just the DOC However all configuration information will be lost requiring the unit to be recalibrated 05744 Rev B 139 TELEDYNE API Theory of Operation M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 9 2 3 RELAY PCA The relay board is one of the central switching and power distribution units of the calibrator It contains power relays valve drivers and status LEDs for all heated zones and valves as well as thermocouple amplifiers power distribution connectors and the two switching power supplies of the calibrator The relay board communicates with the motherboard over the 1 bus Its status indicators and components can be used for troubleshooting power problems and valve or heater functionality Generally the relay PCA is located in the right rear quadrant of the calibrator and is mounted vertically on the backside of the same bracket as the instrument s DC power supplies however the exact location of the relay PCA may differ from model to model see Figure 3 3 Status LED s Watchdog DC Power Supply D2 through D16 Status LED D1 Test Points Connector Power Connections for DC Heaters DC Valve amp Photometer Pump Control AC Pump Configuration Plug DC Valve Control Drivers AC Power OUT to D Air Pump DC Valve amp Photometer Pump Control Connector AC Power I
229. larly if you have more than one M703E calibrator on your network press GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP X X ENTER PASSWORD 818 03 MORE 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU SETUP X X DHCP ON COMM lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID ADDR INET EXIT Continue pressing SET until SETUP X X HOSTNAME TMS 9000 SET SET EDIT FUNCTION SETUP X X HOSTNAME TMS 9000 Moves the cursor one character to the left CH CH INS DEL 2 ENTR EXIT Moves the cursor one character to the right Inserts a character before the cursor location Deletes a character at the cursor location Press this key to cycle through the range of numerals and characters available for Use these key to edit the HOSTNAME insertion 0 9 A Z space 6 96 amp _ 30 lt gt 1 7 Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu SETUP X X HOSTNAME TMS 9K STACK 2 Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu Some keys only appear as needed SETUP X X INITIALIZING INET 0 INITIALIZATION process proceeds automatically CH CH INS DEL 7 ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts the new setting EXIT ignores the new setting p INITIALIZATION SUCCEEDED INITIALIZATION FAILED SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID ADDR INET EXIT Contact your IT Network Administrator 110 05744 RevB TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator O
230. lashes when the CPU is running the main program loop After power up approximately 30 60 seconds DS5 should flash on and off If characters are written to the front panel display but DS5 does not flash then the program files have become corrupted contact customer service because it may be possible to recover operation of the calibrator If after 30 60 seconds neither DS5 is flashing and no characters have been written to the front panel display then the CPU is bad and must be replaced CPU Status LED Figure 11 2 CPU Status Indicator 11 3 2 RELAY PCA STATUS LEDS There are seven LEDs located on the Relay PCA Some are not used on this model 11 3 2 1 Bus Watchdog Status LEDs The most important is D1 see which indicates the health of the I C bus Table 11 4 Relay PCA Watchdog LED Failure Indications LED Function Fault Status Indicated Failure s D1 bus Health Continuously ON Failed Halted CPU Red Watchdog Circuit or Continuously OFF Faulty Mother Board Keyboard or Relay PCA Faulty Connectors Wiring between Mother Board Keyboard or Relay PCA Failed Faulty 5 VDC Power Supply PS1 If D1 is blinking then the other LEDs can be used in conjunction with DIAG Menu Signal to identify hardware failures of the relays and switches on the Relay 184 05744 Rev B M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE API General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calib
231. le where RS 485 mode is enabled GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID COM2 o Combined Mode ID COM1 MODE 0 displayed here lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT COM1 QUIET MODE OFF PREV NEXT OFF EXIT Use the PREV and NEXT Keys to between the available modes Continue pressing NEXT until COM1 RS 485 MODE OFF Activate Deactivate PREV NEXT OFF EXIT the Selected mode by toggling the ON OFF key COM1 RS 485 MODE ON PREV NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new settin E m 5 ENTR accepts the new setting JF PREV and NEXT Keys to continue selecting other COM modes you want to enable or disable 92 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports 7 1 5 COMM PORT TESTING The serial ports can be tested for correct connection and output in the COM menu This test sends a string of 256 w characters to the selected COM port While the test is running the red LED on the rear panel of the calibrator should flicker To initiate the test press the following key sequence GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID COM1COMV2 COM1 0 SET SET EDIT Continue pressing SET or SET until COM1 TEST PORT SET SET TEST Test Runs TRANSMITTING
232. lean or replace as necessary as described in Section 10 2 Check for operation of the A D circuitry on the motherboard See Section 11 4 8 1 Confirm the Sample Temperature Sample Pressure and Sample Flow readings are correct Check and adjust as required The photometer needs 800 cc min of gas flow Make sure that this is accounted for when calculating total required output flow for the calibrator see Section 3 4 7 198 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator 11 5 2 CHECKING MEASURE REFERENCE VALVE To check the function of the photometer s measure reference valve 1 2 Set the calibrator s front panel display to show the PHOTO REFERENCE test function see Section 6 1 Follow the instruction in Sections 8 1 1 and 8 1 3 1 for performing a zero point calibration of the photometer e Press XZRO and allow the calibrator to stabilize Before completing the calibration by pressing the ZERO key note of the displayed value Press the final Zero key then press NO when asked ARE YOU SURE Follow the instruction in Section 8 1 3 2 for performing a span point calibration of the photometer e Press XSPN and allow the calibrator to stabilize Before completing the calibration by pressing the SPAN key note of the displayed value of PHOTO REF Ifthe REF value has decreased by more than 2 mV from its value with Ze
233. llow any charges you are carrying to bleed away through the ground connection of the workstation and prevent discharges due to field effects and induction from occurring Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away Only open any anti ESD storage bins or bags containing sensitive devices or assemblies after you have plugged your wrist strap into the workstation Lay the bag or bin on the workbench surface Before opening the container wait several seconds for any static charges on the outside surface of the container to be bled away by the workstation s grounded protective mat Do not pick up tools that may be carrying static charges while also touching or holding an ESD Sensitive Device Only lay tools or ESD sensitive devices and assemblies on the conductive surface of your workstation Never lay them down on any non ESD preventative surface Place any static sensitive devices or assemblies in anti static storage bags or bins and close the bag or bin before unplugging your wrist strap Disconnecting your wrist strap is always the last action taken before leaving the workbench 05744 Rev B 209 TELEDYNE API A Primer on Eletro Static Discharge M703E Calibrator Operators Manual 12 4 2 3 Transferring Components from Rack to Bench and Back When transferring a sensitive device from an installed Teledyne Instruments analyzer to an Anti ESD workbench or back 1 Follow the instructions listed ab
234. long the text string ENTR accepts the new setting The INS and CH key The DEL Toggle this key to cycle through the inserts a new deletes available character set character before the character at Alpha A Z Upper and Lower cursor position ihe cursor Case position 7 e Special Characters space amp _ lt gt Numerals 0 9 05744 Rev B 99 TELEDYNE API Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual To Initialize the modem press GEN STBY SEQ PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID COM2 COM1 0 lt SET SET gt EDIT Continue pressing SET or SET until COM1 INITIALIZE MODEM lt SET SET gt INIT INITIALIZING MODE Test Runs Automatically MODEM INITIALIZED PREV NEXT OFF If there is a problem initializing the modem the message MODEM NOT INITIALIZED will appear 100 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports 7 3 MULTIDROP RS 232 SET UP The RS 232 multidrop consists of a printed circuit assembly that plugs onto the CN3 CN4 and CN5 connectors of the CPU card and the cabling to connect it to the calibrator s motherboard This PCA includes all circuitry required to enable your calibrator for multidrop operation It converts the instrument s port to multidr
235. ly during calibrator start up and sets the analog outputs external digital I O ports and circuitry to specific values until the CPU boots and the instrument software can establish control 144 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 2 5 POWER SUPPLY AND CIRCUIT BREAKER The M703E calibrator operates in two main AC power ranges 100 120 VAC and 220 240 VAC both 10 between 47 and 63 Hz A 5 ampere circuit breaker is built into the ON OFF switch In case of a wiring fault or incorrect supply power the circuit breaker will automatically turn off the calibrator NOTE The M703E calibrator is equipped with a universal power supply that allows it to accept any AC power configuration within the limits specified in Table 2 2 CAUTION Should the power circuit breaker trip correct the condition causing this situation before turning the calibrator back on KEY Sensor Control ANALOG SENSORS amp I O Logic ACPOWER jm e Os Generator LOGIC DEVICES DCPOWER Et otometer re Amplifiers Detector amp Amplifiers e g CPU bus Keyboard Display MotherBoard etc POWER TEMPERATURE FER n fe SENSORS RELAY PCA Photometer UV Lamp P S Solenoid Drivers 12 VDC O Generator UV Lamp Xfromer O Generator UV DRY AIR ESSI
236. mall amount of as a byproduct which also may be undesirable in a calibration application The UV light method is most feasible in calibration application where production of low accurate concentrations of ozone desired This method mimics the radiation method that occurs naturally from the sun in the upper atmosphere producing the ozone layer An ultra violet lamp inside the generator emits a precise wavelength of UV Light 185 nm Ambient air is passed over an ultraviolet lamp which splits some of the molecular oxygen O5 in the gas into individual oxygen atoms which attach to other existing oxygen molecules O forming ozone Inlet from Diluent Source Valve Reference Detector To Photometer Cal Gas and Vent Outlets Control Assembly Figure 9 13 Generator Internal Pneumatics 05744 Rev B 151 TELEDYNE API Theory of Operation M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 9 5 2 GENERATOR PNEUMATIC OPERATION The rate of flow through the generator is controlled by a flow control assembly located on the Regulator Sub Assembly in the front of the M703E O Generator O Generator Gas Inlet Heater Control PCA Outlet to Photometer and Outlet Internal Vent Measure Reference a Valve for Photometer Bench Figure 9 14 Generator Valve and Gas Fixture Locations 9 5 3 O GENERATOR ELECTRONIC OPERATION Electronically the generator and its s
237. mately 1 2V from its collector to emitter The status outputs are accessed via a 12 pin connector on the calibrator s rear panel labeled STATUS The function of each pin is defined in Table 3 1 STATUS SYSTEMOK POWER CAL DIAG p TEMP ALARM a PRESS ALARM Unassigned Unassigned 5 VDC CALIBRATOR EMITTER BUSS INRTERNAL GROUND Figure 3 6 Status Output Connector The pin assignments for the Status Outputs are Table 3 1 Status Output Pin Assignments OUTPUT STATUS Unassigned 2 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 Unsimd 7 71 Emitter BUSS The emitters of the transistors on pins 1 to 8 are bussed together Digital Ground The ground level from the calibrator s internal DC power supplies Emitter BUSS The emitters of the transistors on pins 9 to 16 are bussed together DC POWER _ 5 VDC L 5 6 PRESS ALARM 788 BEN SEN 14 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started 3 2 4 CONNECTING THE CONTROL INPUTS The calibrator is equipped with 12 digital control inputs that can be used to Initiate various user programmable calibration sequences see Section 6 5 1 5 for instructions on assigning the control inputs to specific calibration sequences Access to these inputs is via 2 separate 10 pin connectors labeled CONTROL IN that are located on the calibr
238. may have additional arguments that define how the command is to be executed Press lt CR gt or refer to Appendix A 6 for a list of available command designators lt CR gt is a carriage return All commands must be terminated by a carriage return usually achieved by pressing the ENTER key on a computer Table 7 3 Teledyne Instruments Serial Command Types COMMAND COMMAND TYPE Calibration Diagnostic Logon Test measurement Variable lt Warning 7 1 7 3 Data Types Data types consist of integers hexadecimal integers floating point numbers Boolean expressions and text strings e Integer data are used to indicate integral quantities such as a number of records a filter length etc They consist of an optional plus or minus sign followed by one or more digits For example 7 12 123 are all valid integers e Hexadecimal integer data are used for the same purposes as integers They consist of the two characters Ox followed by one or more hexadecimal digits 0 9 A F a f which is the C programming language convention No plus or minus sign is permitted For example 0x1 0x12 0x1234abcd are all valid hexadecimal integers 96 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports e Floating point numbers are used to specify continuously variable values such as temperature set points time interv
239. me value warn low warn high Modify variable V ID name value Modify enumerated variable CONFIG Print instrument configuration MAINT ON OFF Enter exit maintenance mode MODE Print current instrument mode The command syntax follows the command type separated by a space character Strings in brackets are optional designators The following key assignments also apply Table A 6 Terminal Key Assignments Software Version C 0 TERMINAL KEY ASSIGNMENTS ESC Abort line CR ENTER Ctrl C Switch to computer mode LF line feed Execute command Ctrl T Switch to terminal mode Execute command A 22 05745 Rev C TELEDYNE API Model 703E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX B Spare Parts List APPENDIX B Spare Parts List NOTE Use of replacement parts other than those supplied by API may result in non compliance with European standard EN 61010 1 e 05834 LIST SPARE PARTS M703E e 05863 LIST RECOMMENDED SPARES STOCKING LEVELS M703E 05746 Rev B B 1 TELEDYNE API APPENDIX B Spare Parts List Model 703E Calibrator Operator s Manual THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK B 2 05746 Rev B Spare Parts List M703E 006120100 7 55 OZONE GEN LAMP BIR 5 PCA PRESS SENSORS 2X 700E PHOTO OPT 052400000 _______ 55 BENCH UV LAMP BIR CR 05834J M703E Spare Parts List DCN 5480 Page 1 of 2 07 15 09 Spare Parts List M703E QUARTZ DISC
240. mmended corrective action It should be noted that more than two or three warning messages occurring at the same time is often an indication that some fundamental sub system power supply relay PCA motherboard has failed rather than an indication of the specific failures referenced by the warnings In this case it is recommended that proper operation of power supplies See Section 11 4 3 the relay PCA See Section 11 4 6 and the motherboard See Section11 4 8 be confirmed before addressing the specific warning messages The M703E will alert the user that a Warning Message is active by displaying the keypad label MSG on the Front Panel In this case the Front panel display will look something like the following STANDBY LAMP DRIVER WARNING TEST GEN STBY MSG CLR SETUP The calibrator will also alert the user via the Serial I O COM port s and cause the FAULT LED on the front panel to blink To view or clear the various warning messages press SYSTEM RESET Suppresses the pp GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP warning messages gt SYSTEM RESET GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP MSG returns the active warnings to the message field CLR SETUP Press CLR to clear the current message If more than one warning is active the next message will take SYSTEM ANALOG CAL WARNING its place TEST CLR SETUP Once the last warning has been cleared the MESSAGE FIELD will return to displaying NOTE If a warning message persists after
241. move JP2 pins 21 lt 22 on the multidrop PCA on the instrument that was previously the last instrument in the chain 9 Close the instrument 05744 Rev B 101 TELEDYNE API Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 10 Using straight through DB9 male gt DB9 Female cables interconnect the host and the calibrators as shown in Figure 6 14 NOTE Teledyne Instruments recommends setting up the first link between the Host and the first instrument and testing it before setting up the rest of the chain KEY Ky Female DB9 DB9 Host RS 232 port CALIBRATOR CALIBRATOR TAPI Analyzer Last INSTRUMENT COM2 COM2 COM2 COM2 Make Sure Jumper between JP2 pins 21 lt gt 22 is installed Figure 7 4 RS232 Multidrop PCA Host Calibrator Interconnect Diagram 102 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports 7 4 RS 485 CONFIGURATION OF COM2 As delivered from the factory 2 is configured RS 232 communications This port can be re configured for operation as a non isolated half duplex RS 485 port capable of supporting up to 32 instruments with a maximum distance between the host and the furthest instrument being 4000 feet If you require full duplex or isolated operation please contact Teledyne Instruments Customer Service reconfigure COM2 as an RS 285 p
242. mputer running a version of the DOS operating system Its operation and assembly conform to the PC 104 specification version 2 3 for embedded PC and PC AT applications It has 2 MB of DRAM memory on board and operates at 40 MHz clock rate over an internal 32 bit data and address bus Chip to chip data handling is performed by two 4 channel direct memory access DMA devices over data busses of either 8 bit or 16 bit bandwidth The CPU supports both RS 232 and RS 485 serial protocols Figure 9 3 shows the CPU board e The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in a variety of ways Through the calibrator s keyboard and vacuum fluorescence display over a clocked digital serial I O bus using the protocol read square C bus RS 232 and or RS 485 serial ports one of which can be connected to an Ethernet converter Various analog voltage and current outputs e Several digital channels COM2 RS 485 COM port 2 connector connector configuration RS 232 or Ethernet COM1 connector jumper RS 232 Realtime a 2 clock chip 5 EEPROM memory t tle mE Drive B e x 15 UA Power connector BIOS chip unused E External parallel port unused Disk on chip with Model External Floppy firmware revision Disk Drive unused and date SW1 COM port PC 104 configuration switch Bus connector Memory expansion slot 386 External keyboard and External IDE disk proces
243. n ita name The name can be up to 10 characters and can be comprised of any alpha character A to 2 and numeral 0 to 9 or the underscore character To assign a name to a sequence press Make sure that the M703E E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ SETUP gt PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ MORE SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT EXIT his display only appears if there are no sequences current programmed into the 7 OTHERWISE END OF SEQUENCES INS 1 SEQ NAME X STEPS INS DEL EDIT SETUP 0 SET EDIT EXIT Deletes the sequence shown Edits the sequence shown in the message field in the message field Scrolls back and forth between SETUP NAME 0 existing sequences EXIT discards the Moves the CH CH INS DEL 0 ENTER EXIT new NAME cursor one character left or right ENTR accepts the new NAME I7 Inserts a new a character at the Deletes a Toggle this key to cycle cursor location character at the through the range of cursor location numerals and available characters 2 0 9 amp _ 42 05744 TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator 6 5 1 3 Setting the Repeat Count for a Sequence The sequence can be set to repeat a certain number of times from 1 to 100 It can also be set to repeat indefinitely by inputting a zero 0 into the REPEAT COUNTE
244. n operations such as programming the concentration of source gases setting up automatic calibration sequences and configuring the analog digital inputs and outputs The SET UP mode is also used for accessing various diagnostic tests and functions during troubleshooting Mode Field STANDBY ACT STANDBY lt TST TST gt GEN STBY SEQ ee wa GENERATE Key STANDBY Key Figure 6 1 Front Panel Display The mode field of the front panel display indicates to the user which operating mode the unit is currently running Besides STANDBY and SETUP other modes the calibrator can be operated in are Table 6 2 Calibrator Operating Modes One of the calibrator s diagnostic modes is being utilized When those diagnostic functions that have the greatest potential to conflict with generating concentrations are active the instrument is automatically placed into standby mode GENERATE In this mode the instrument is engaged in producing calibration gas SETUP SETUP mode is being used to configure the calibrator STANDBY The calibrator is not actively generating gas 3 The revision of the Teledyne Instruments software installed in this calibrator will be displayed following the word SETUP E g SETUP B 4 05744 Rev B 37 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator 6 3 STANDBY MODE When the M703E Photometric Calibrator is in standby mode it is at rest
245. n or replace as necessary as described in Section 10 2 Check for operation of the A D circuitry on the motherboard See Section 11 4 8 1 Confirm the Sample Temperature Sample Pressure and Sample Flow readings are correct Check and adjust as required 11 5 1 3 Slow Response to Changes in Concentration Check for dirty absorption cell and clean or replace as necessary as described in Section 10 2 Check for pneumatic leaks as described in Section 10 2 Check for improper materials in the inlet manifold The photometer needs 800 cc min of gas flow Make sure that this is accounted for when calculating total required output flow for the calibrator see Section 3 4 7 11 5 1 4 The Analog Output Signal Level Does Not Agree With Front Panel Readings Confirm that the recorder offset see Section 6 9 1 5 is set to zero Perform an AIO calibration see Section 6 9 2 and photometer dark calibration see Section 8 1 4 11 5 1 5 Cannot Zero Check for leaks in the pneumatic system as described in Section 10 2 Confirm that the Zero gas is free of Ozone The photometer needs 800 of gas flow Make sure that this is accounted for when calculating total required output flow for the calibrator see Section 3 4 7 11 5 1 6 Cannot Span Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 10 2 Check for proper operation of the meas ref switching valve as described in Section11 5 2 Check for dirty absorption cell and c
246. ncontrolled B Date 16 May 2007 Sheet2 of 3 File N PCBMGR 04522cc source 045222tdiwn By 1 3 4 5 6 15V KCOMPA R23 C7 6 81K 15V TCI JCOMPA C12 0 1 0 01 lt TC1_GND 283 219 oo R21 THERMOCOUPLE CONNECTOR 3M U7A 1 OMEGA F4 J17 115 1 8 FUSE 1 13 2 OO T 2 m GNDTCA R25 R7 3 14K 20K J15A 1 8 AMP FUSE MICROFIT 4 P TCI JGAINA TCL JGAINB THERMOCOUPLE CONNECTOR R17 HAMITHERM 5K TCI SMVA TCI 5 1 JGAINA B 5 TCI 5 2 MICROFIT 20 R9 TC1 JCOMPA TCI KCOMPA 12 10K TCI GNDTCA 5 TC PROGRAMMING SOCKET TC2 JGAINA 6 TC2 5MVA T TC2 JCOMPA 8 LT1025 9 10 11 GROUNDED THERMOCOUPLES ARE EXPECTED BY DEFAULT 12 No extra connections are necessary for grounded thermocouples 13 FOR UNGROUNDED THERMOCOUPLES 15V 14 short TCX GNDTCA to TCX GNDTCB 15 FOR K THERMOCOUPLE 16 1 Install CN0000156 for thermocouple connector ic 2 Short only TCX_KCOMPA to KCOMPB on TC Programming Plug 18 4 Leave TCX_JCOMPX pins of the plug unconnected E R20 TC2 KCOMPA T THERMOCOUPLE CONNECTOR 3M is TEOR VIHERMOCOUPLE OMEGA F6 TC2 JCOMPA 20 1 Install CN0000155 for thermocouple connector J16 1 8 AMP FUSE 2 Short JCOMPA to TCXJCOMPB on T
247. nd calibrate the outputs This consists of 10 Choosing a TEST CHANNEL function to be output on the channel 11 Selecting a signal level that matches the input requirements of the recording device attached to the channel 12 Determining if the over range feature is needed and turn it on or off accordingly 13 Adding a bipolar recorder offset to the signal if required Section6 9 1 5 14 Calibrating the output channel This can be done automatically or manually for each channel see Sections 6 9 2 62 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator To access the analog I O configuration sub menu press Make sure that GEN STBY SEQ the M703E is in standby mode PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG SETUP X X ENTER PASSWORD 818 ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD SIGNAL I O ENTR Continue pressing NEXT until AIO Configuration Submenu DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR DIAG AIO A OUTS CALIBRATED NO lt SET SET gt CAL DIAG AIO CONC OUT 1 5V OVR NOCAL SET SET EDIT EXIT Not used in the M703E DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 5V OVR NOCAL SET SET EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT 5V OVR NOCAL SET SET EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED NO SET SET CAL 05744 Rev B 63 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s
248. nents of the M703E e g flow data from the MFC s concentration from the optional photometer Analog signals are converted into digital data by a unipolar analog to digital converter located on the motherboard 05744 Rev B 137 TELEDYNE API Theory of Operation M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual A variety of sensors report the physical and operational status of the calibrator s major components again through the signal processing capabilities of the motherboard These status reports are used as data for the concentration calculations and as trigger events for certain control commands issued by the CPU They are stored in memory by the CPU and in most cases can be viewed but the user via the front panel display The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in a variety of manners e Through the calibrator s keyboard and vacuum florescent display over a clocked digital serial I O bus using a protocol called I2C RS 232 amp RS485 serial I O channels e Via optional Ethernet communications card e Various digital and analog outputs and e A set of digital control input channels Finally the CPU issues commands via a series of relays and switches also over the bus located on separate printed circuit assembly to control the function of key electromechanical devices such as heaters motors and valves 9 2 2 CPU The CPU is a low power 5 VDC 0 8A max high performance 386 based microco
249. nstalled the zero air pump should be disabled The ZA PUMP ENABLE VAR see Section 6 10 should be set to OFF 05744 Rev B 19 TELEDYNE API Getting Started M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 3 3 3 OUTPUT MANIFOLD A four port output manifold is supplied on the rear panel of the M703E enabling simultaneous testing of up to two external analyzers Sample lines for ozone analyzers to be calibrated can be connected directly to this manifold To prevent ozone exposure the bottom port of this manifold is used as a vent and should be connected to a proper unpressurized vent manifold It is important that the backpressure at this vent fitting be kept to a minimum If a vent line longer than 2 meters 6 feet is required then 3 8 OD tubing should be used Any unused ports on this manifold must be capped 3 3 4 EXHAUST The port labeled EXHAUST contains the exhaust gas from the internal photometer and may contain ozone This port should be connected to a proper unpressurized vent manifold to prevent ozone exposure 3 3 5 MEASURING AN EXTERNAL OZONE SOURCE The M703E can easily be configured to measure an external source of ozone See Section 6 11 for details on operating the M703E in this manner USER NOTES 20 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started 3 4 INITIAL OPERATION If you are unfamiliar with the M703E theory of operation we recommend that you read Ch
250. nternal electronic status LEDs to determine whether the electronic communication channels are operating properly e Verify that the DC power supplies are operating properly by checking the voltage test points on the relay PCA e Note that the calibrator s DC power wiring is color coded and these colors match the color of the corresponding test points on the relay PCA Suspect a leak first e Customer service data indicate that the majority of all problems are eventually traced to leaks in the internal pneumatics of the calibrator or the diluent gas and source gases delivery systems e Check for gas flow problems such as clogged or blocked internal external gas lines damaged seals punctured gas lines a damaged malfunctioning pumps etc 05744 Rev B 177 TELEDYNE API General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operators Manual 18 Follow the procedures defined in Section 3 4 4 to confirm that the calibrator s vital functions are working power supplies CPU relay PCA keyboard PMT cooler etc e See Figure 3 3 for general layout of components and sub assemblies in the calibrator e See the wiring interconnect diagram and interconnect list in Appendix D 11 1 1 FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH WARNING MESSAGES The most common and or serious instrument failures will result in a warning message being displayed on the front panel Table 11 1 lists warning messages along with their meaning and reco
251. nts Location 05744 Rev B 153 TELEDYNE API Theory of Operation M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 9 5 3 1 Generator Temperature Control In order to operate at peak efficiency the UV lamp of the M703E s generator is maintained at a constant 48 C if the lamp temperature falls below 43 C or rises above 53 C a warning is issued by the calibrators CPU This temperature is controlled as described in the section on the relay PCA see Section 9 2 3 2 The location of the thermistor and heater associated with the O3 generator is shown below UV Lamp Generator Heater Control PCA Heater is located beneath UV Lamp Thermistor Figure 9 17 Generator Temperature Thermistor and DC Heater Locations 154 05744 RevB TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 6 PHOTOMETER OPERATION The Model M703E calibrator s optional photometer determines the concentration of Ozone O3 in a sample gas drawn through it Sample and calibration gasses must be supplied at ambient atmospheric pressure in order to establish a stable gas flow through the absorption tube where the gas ability to absorb ultraviolet UV radiation of a certain wavelength in this case 254 nm is measured Gas bearing and zero air are alternately routed through the photometer s absorption tube Measurements of the UV light passing through the sample gas with and without present are made an
252. nts basic operating status Table 9 3 Front Panel Status LEDs Nam Seems Displays Warning e Main Message N A messages and Test At initial start up the various warning messages will appear Field Function values Displays Mode Field STANDBY Instrument is in STANDBY mode STATUS LEDs Unit is operating in STANDBY mode Active Green OFF This LED glows green when the instrument is actively producing calibration gas Auto Yellow OFF This LED only glows when the calibrator is performing an automatic calibration sequence The calibrator is warming up and therefore many of its subsystems Fault BLINKING are not yet operating within their optimum ranges Various warning messages will appear 9 3 1 2 Keyboard A row of eight keys just below the vacuum florescent display see Figure 9 10 is the main method by which the user interacts with the calibrator As the software is operated labels appear on the bottom row of the display directly above each active key defining the function of that key as it is relevant for the operation being performed Pressing a key causes the associated instruction to be performed by the calibrator Note that the keys do not auto repeat In circumstances where the same key must be activated for two consecutive operations it must be released and re pressed 9 3 1 3 Display The main display of the calibrator is a vacuum florescent display with two lines
253. o earth ground and its electronic components are prevented from building static electric charges themselves This does not prevent discharges from static fields built up on other things like you and your clothing from discharging through the instrument and damaging it 12 4 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF STATIC CONTROL It is impossible to stop the creation of instantaneous static electric charges It is not however difficult to prevent those charges from building to dangerous levels or prevent damage due to electro static discharge from occurring 12 4 1 GENERAL RULES Only handle or work on all electronic assemblies at a properly set up ESD station Setting up an ESD safe workstation need not be complicated A protective mat properly tied to ground and a wrist strap are all that is needed to create a basic anti ESD workstation Protective Mat rist Stre Va Ground Point Figure 12 2 Basic anti ESD Work Station 05744 Rev B 207 TELEDYNE API A Primer on Eletro Static Discharge M703E Calibrator Operators Manual For technicians that work in the field special lightweight and portable anti ESD kits are available from most suppliers of ESD protection gear These include everything needed to create a temporary anti ESD work area anywhere Always wear an Anti ESD wrist strap when working on the electronic assemblies of your analyzer An anti ESD wrist strap keeps the person wearing it at or near the same potential as o
254. obsolete abbreviation cc DIAG Acronym for diagnostics the diagnostic menu or settings of the system DHCP acronym for dynamic host configuration protocol A protocol used by LAN or Internet servers that automatically sets up the interface protocols between themselves and any other addressable device connected to the network 05744 Rev B 27 TELEDYNE API Frequently Asked Questions and Glossary M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual DOC Acronym for Disk On Chip the system s central storage area for system operating system firmware and data This is a solid state device without mechanical moving parts that acts as a computer hard disk drive under DOS with disk drive label DOC chips come with 8 mb space in the E series system standard configuration but are available in larger sizes DOS Disk Operating System The E series systems use DR DOS EEPROM also referred to as a FLASH chip FEP Acronym for Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene polymer one of the polymers that du Pont markets as Teflon along with PFA and PTFE FLASH flash memory is non volatile solid state memory bus read I square C bus A serial clocked serial bus for communication between individual system components IC Acronym for Integrated Circuit a modern semi conductor circuit that can contain many basic components such as resistors transistors capacitors etc in a miniaturized package used in electronic assemblies iDAS
255. og Status Control RS 232 RS 485 Out J1020 Out J1017 In J1004 J1013 J1010 amp 1011 AC POWER 04211 AC POWER zs SWITCH J101 amp 102 ENTRANCE On Motherboard CNS amp 7 on CPU MOTHERBOARD N a 057020400 CPU 036490100 CP26 04339 noz UV LAMP J15 UV LAMP J106 7109 27 DC Pwr 2 04776 es Bench Htr UV LAMP 041440000 1 p 04776 ETHERNET p 03 Gen Htr _ 0439 _ 041440100 03829 b Sample Temp P 0563101 042010000 T 0417601 0427901 E 15 14 0400307 RELAY BOARD J8 BENCH 045230100 P DET i eN 04120 N 2 pL PUMP IZS DET J5 03707 05484 P3 TL 6 04120 L 0428001 112 Meas Ref 05522 04105 Pwr amp 2C 00729 i DISPLAY 03 Valve Keyboard Display Interface c DS 9 05522 J2 I2C 042580000 KEY 1 All part numbers in Italic identify cables that are refered to in the accompanying document 05827 5 in Dashed boxes are The information hereon is the UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED CONTRACT TELEDYNE Advanced Pollution instrumentation piona CLE MEN 7 NM AB URS LLL ur LM em m Eu eR INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED duplicated without preger _M703E horfzetian EN DWG ES Fal 05826 THRDANGLEPROECTON O OO E 746 per o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Z Jo T O00LOTT SINAWNDOC
256. olve Since many photometer behaviors that appear to be a dynamic in nature are often a symptom of a seemingly unrelated static problems it is recommended that dynamic problems not be addressed until all static problems warning conditions and subsystems have been checked and any problems found are resolved Once this has been accomplished the following most common dynamic problems should be checked 11 5 1 1 Noisy or Unstable O Readings at Zero Check for leaks in the pneumatic system as described in Section 10 2 Confirm that the Zero gas is free of Ozone Confirm that the Source Lamp is fully inserted and that the lamp hold down thumb screw is tight Check for a dirty Absorption Cell and or pneumatic lines Clean as necessary as described in Section 10 2 Disconnect the exhaust line from the optical bench the pneumatic line at the lamp end of the bench and plug the port in the bench If readings remain noisy the problem is in one of the electronic sections of the instrument If readings become quiet the problem is in the instrument s pneumatics 05744 Rev B 197 TELEDYNE API General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operators Manual 11 5 1 2 Noisy Unstable or Non Linear Span O3 Readings Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section10 2 Check for proper operation of the meas ref switching valve as described in Section11 5 2 Check for dirty absorption cell and clea
257. ons to and from the CPU are handled by the motherboard Outgoing commands for the various devices such as the photometer pump the UV lamp power supply the U V Lamp heater are issued via the lC bus to circuitry on the relay PCA which turns them ON OFF The CPU also issues commands over the lC bus that cause the relay PCA to cycle the measure reference valve back and forth Incoming date the UV light detector is amplified locally then converted to digital information by the motherboard Output from the photometers temperature sensors is also amplified and converted to digital data by the motherboard The concentration of the sample gas is computed by the CPU using this data along with gas pressure and flow data received from the M703E s pressure sensors 9 6 4 1 Photometer Temperature Control In order to operate at peak efficiency the UV lamp of the M703E s photometer is maintained at a constant 58 C This is intentionally set at a temperature higher than the ambient temperature of the M703E s operating environment to make sure that local changes in temperature do not affect the UV Lamp If the lamp temperature falls below 56 C or rises above 61 C a warning is issued by the calibrators CPU This temperature is controlled as described in the section on the relay PCA Section 9 3 3 2 The following TEST functions report these temperatures and are viewable from the instrument s front panel e PHOTO LAMP TEMP The temperature
258. op configuration allowing up to eight Teledyne Instruments E Series calibrators or E Series analyzers to be connected the same I O port of the host computer Because both of the DB9 connectors on the calibrator s back panel are needed to construct the multidrop chain 2 is no longer available for separate RS 232 or RS 485 operation however with the addition of an Ethernet Option option 63 See Section5 2 4 and 7 5 the 2 port is available for communication over 10BaseT LAN JP2 Rear Panel CPU Card as seen from inside Cable to Ethernet Card Multidrop PCA Cable to Motherboard Figure 7 3 Location of JP2 on RS232 Multidrop PCA option 62 Each calibrator or analyzer in the multidrop chain must have e One Teledyne Instruments Option 62 installed One 6 straight through DB9 male DB9 Female cable Teledyne Instruments P N WRO0000101 is required for each calibrator To set up the network for each instrument 4 Turn the instrument on and change its MACHINE ID code to a unique 4 digit number Remove the top cover of the instrument and locate JP2 on the multidrop PCA 7 4 5 6 Make sure that the jumpers are in place connection pins 9 lt gt 10 and 11 lt gt 12 7 If the instrument is to be the last instrument on the chain make sure jumper is in place connecting pins 21 lt gt 22 8 If you are adding an instrument to the end of an already existing chain do not forget re
259. or itself DHCP is ON EDIT key A string of numbers very similar to the Instrument IP poi by disabled when address e g 192 168 76 1 that is the address of the DHCP is computer used by your LAN to access the Internet Also a string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each e g 255 255 252 0 that identifies the LAN to which the device is connected Configured by cti LAM dd ble devi d t LAN must SUBNET MASK disabled when addressable devices and computers on a mus DHCP DHCP is have the same subnet mask Any transmissions sent to devices with different subnet masks are assumed to be outside of the LAN and are therefore routed through a gateway computer onto the Internet This number defines the terminal control port by which Editable bur the instrument is addressed by terminal emulation TCP PORT 3000 DO NOT y software such as Internet Teledyne Instruments APICOM The name by which your calibrator will appear when addressed from other computers on the LAN or via the HOST NAME M703E Editable Internet The default setting for all Teledyne Instruments M703E calibrators is M703E The host name may be changed to fit customer needs not change the setting for this property unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel NOTE If the gateway IP instrument IP and the subnet mask are all zeroes e g 0 0 0 0 the DCHP was not successful
260. ort set switch 6 of SW1 to the ON position see Figure 7 6 e The RS 485 port can be configured with or without a 150 termination resistor To include the resistor install jumper at position JP3 on the CPU board see Figure 7 6 To configure COM2 as an un terminated RS 485 port leave JP3 open CN4 JP3 COM2 RS 232 CN3 COM1 RS 232 2 RS 485 4 N A UT m 4 r IG 5 156 BMAJVTIIIILIL 1413312 s E ALI M6117C Al D X Adda Figure 7 5 CPU card Locations of RS 232 485 Switches Connectors and Jumpers 05744 Rev B 103 TELEDYNE API Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports When COM is configured for RS 485 operation the port uses the same female DB 9 connector on the back of the instrument as when 2 is configured for RS 232 operation however the pin assignments are different M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Female DB 9 COM2 As seen from outside analyzer RX TX RX TX GND RS 485 Figure 7 6 Back Panel connector Pin Outs for COM2 in RS 485 mode The signal from this connector is routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to a 6 pin connector on the CPU card CN5 CN5 Located on CPU card RX TX RX TX GND As seen from inside analyzer Figure 7 7 CPU connector
261. ortant that the photometer is operating properly and accurately The verification procedure can be performed using the instruments internal generator see Figure 8 1 or an external source of see Figure 8 2 In either case an external source of zero air such as a Teledyne Instruments Model 701 Zero Air Generator is required 8 1 1 SETUP FOR VERIFYING AND CALIBRATING THE O PHOTOMETER Note This operation requires an external reference photometer PHOTOMETER INLET PHOTOMETER OUTLET PHOTOMETER ZERO IN PHOTOMETER ZERO our EXHAUST line Max Length 3 meters or 10 feet EXHAUST ZERO AIR IN DRY AIR IN Use 3 8 O D tubing for VENT line CAL GAS OUT Capped when event flow is 2LPM CAL GAS OUT M703E Photometric O3 Calibrator OPTIONAL Ambient PHOTOMETER TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS MODEL 701 ZERO GAS GENERATOR 05744 Rev B 113 TELEDYNE API M703E Calibration and Verification M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Figure 8 1 Enclosure Wall Vent line Max Length 3 meters or 10 feet External O5 Source Capped PHOTOMETER OUTLET REFERENCE PHOTOMETER instruments PHOTOMETER INLET PHOTOMETER ZERO IN EXHAUST ZERO AIR IN DRY AIR IN CAL GAS OUT CAL GAS OUT M703E Photometric Calibrator PHOTOMETE
262. otometer 115 213 Calibrating the Os o ttem iae la ttem eu suet 116 9 1 3 1 Photometer Zero CallDratlOr ot totidem tei the ute vao La tegat acit dus theme ted ed 116 8 153 2 Photometer Span Calibration ii Leo ta teet hd E ert Rte AP RH Y 117 8 1 4 Os Photometer Dark Calibration i cette tie eta etd te deed ete hh dr dd 118 8 2 Calibrating the Generator oer dr reme gren eredi Ite ege 119 8 2 1 Generator Calibration 0 119 8 2 2 Viewing Generator Calibration 120 8 2 3 Adding or Editing Generator Calibration 121 8 2 4 Deleting Generator Calibration 122 8 2 5 Turning Generator Calibration Points ON OFF 222 123 8 2 6 Performing an Automatic Calibration of the Generator 124 8 3 M703E Gas Pressure Sensor 125 8 3 1 1 Gas Pressure Sensor Calibration Set 125 8 3 2 Calibrating the Regulator and Photometer Pressure Sensors 127 8 4 M7OSE Gas Flow Calibration
263. otometer Once a function is selected the instrument not only begins to output a signal on the analog output but also adds TEST to the list of Test Functions viewable via the Front Panel Display 64 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator To activate the TEST Channel and select a function press Make sure that GEN STBY SEQ the M703E is in standby mode 7 PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM DIAG ENTER PASSWORD Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD SIGNAL I O PREV NEXT Continue pressing NEXT until TEST CHANNEL OUTPUT PREV NEXT ENTR TEST CHANNEL NONE AREV NEXT Toggle these keys to choose a TEST channel parameter TEST CHANNEL CHASSIS TEMP PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting 05744 Rev B 65 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 9 1 3 TEST CHANNEL VOLTAGE RANGE Configuration In its standard configuration the analog outputs is set to output a 0 5 VDC signals Several other output ranges are available see Table 7 5 Each range has is usable from 5 to 5 of the rated span Table 6 9 Analog Output Voltage Range Min Max RANGE SPAN MINIMUM OUTPUT MAXIMUM OUTPUT 0 100 mVDC 5 mVDC 105 mVDC 0 1 VDC 0 05 VDC 1 05 VDC 0 5 VDC 0 25 VDC 5 25 VDC 0 10 VDC 0 5 VDC 10 5 VDC The
264. ove for working at the instrument rack and workstation 2 Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti ESD bag or bin 3 Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate e If you are at the instrument rack hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground point f you are at an anti ESD workbench lay the container down on the conductive work surface e In either case wait several seconds 4 Place the item in the container Seal the container If using a bag fold the end over and fastening it with anti ESD tape e Folding the open end over isolates the component s inside from the effects of static fields e Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming a complete protective envelope around the device 6 Once you have arrived at your destination allow any surface charges that may have built up on the bag or bin during travel to dissipate e Connect your wrist strap to ground If you are at the instrument rack hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground point If you are at a anti ESD work bench lay the container down on the conductive work surface e In either case wait several seconds 7 Open the container 12 4 2 4 Opening Shipments from Teledyne Instruments Customer Service Packing materials such as bubble pack and Styrofoam pellets are extremely eff
265. perator s Manual Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports 7 6 APICOM REMOTE CONTROL PROGRAM APICOM is an easy to use yet powerful interface program that allows the user to access and control any of Teledyne Instruments main line of ambient and stack gas instruments from a remote connection through direct cable modem or Ethernet Running APICOM a user can e Establish a link from a remote location to the M703E through direct cable connection via RS 232 modem or Ethernet e View the instrument s front panel and remotely access all functions that could be accessed when standing in front of the instrument Remotely edit system parameters and set points Download view graph and save data for predictive diagnostics or data analysis e Retrieve view edit save and upload iDAS configurations Check on system parameters for trouble shooting and quality control APICOM is very helpful for initial setup data analysis maintenance and trouble shooting Figure 7 8 shows examples of APICOM s main interface which emulates the look and functionality of the instruments actual front panel 1 APIcom N Projects APIcom Scripts and data Engineering lab cfg InstrumentName __ 10 Status File View Settings Help COM1 Direct Cable COM2 Connected Direct Cable Modem Windows Modem TCP IP Ethernet T M 200 2053 Connected For Help press F1 NUM 7 1 200 at Eng lab 200 rack x
266. point is 8 1k ohms 196 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator 11 4 11 4 Ozone Generator Temperature There are three possible causes for the Ozone Generator temperature to have failed The generator heater has failed Check the resistance between pins 5 and 6 on the 6 pin connector adjacent to the UV Lamp on the O3 Generator It should be approximately 5 Ohms Assuming that the 2 bus is working and that there is no other failure with the Relay board the FET Driver on the Relay Board may have failed Using the O3 GEN HEATER parameter under the SIGNAL function of the DIAG menu as described above turn on and off the UV Lamp Heater Check the DC voltage present between pin 1 and 2 on J14 of the Relay Board If the FET Driver has failed there should be no change in the voltage across pins 1 and 2 If the FET Driver checks out OK the thermistor temperature sensor in the lamp assembly may have failed Unplug the connector to the Ozone Generator Heater Thermistor PCB and measure the resistance of the thermistor between pins 5 and 6 of the 6 pin connector 11 5 TROUBLESHOOTING THE O PHOTOMETER 11 5 1 DYNAMIC PROBLEMS WITH THE O PHOTOMETER Dynamic problems are problems which only manifest themselves when the photometer is measuring Os concentration gas mixtures These can be the most difficult and time consuming to isolate and res
267. proximately 4 5V this voltage will vary with altitude e With flow stopped photometer inlet disconnected or pump turned OFF the voltage should be approximately 1V e If the voltage is incorrect the flow sensor S3 is bad the board is bad or there is a leak upstream of the sensor 190 05744 Rev B M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE API General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator 11 4 8 MOTHERBOARD 11 4 8 1 A D Functions The simplest method to check the operation of the A to D converter on the motherboard is to use the Signal I O function under the DIAG menu to check the two A D reference voltages and input signals that can be easily measured with a voltmeter 1 Use the Signal I O function See Section 11 1 3 and Appendix A to view the value of REF 4096 MV and REF GND If both are within mV of nominal 4096 and 0 and are stable 0 5 mV then the basic A D is functioning properly If not then the motherboard is bad 2 Choose a parameter in the Signal I O function such as PHOTO LAMP DRIVE O3 GEN TEMP or PHOTO FLOW Compare these voltages at their origin see the interconnect drawing and interconnect list in Appendix D with the voltage displayed through the signal I O function e Ifthe wiring is intact but there is a large difference between the measured and displayed voltage 10 mV then the motherboard is bad 11 4 8 2 Test Channel Analog Outputs Voltage To verif
268. ps fails to be within these ranges it is likely that there has been a failure of the either or both of the DACs and their associated circuitry on the motherboard 11 4 8 3 Status Outputs To test the status output electronics 1 Connect a jumper between the D pin and V pin on the status output connector 2 Connect a 1000 ohm resistor between the pin and the pin for the status output that is being tested 3 Connecta voltmeter between the V pin and the pin of the output being tested see table below 4 Under the DIAG SIGNAL I O menu See Section11 1 3 scroll through the inputs and outputs until you get to the output in question 5 Alternately turn on and off the output noting the voltage on the voltmeter e It should vary between 0 volts for ON and 5 volts for OFF Table 11 10 Status Outputs Check LEFT TG RIGHT STATUS 1 ST_SYSTEM_OK 2 SPARE 3 ST_CAL_ACTIVE 4 ST_DIAG_MODE 5 ST_TEMP_ALARM 6 ST_PRESS_ALARM 7 and 8 SPARE 192 05744 Rev B M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE API General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator 11 4 8 4 Control Inputs Table 11 11 M703E Control Input Pin Assignments and Corresponding Signal I O Functions ewmam3 o emona O ewmams O cones O Top Top Top Top Top Top Bottom Bottom H commons Bem 1 cwmoums Bottom eorom
269. r 11 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR OF THE M703E CALIBRATOR This section contains a variety of methods for identifying and solving performance problems with the calibrator NOTE The operations outlined in this chapter must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only CAUTION e Risk of electrical shock Some operations need to be carried out with the instrument open and running e Exercise caution to avoid electrical shocks and electrostatic or mechanical damage to the calibrator e Do not drop tools into the calibrator or leave those after your procedures e Do not shorten or touch electric connections with metallic tools while operating inside the calibrator e Use common sense when operating inside a running calibrator 11 1 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING The M703E Photometric Calibrator has been designed so that problems can be rapidly detected evaluated and repaired During operation it continuously performs diagnostic tests and provides the ability to evaluate its key operating parameters without disturbing monitoring operations A systematic approach to troubleshooting will generally consist of the following five steps 14 15 16 17 Note any warning messages and take corrective action as necessary Examine the values of all TEST functions and compare them to factory values Note any major deviations from the factory values and take corrective action Use the i
270. r Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator 11 4 10 RS 232 COMMUNICATIONS 11 4 10 1 General RS 232 Troubleshooting Teledyne Instruments calibrators use the RS 232 communications protocol to allow the instrument to be connected to a variety of computer based equipment RS 232 has been used for many years and as equipment has become more advanced connections between various types of hardware have become increasingly difficult Generally every manufacturer observes the signal and timing requirements of the protocol very carefully Problems with RS 232 connections usually center around four general areas Incorrect cabling and connectors See Section 7 1 2 for connector and pin out information The BAUD rate and protocol are incorrectly configured See Section 7 1 3 If a modem is being used additional configuration and wiring rules must be observed See Section 7 2 Incorrect setting of the DTE DCE Switch is set correctly See Section 7 1 1 Verify that cable 03596 that connects the serial COM ports of the CPU to J12 of the motherboard is properly seated 11 4 10 2 Troubleshooting Calibrator Modem or Terminal Operation These are the general steps for troubleshooting problems with a modem connected to a Teledyne Instruments calibrator Check cables for proper connection to the modem terminal or computer Check to make sure the DTE DCE is in the correct position as described in Section 7 1 1
271. r bench O3 GEN SET POINT 000 0 PPB 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting J gt 05744 Rev B 83 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 12 5 3 Editing or Deleting a LEVEL To edit or delete an existing LEVEL press Make sure that the M703E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ SETUP gt PRIMARY SETUP MENU LEVL SEQ MORE LEVEL ID Gas Conc Status Block Set PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT Continue pressing NEXT or PREV until until LEVEL to be edited or deleted appears 25 150 PPB O3 04 00 PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT DELETEL STEP YES NO Toggle these keys select the parameter to be edited Level ID Number e Action e Status Block 1 Status Block 2 Levels are displayed according to the following Format SETUP LEVEL NUMBER 12 SET SET EDIT EXIT Press EDIT then follow the instructions for the parameter See Sections 6 12 5 1 through 6 12 5 3 LEVEL ID Any number between 0 and 99 This will be the number used to select the level when activating deactivating it or when editing or deleting it e Gas Conc The concentration setting in ppb for the O3 generator to produce Status Block Setting This will be displayed as two pairs of 1 digit numbers e The First pair corresponds to Status Block 1 e The Second pair corresponds to Status Block 2 n e
272. r supply or the UV lamp power supply PCA are faulty Ifthe above voltages check out it is more likely that a problem is due to the UV Lamp than due to the Lamp Power Supply e Replace the Lamp and if the problem persists replace the Lamp Power Supply 200 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator 11 7 TROUBLE SHOOTING THE OPTIONAL GENERATOR The only significant components of the O3 generator that might reasonable malfunction is the power supply assembly for the UV source lamp and the lamp itself 11 7 1 CHECKING THE UV SOURCE LAMP POWER SUPPLY NOTE A schematic and physical diagram of the Lamp Power Supply can be found in Appendix D WARNING Hazardous voltage present use caution It is not always possible to determine with certainty whether a problem is the result of the UV Lamp or the Lamp Power Supply however the following steps will provide a reasonable confidence test of the Lamp Power Supply 1 Make sure the calibrator is in STANDBY mode 2 Unplug the cable connector at P1 on the Lamp Power Supply and confirm that 15VDC is present between Pins 1 and 2 on the cable connector If this voltage is incorrect check the DC test points on the relay PCA as described in Section 11 4 3 4 Remove the cover of the photometer and check for the presence of the following voltages on the UV lamp power
273. rator 11 3 2 2 Status LEDs D9 Green External Zero Air Valve Status D7 Green Photometer Meas Ref Valve Status D2 Yellow Dry zero Air Pump Status D15 Yellow ape UU 0 20 0 Photometer wem Heater 016 Yellow Generator Lamp Heater D1 RED Watchdog Indicator lt Figure 11 3 Relay PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting Table 11 5 Relay PCA Status LED Failure Indications SIGNAL I O PARAMETER LED FUNCTION DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUE ACTIVATED BY VIEW RESULT Pump should start stop Status of AC i Failed pump Powered Dry ZERO_AIR_PUMP N A Nd Relay PCA Air Pump Faulty AC Power Supply PS2 e Faulty Connectors Wiring Valve should audibly change states If not D7 Photometer e Failed Valve Green Meas Ref PHOTO_REF_VALVE N A e Failed Relay Drive IC on Relay PCA Valve e Failed Relay PCA e Faulty 12 VDC Supply PS2 e Faulty Connectors Wiring Pump should start stop Status of DC e Failed pump D9 powered e Failed Drive IC on Relay PCA Green Photometer ae Pee Failed Relay Faulty AC Power Supply PS2 e Faulty Connectors Wiring D15 Photometer Voltage displayed should change Yellow Heater Status PHOTO LAMP HEATER PHOTO LAMP TEMP not Failed Heater D16 Generator Faulty Temperature Sensor Green Heater Status O3 GEN HEATER
274. reporting feature by setting the interface to quiet mode Section 7 1 4 Table 7 1 Status reports include warning messages calibration and diagnostic status messages Refer to Appendix A 3 for a list of the possible messages and this for information on controlling the instrument through the RS 232 interface General Message Format All messages from the instrument including those in response to a command line request are in the format X DDD HH MM Id MESSAGE lt CRLF gt Where is type designator a single character indicating the message type as shown in the Table 6 27 DDD HH MM is the time stamp the date and time when the message was issued It consists of the Day of year DDD as a number from 1 to 366 the hour of the day HH as a number from 00 to 23 and the minute MM as a number from 00 to 59 ID is the calibrator ID a number with 1 to 4 digits MESSAGE is the message content that may contain warning messages Test Functions variable values etc lt CRLF gt is a carriage return line feed pair which terminates the message The uniform nature of the output messages makes it easy for a host computer to parse them into an easy structure Keep in mind that the front panel display does not give any information on the time a message was issued hence it is useful to log such messages for trouble shooting and reference purposes Terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal can capture these me
275. rner of the generator assembly see Figures 3 4 and 9 14 alternates the gas stream flowing to the photometer between zero air diluent gas and the output from the generator This cycle takes about 6 seconds Table 9 4 M703E Photometer Measurement Reference Cycle TIME INDEX STATUS 0 sec Measure Reference Valve Opens to the Measure Path 0 2 sec Wait Period Ensures that the Absorption tube has been adequately flushed of any previously present gasses 2 3 Seconds Analyzer measures the average UV light intensity of bearing Sample Gas 1 during this period 3 sec Measure Reference Valve Opens to the Reference Path 3 5 sec Wait Period Ensures that the Absorption tube has been adequately flushed of O3 bearing gas 5 6 Seconds Analyzer measures the average light intensity of Non O3 bearing Sample Gas lo during this period CYCLE REPEAT EVERY 6 SECONDS 156 05744 Rev B M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE API Theory of Operation M703E Chassis DRY AIR IN blk ZERO AIR IN blu DRY AIR IN M703E Chassis blk ZERO AIR blu uaggsnu s TVODYVH 5 W3g8anu s WODYVHD blu Figure 9 18 49 56 85 9 19 os WD eS Pressure Regulator 10 302
276. ro gas then there is cross port leak in the m r valve Press the final Zero key then press NO when asked ARE YOU SURE 05744 Rev B 199 TELEDYNE API General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operators Manual 11 6 TROUBLESHOOTING THE GENERATOR 11 6 1 CHECKING THE UV LAMP POWER SUPPLY NOTE A schematic and physical diagram of the Lamp Power Supply can be found in Appendix D WARNING Hazardous voltage present use caution It is not always possible to determine with certainty whether a problem is the result of the UV Lamp or the Lamp Power Supply however the following steps will provide a reasonable confidence test of the Lamp Power Supply 1 Unplug the cable connector at P1 on the Lamp Power Supply and confirm that 15VDC is present between Pins 1 and 2 on the cable connector 2 If this voltage is incorrect check the DC test points on the relay PCA as described in Section 11 4 3 Remove the cover of the photometer and check for the presence of the following voltages on the UV lamp power supply PCA see Figure 9 21 4500 mVDC 10 mVDC between TP1 and 4 e If this voltage is incorrect either the UV lamp power supply is faulty or the 2 bus is not communicating with the UV lamp power supply PCA 5VDC between TP3 and TP4 grnd e If this voltages is les than 4 8 or greater than 5 25 either the 5 VDC powe
277. roduct i that has been altered or subjected to misuse negligence or accident or ii that has been used in any manner other than in accordance with the instruction provided by T API or iii not properly maintained THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION AND THE REMEDIES THEREFORE ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHER WARRANTY OF QUALITY WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED THE REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION ARE THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR BREACH OF ANY WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN API SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT OF T API S PERFORMANCE HEREUNDER WHETHER FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE TERMS AND CONDITIONS All units or components returned to Teledyne Instruments Incorporated should be properly packed for handling and returned freight prepaid to the nearest designated Service Center After the repair the equipment will be returned freight prepaid USER NOTES 05744 Rev B 7 TELEDYNE API Specifications Approvals and Warranty M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual USER NOTES 8 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started 3 GETTING STARTED 3 1 UNPACKING AND INITIAL SETUP CAUTION THE M703E WEIGHS ABOUT 16 1 KG 35 5 POUNDS WITHOUT OPTIONS INSTALLED TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY WE RECOMMEND USING TWO PERSONS TO LIFT
278. rom inside the TEST CHANNEL submenu press From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU See Section 6 9 5 1 DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR AOUTS CALIBRATED NO CAL Continue pressing SET gt until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT 5V OVR NOCAL lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT RANGE 5V SET EDIT Continue pressing SET until DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT CALIBRATED NO SET SET CAL EXIT DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING TEST OUTPUT DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT CALIBRATED YES SET SET CAL EXIT 05744 Rev B 71 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 9 2 3 Manual Calibration of the TEST CHANNEL configured for Voltage Ranges For highest accuracy the voltages of the analog outputs can be manually calibrated NOTE The menu for manually adjusting the analog output signal level will only appear if the AUTO CAL feature is turned off for the channel being adjusted see Section6 9 2 1 Calibration is performed with a voltmeter connected across the output terminals See Figure 6 2 and by changing the actual output signal level using the front panel keys in 100 10 or 1 count increments VIN Recording Device V OUT ANALYZER Figure 6 3 Setup for Calibrating the TEST CHANNEL Table 6 10 Voltage Tolerances for the TEST CHANNEL Calibration MINIMUM FULL ZERO SPAN SCALE TOLERANCE
279. s charged device discharges can be the most destructive e Atypical example of this is the simple act of installing an electronic assembly into the connector or wiring harness of the equipment in which it is to function If the assembly is carrying a static charge as it is connected to ground a discharge will occur e Whenever a sensitive device is moved into the field of an existing electro static field a charge may be induced on the device in effect discharging the field onto the device If the device is then momentarily grounded while within the electrostatic field or removed from the region of the electrostatic field and grounded somewhere else a second discharge will occur as the charge is transferred from the device to ground 206 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual A Primer on Eletro Static Discharge 12 3 COMMON MYTHS ABOUT ESD DAMAGE didn t feel a shock so there was electro static discharge The human nervous system is not able to feel a static discharge of less than 3500 volts Most devices are damaged by discharge levels much lower than that didn t touch it so there was no electro static discharge Electro Static charges are fields whose lines of force can extend several inches or sometimes even feet away from the surface bearing the charge It still works so there was no damage Sometimes the damaged caused by electro static discharge can completely sever a circuit tra
280. s 4 o E 9 CTSI 9 11013 5 NC RXD lt 1 XD 5 5 GND 4 s RTS 9 CTS 8 NC 2 DB9M MT9 MOUNTING HOLE MT4 MTS MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOL 10 uF 35V TANTALUM Cl C2 10 uF 35V TANTALUM MBRS340CT R35 NOT INSTALLED Title Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702 Size Number Revision Orcad B 05703 A Date 17 Jun 2008 Sheet Df 8 File N Pcbmgr 05701dn E motherboard gen4 Sdiirre B41 a DDB 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 C6 ISOLATED 0 20MA OPTIONAL BOARDS ANALOG VOLTAGE amp CURRENT OUTPUTS TP21 15V 15V 10000 pF C7 5 C20 U29A 0 15 uF ceramic A 9 C21 10000 pF 10000 pF 10000 pF a 2 J2 11 FE BEAD DAC RANGE 8 PROGRAM 40K 5 eH cp RIS 1 8221 e VREF IDC 8 mt TUN 11020 1 R63 Di C4 C5 C13 C19 2 0 10k ME 1 10000 pF 10000 pF gt 10000 pF 10000 p 3 A TC2 gt 4 43L NOM PMDAISLCC 4 46 C53 e Ja sS L5 22 015 i 2 26 15 uF ceramic ca or EF wvlol lo 2 3 IDC MDA ISLC
281. s mixtures simultaneously to two analyzers each requiring 0 8 LPM the proper Total Flow output should be set at a minimum of 0 8 0 8 1 0 2 6 LPM To set the output flow 1 Open the front panel of the calibrator down by releasing the two snap in fasteners at the top of the front panel 2 Pull out the regulator knob and adjust the regulator until the desired flow is achieved e The front panel of the M703E displays the approximate output flow based on the measured regulator pressure but this flow should be verified with an independent calibrated flow meter attached to the on of the CAL GAS outlets on the back of the instrument see Figure 3 2 Push the regulator knob back in to lock Close the front panel Pressure Regulator Adjustment Knob Figure 3 10 Location of Pressure Regulator Adjustment Knob USER NOTES 26 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Frequently Asked Questions and Glossary 4 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS AND GLOSSARY 4 1 FAQ S The following list is a list from the T API Customer Service Department of the 10 most commonly asked questions relating to the Model 703E Photometric Calibrator Q My ozone ACT why A Look at the Photo Ref Meas readings from the photometer UV lamp detector are most likely too low and need to be adjusted See Section 10 5 When I generate ozone it takes a long time to settle out or it fluctuates
282. se o rings may stay seated in the manifolds when the tube is removed fthere is any noticeable damage to these o rings they should be replaced 10 Re assemble the tube into the lamp housing and perform an AUTO LEAK CHECK on the instrument NOTE It is important for proper optical alignment that the tube be pushed all the way towards the front of the optical bench when it is re assembled This will ensure that the tube is assembled with the forward end against the stop inside the detector manifold 10 4 REBUILDING THE DRY AIR PUMP The diaphragm in the sample pump will periodically wear out and require replacement A sample rebuild kit is available See Appendix B of this manual for the part number of the pump rebuild kit Instructions and diagrams are included with the kit Always perform a Flow and Leak Check after rebuilding the Sample Pump 05744 Rev B 171 TELEDYNE API Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures M703E Calibrator Operators Manual 10 5 PHOTOMETER UV SOURCE LAMP ADJUSTMENT This procedure details the steps for adjustment of the UV source lamp in the optical bench assembly This procedure should be done whenever the PHOTO REFERENCE test function value drops below 3000 mV of ON Make sure that the M703E is in standby mode Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD Toggle these keys to show the ID number for the desired signal see Appendix A E
283. series of appendices at the end of this manual These include version specific software menu trees warning messages serial I O variables as well as spare part listings repair questionnaires interconnect drawing detailed pneumatic and electronic schematics USER NOTES 4 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Specifications Approvals and Warranty 2 SPECIFICATIONS APPROVALS AND WARRANTY 2 1 SPECIFICATIONS Table 2 1 M703E Analytical Specifications Linearity Precision Stability Response Time Stability 7 days 1 0 of full scale 1 0 ppb 2 0 ppb photometer feedback mode 180 seconds to 95 1 photometer feedback 3 without photometer feedback CNST or REF Table 2 2 M703E Electrical and Physical Specifications Temperature Range 5 40 C Humidity Range 0 95 RH non condensing Dimensions HxWxD 7 178 mm x 17 432 mm x 24 609 mm Operating Altitude 10 000 ft Maximum Weight 35 5 Ibs 16 1 kg including internal zero air pump 115VAC 60Hz AC Power 230VAC 50HZ Analog Outputs 1 user configurable output Analog Output Ranges 0 1V 1V 5Vor 10V Range with 596 under over range Analog Output Resolution 1 part in 4096 of selected full scale voltage 12 bit Digital Control Outputs 12 opto isolated outputs Digital Control Inputs 12 opto isolated outputs Status Outputs 12 opto isolated
284. served value for PHOTO DET tighten the lamp setscrew at the approximate maximum value observed If the value of PHOTO DET is not within the range of 4400 4600 mV adjust it accordingly 11 Replace the cover on the analyzer NOTE The UV lamp contains mercury Hg which is considered hazardous waste The lamp should be disposed of in accordance with local regulations regarding waste containing mercury 05744 Rev B 173 TELEDYNE API Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures M703E Calibrator Operators Manual 10 7 ADJUSTMENT OR REPLACEMENT OF OZONE GENERATOR UV LAMP This procedure details the steps for replacement and initial adjustment of the ozone generator lamp If you are adjusting an existing lamp skip to Step 8 1 Turn off the analyzer 2 Remove the cover from the analyzer 3 Locate the generator see Figure 3 3 Set Screws O Generator Body Figure 10 4 Generator Temperature Thermistor and DC Heater Locations 4 Remove the two setscrews on the top of the generator and gently pull out the old lamp Inspect the o ring beneath the nut and replace if damaged Install the new lamp in generator housing Do notfully tighten the setscrews e The lamp should be able to be rotated in the assembly by grasping the lamp cable Turn on analyzer and allow it to stabilize for at least 20 minutes Locate the generator reference detector adjustment potentiometer Gener
285. setting and returns to the previous menu INST IP 000 000 000 000 Some keys only appear as needed lt CH CH gt DEL 0 ENTR EXIT lt SET SET gt EDIT Cursor location is indicated by INST IP 0 00 000 000 brackets GATEWAY IP 000 000 000 000 lt SET SET gt EDIT SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 GATEWAY IP 0 00 000 000 lt CH CH gt DEL 2 ENTR EXIT lt SET SET gt EDIT 22 SUBNET MASK 2 55 255 255 0 TCP PORT 3000 lt CH CH gt DEL ENTR EXIT lt SET The PORT number needs to remain at 3000 Do not change this setting unless instructed to by Pressing EXIT from any of the above display menus causes the Ethernet option to reinitialize its internal interface firmware Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel 6 INITIALIZING INET 0 INITIALIZING INET 100 INITIALIZATION SUCCEEDED INITIALIZATION FAILED SETUP COMMUNI CATI ONS MENU Contact your IT Network Administrator ID INET EXIT 05744 Rev B 109 TELEDYNE API Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 7 5 3 CHANGING THE CALIBRATOR S HOSTNAME The HOSTNAME is the name by which the calibrator appears on your network The default name for all Teledyne Instruments M703E calibrators is M703E To change this name particu
286. siders the prevention of damage caused by the discharge of static electricity to be extremely important part of making sure that your analyzer continues to provide reliable service for a long time This section describes how static electricity occurs why it is so dangerous to electronic components and assemblies as well as how to prevent that damage from occurring 12 1 HOW STATIC CHARGES ARE CREATED Modern electronic devices such as the types used in the various electronic assemblies of your analyzer are very small require very little power and operate very quickly Unfortunately the same characteristics that allow them to do these things also make them very susceptible to damage from the discharge of static electricity Controlling electrostatic discharge begins with understanding how electro static charges occur in the first place Static electricity is the result of something called triboelectric charging which happens whenever the atoms of the surface layers of two materials rub against each other As the atoms of the two surfaces move together and separate some electrons from one surface are retained by the other Materials Separate Materials Makes Contact PROTONS 3 PROTONS 3 ELI 2 5 PROTONS 5 3 ELECTRONS 3 ELECTRONS 3 ELECTRONS 4 CHARGE 0 NET CHARGE SO NET CHARGE 1 NET CHARGE 1 Figure 12 1 Triboelectric Charging If one of the surfaces is a poor conductor or even
287. sor chip power connector drive connector unused Figure 9 3 M703E CPU Board Annotated 138 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation Finally the CPU issues commands also over the I2C bus to a series of relays and switches located on a separate printed circuit assembly the relay board located in the right rear of the chassis on its own mounting bracket to control the function of heaters and valves The CPU includes two types of non volatile data storage one disk on chip and one or two flash chips 9 2 2 1 Disk On Chip Technically the disk on chip is an EEPROM but appears to the CPU as behaves as and performs the same functions in the system as an 8 mb disk drive internally labeled as DOS drive C It is used to store the computer s operating system files the Teledyne Instruments firmware and peripheral files and the operational data generated by the calibrator s internal data acquisition system 9 2 2 2 Flash Chip The flash chip is another smaller EEPROM with about 64 kb of space internally labeled as DOS drive The M703E CPU board can accommodate up to two EEPROM flash chips The M703E standard configuration is one chip with 64 kb of storage capacity which is used to store the calibrator configuration as created during final checkout at the factory Separating these data onto a less frequently accessed chip significantly decreases the chance of data corruption through dr
288. ssages to text files for later review 05744 Rev B 97 TELEDYNE API Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 7 1 7 5 COM Port Password Security In order to provide security for remote access of the M703E a LOGON feature can be enabled to require a password before the instrument will accept commands This is done by turning on the SECURITY MODE Mode 4 Section 7 1 4 Once the SECURITY MODE is enabled the following items apply e A password is required before the port will respond or pass on commands e If the port is inactive for one hour it will automatically logoff which can also be achieved with the LOGOFF command e Three unsuccessful attempts to log on with an incorrect password will cause subsequent logins to be disabled for 1 hour even if the correct password is used e f not logged on the only active command is the request for the help screen e The following messages will be returned at logon e LOGON SUCCESSFUL Correct password given LOGON FAILED Password not given or incorrect LOGOFF SUCCESSFUL Connection terminated successfully To log on to the 7 calibrator with SECURITY MODE feature enabled type LOGON 940331 940331 is the default password To change the default password use the variable 5232 PASS issued as follows V RS232_PASS NNNNNN Where N is any numeral between 0 and 9 98 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Op
289. t count in the form of a binary number to the CPU The A D can be configured for several different input modes and ranges but in the 7 it is used in uni polar mode with a 5V full scale The converter includes a 1 over and under range This allows signals from 0 05V to 5 05V to be fully converted For calibration purposes two reference voltages are supplied to the A D converter Reference ground and 4 096 VDC During calibration the device measures these two voltages outputs their digital equivalent to the CPU The CPU uses these values to compute the converter s offset and slope and also uses these factors for subsequent conversions 9 2 4 2 Sensor Inputs The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A D converter through the master multiplexer from two connectors on the motherboard Terminating resistors 100 on each of the inputs prevent cross talk between the sensor signals 9 2 4 3 Thermistor Interface This circuit provides excitation termination and signal selection for several negative coefficient thermistors temperature sensors located inside the calibrator 9 2 4 4 Analog Outputs The 7 calibrator comes equipped with one analog output It can set by the user to carry the current signal level of any one of the parameters see Table 7 4 and will output an analog VDC signal that rises and falls in relationship with the value of the parameter 05744 Rev B 143 TELEDYNE API Theory of
290. tecting ozone is subject to interference from a number of sources The has M703E s photometer been successfully tested for its ability to reject interference from sulfur dioxide nitrogen dioxide nitric oxide water and meta xylene While the photometer rejects interference from the aromatic hydrocarbon meta xylene it should be noted that there are a very large number of other volatile aromatic hydrocarbons that could potentially interfere with ozone detection If the 7 calibrator is installed in an environment where high aromatic hydrocarbon concentrations are suspected specific tests should be conducted to reveal the amount of interference these compounds may be causing 158 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 6 2 PHOTOMETER LAYOUT The Photometer is where the absorption of UV light by ozone is measured and converted into a voltage It consists of several sub assemblies e Amercury vapor UV lamp This lamp is coated in a material that optically screens the UV radiation output to remove the producing 185nm radiation Only light at 254nm is emitted e AnAC power supply that supplies the current for starting and maintaining the plasma arc of the mercury vapor lamp e A thermistor and DC heater attached to the UV Lamp to maintain the Lamp at an optimum operating temperature e 42 long quartz absorption tube e Athermistor attached to the quartz tube for measurin
291. than Teledyne Instruments for pin assignments before using To assist in properly connecting the serial ports to either a computer or a modem there are activity indicators just above the RS 232 port Once a cable is connected between the calibrator and a computer or modem both the red and green LEDs should be on If the lights are not lit use the small switch on the rear panel to switch it between DTE and DCE modes If both LEDs are still not illuminated make sure the cable properly constructed 05744 Rev B 89 TELEDYNE API Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 7 1 3 COMM PORT BAUD RATE To select the baud rate of either one of the COM Ports press GEN STBY SEQ o m U PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID COM1 COM2 o 1 0 lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT COM1 BAUD RATE 19200 lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT Toggle these keys to cycle through the COM1 BAUD RATE 19200 available Baud rates 300 PREV NEXT EXIT 4800 9600 19200 BAUD RATE 19200 38400 57600 ENTR EXIT 115200 1 EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting J gt 90 05744 Rev B M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE API Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports 7 1 4 COMM PORT COMMUNICATION MODES Each of the calibrator s serial ports can b
292. the 7 calibrator and will be mused whenever the calibrator is using the GENERATE gt AUTO command or the GENERATE sequence step to create a calibration mixture When either the GENERATE gt MAN command or the MANUAL sequence step is active the local generator mode chosen during when the command step is programmed will take precedence 3 4 6 SETTING THE O3 GENERATOR MODE To select a default generator mode press Make sure that the M703E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU O3 SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE 03 GAS CONFIG MODE SETUP X X These keys initiate procedures for calibrating and verifying the operation of the Generator and Photometer O3 GEN MODE BNCH CNST REF BNCH Use these keys to cla a EXIT discards the new select a control setting mode for the O3 ENTR accepts the Generator 03 GAS CONFIG new setting gt 05744 Rev B 25 TELEDYNE API Getting Started M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 3 4 7 SETTING THE M703E S OUTPUT FLOW RATE The output flow rate of the M703E should be adjusted to match the gas flow requirements of the analyzers connected to the output manifold NOTE e The minimum total flow should equal the sum of the flow requirements of all of the instruments to which the M703E will be supplying calibration gas plus 1 LPM excess flow e Example If the M703E is will be expected to supply calibration ga
293. the present operating status of the calibrator and are useful during troubleshooting see Chapter 11 Table 6 1 lists the available TEST functions To view these TEST functions press lt TST or TST gt from the main menu and the Test Functions will scroll at the top center of the display Table 6 1 Test Functions Defined TEST MEASUREMENT DESCRIPTION ACT GENERATE XX PPB O3 Actual concentration being generated computed from real time inputs PHOTO SLOPE X XXX Photometer slope computed during zero span bench calibration PHOTO OFFSET X X PPB Photometer offset computed during zero span bench calibration PHOTO STABIL X X PPB Photometer concentration stability standard deviation of 25 bench concentration samples taken 10 seconds apart TEST XXXX X MV Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog output selected with TEST_CHAN_ID variable TIME HH MM SS Current instrument time of day clock 24 hour format 36 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator 6 2 OVERVIEW OF OPERATING MODES The M703E calibrator software has a variety of operating modes Most commonly the calibrator will be operating in STANDBY mode In this mode the calibrator and all of its subsystems are inactive although TEST functions and WARNING messages are still updated can be examined via the front panel The second most important operating mode is SETUP mode This mode is used for performing certain configuratio
294. the value displayed is too low 100mV Bad UV lamp or UV lamp power supply lt 2000mV Lamp output has dropped adjust UV Preamp Board or replace lamp PHOTO MEASURE If the value displayed is constantly changing Bad UV lamp PHOTO REFERENCE Defective UV lamp power supply Failed Bus If the PHOTO REFERENCE value changes by more than 10mV between zero and span gas Defective leaking switching valve Gas flow problems directly affect the accuracy of the photometer measurements and PHOTO FLOW therefore the concentration accuracy of cal gas mixtures involving O3 and GPT mixtures Check for Gas Flow problems Poor photometer temp control can cause instrument noise stability and drift Temperatures PHOTO LAMP TEMP of the specified range or oscillating temperatures are cause for concern Possible causes of faults are the same as PHOTO LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 11 1 The pressure of the gas in the photometer s sample chamber is used to calculate the concentration of Os in the gas stream Incorrect sample pressure can cause inaccurate PHOTO SPRESS readings Check for Gas Flow problems See Section Table 11 1 The temperature of the gas in the photometer s sample chamber is used to calculate the concentration of Os in the gas stream Incorrect sample temperature can cause inaccurate readings Possible causes of faults are Bad bench lamp heater PHOTO STEMP Failed sample temperature s
295. ther grounded objects in the work area and allows static charges to dissipate before they can build to dangerous levels Anti ESD wrist straps terminated with alligator clips are available for use in work areas where there is no available grounded plug Also anti ESD wrist straps include a current limiting resistor usually around one meg ohm that protects you should you accidentally short yourself to the instrument s power supply Simply touching a grounded piece of metal is insufficient While this may temporarily bleed off static charges present at the time once you stop touching the grounded metal new static charges will immediately begin to re build In some conditions a charge large enough to damage a component can rebuild in just a few seconds Always store sensitive components and assemblies in anti ESD storage bags or bins Even when you are not working on them store all devices and assemblies in a closed anti Static bag or bin This will prevent induced charges from building up on the device or assembly and nearby static fields from discharging through it Use metallic anti ESD bags for storing and shipping ESD sensitive components and assemblies rather than pink poly bags The famous pink poly bags are made of a plastic that is impregnated with a liquid similar to liquid laundry detergent which very slowly sweats onto the surface of the plastic creating a slightly conductive layer over the surface of the bag While this layer may
296. tion process or whenever re calibration is required The analog outputs can be calibrated automatically or adjusted manually During automatic calibration the analyzer tells the output circuitry to generate a zero mV signal and high scale point signal usually about 90 of chosen analog signal scale then measures actual signal of the output Any error at zero or high scale is corrected with a slope and offset Automatic calibration can be performed via the AOUTS CALIBRATION command or by using the CAL button located inside TEST_CHANNEL submenu By default the analyzer is configured so that calibration of TEST CHANNEL can be initiated with the AOUTS CALIBRATION command 6 9 2 1 Enabling or disabling the TEST CHANNEL Auto Cal Feature To enable or disable the Auto Cal feature for the TEST CHANNEL press From the CONFIGURATION SUBMENU See Section 6 9 1 1 DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET gt CAL EXIT NOTE TEST CHANNELS Continue pressing SET gt until you reach the configured for 0 1V full output to be configured scale should always be calibrated manually DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT 5V OVR NOCAL lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT RANGE 5V SET gt EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET gt until DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT AUTO CAL ON lt SET SET gt EDIT ENTR accepts the new setting EXIT ignores the new setting gt Toggle this key to
297. tometer slope O3 OFFSET 1000 1000 photometer offset PB Target concentration during bench span 05745 Rev C A 11 PDELTA_CAL_DUR 5 2 0 N 0 1 100 Moving average filter size in adaptive mode 1 2 1 5 5 1 1 TELEDYNE API APPENDIX A 2 Setup Variables For Serial I O Software Version C 0 M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual M703E SETUP VARIABLES FOR LATEST REVISION SETUP VARIABLE UNES SENE VALUE RANGE DESCRIPTION O3 PUMP STARTUP ON OFF ON Os pump startup enable ON enables startup zi T procedure O3 PUMP MIN FLOW LPM 2 0 4 flow rate that indicates pump is O3 PUMP TIMEOUT 30 1 180 O pump startup timeout O3 PUMP PULSE 0 5 0 1 10 pump power off pulse duration PHOTO_CYCLE 10 0 5 30 Photometer lamp temperature control cycle period PHOTO PROP 5 0 10 Photometer lamp temperature PID proportional T coefficient Photometer lamp temperature PID integral PHOTO_INTEG 0 05 0 10 coefficient PHOTO_DERIV 0 10 Photometer lamp temperature PID derivative coefficient PHOTO_FLOW_SLOPE 0 001 100 Slope term to correct photometer sample flow rate O3 DEF DRIVE 0 5000 generator default drive setting generator control mode Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface MIN CONC PPB 0 100 Os generator minimum reliable concentration Less than this is treated as zero REF DELAY generator reference feedback control
298. turn AUTO CAL DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT AUTO CAL ON ON or OFF ON OFF manual calibration mode ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT AUTO CAL OFF OFF ENTR EXIT 05744 Rev B 69 TELEDYNE API Operating the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 9 2 2 Automatic TEST CHANNEL Calibration To calibrate the outputs as a group with the AOUTS CALIBRATION command press NOTE Before performing this procedure make sure that the AUTO CAL feature is turned OFF for CONC_OUT_1 and CONC OUT 2 Make sure that the AUTO CAL feature is turned ON for the TEST CHANNEL See Section 6 9 2 1 From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU See Section 6 9 1 1 DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET gt DIAG AIO NOT AUTO CAL CONC_OUT_1 This message Analyzer appears when automatically AUTO CAL is channels for which qa channel If any of the channels have not DIAG AIO been calibrated ot if at least one channel has AUTO CAL turned SET gt CAL OFF this message will read NO CAL AOUTS CALIBRATED YES NOTE Manual calibration should be used for the 0 1V range or in cases where the outputs must be closely matched to the characteristics of the recording device 70 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator To initiate an automatic calibration f
299. ual To use the M703E as a photometer press Make sure that the M703E is in STANDBY mode DO NOT Press the GEN button Toggle these keys until PASSWORD 717 Press the XZRO Key if using an External Generator DO NOT Press the ZERO or SPAN buttons Doing so will cause the instrument to recalculate it internal SLOPE and OFFSET Make sure that the ACT test function is displayed in the message field ACT STANDBY GEN STBY SEQ PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE O3 GAS CONFIG PHOT O3 GAS CONFIG BCAL DARK 03 PHOTOMETER BENCH CAL BENCH CAL XZRO XZRO The ACT function in the BCAL XZRO ACT 403 4 PPB O3 message field displays the Os concentration of the ZERO source gas EE When finished measuring the external O3 source press EXIT 03 PHOTOMETER BENCH CAL EXIT Continue pressing EXIT until ACT STANDBY GEN STBY SEQ 78 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M703E Calibrator 6 12 SETUP gt LVL SETTING UP AND USING LEADS DASIBI OPERATING LEVELS 6 12 1 GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT LEADS LEVELS The 7 calibrator can be equipped with a version of firmware that includes support for LEADS a data collection and analysis system LEADS specifically designed for handling meteorological and environmental data particularly when there is a need to integrate data and control instrumentation from several different manufacturers Wh
300. ubcomponents act as peripheral devices operated by the CPU the motherboard Sensor signals such as the UV lamp thermistor are routed to the motherboard where they are digitized Digital data is sent by the motherboard to the calibrators CPU and where required stored in either flash memory or on the CPU s disk on chip Commands from the CPU are sent to the motherboard and forwarded to the various devices via the calibrator s bus 152 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation MOTHER BOARD PC 104 CPU Card Generator Input Pressure Sensor Disk on Chip Flash Chip PC 104 Bus AID Converter Generator UV Lamp Temperature Generator Reference Detector Generator Lamp Heater sjnduj I0sueg lC Bus Generator Lamp Supply O3 Generator RELAY PCA status Yow LED Figure 9 15 Generator Electronic Block Diagram r UV Lamp Generator Heater Control PCA UV Lamp Power Supply 200 30 kHz UV Lamp Power Supply Reference Detector Transformer Preamp Power Connector Reference Detector Signal Output to Motherboard UV Lamp Th Power Connector S UV Lamp N C Connector O Generator Reference Detector O Generator Reference Detector PCA Figure 9 16 Generator Electronic Compone
301. ure of Os generator UV Lamp 1 reference detector output Os generator reference detector WARNING 1 has dropped below 50 mV generator lamp power supply bus The photometer pump Failed Pump PUMP WARNING failed to turn on within the specified timeout period default 30 sec Problem with Relay PCA 12 VDC power supply problem PHOTO LAMP TEMP WARNING The photometer lamp temp is 51 C or 61 C Possible failure of Bench lamp heater Bench lamp temperature sensor Relay controlling the bench heater Entire Relay PCA Bus Hot Lamp PHOTO LAMP STABILITY WARNING Value output during the Photometer s reference cycle changes from measurements to measurement more than 2596 of the time Faulty UV source lamp Noisy UV detector Faulty UV lamp power supply Faulty 15 VDC power supply PHOTO REFERENCE WARNING Occurs when Ref is 2500 mVDC or gt 4950 mVDC Possible failure of UV Lamp UV Photo Detector Preamp REAR BOARD NOT DET Mother Board not detected on power up THIS WARNING only appears on Serial I O Port s Front Panel Display will be frozen blank or will not respond Failure of Mother Board table continued 05744 Rev B 179 TELEDYNE API General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operators Manual Table 11 1 Front Panel Warning Messages cont WARNIN
302. ved by pressing the ENTER key BS Erases one character to the left of the backspace cursor location ESC Erases the entire command line escape ID CR This command prints a complete list of available commands along with the definitions of their functionality to the display device of the terminal or computer being used The ID number of the calibrator is only necessary if multiple calibrators are on the same communications line such as the multi drop setup Control C Pauses the listing of commands Control P Restarts the listing of commands 05744 Rev B 95 TELEDYNE API Operating The M703E over the Serial I O Ports M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual 7 1 7 2 Command Syntax Commands are not case sensitive and all arguments within one command i e ID numbers keywords data values etc must be separated with a space character All Commands follow the syntax X ID COMMAND lt CR gt Where is the command type one letter that defines the type of command Allowed designators are listed in Table 6 27 and Appendix A 6 ID is the machine identification number Section 7 1 6 Example the Command 200 followed by a carriage return would print the list of available commands for the revision of software currently installed in the instrument assigned ID Number 200 COMMAND is the command designator This string is the name of the command being issued LIST ABORT NAME EXIT etc Some commands
303. voltage or control signal The specific parameter will vary depending on the situation Make sure that GEN STBY SEQ THE M703 is in standby mode SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS FLOW DIAG SETUP ENTER PASSWORD 818 ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD SIGNAL EXIT DAIG I O 0 ST_SYSTEM_OK OFF Use the PREV and PREV NEXT EDIT PRNT EXIT NEXT keys to cycle through the available signals DAIG 1 ST_CAL_ACTIVE OFF Use the JUMP key to go directly to a specific signal see Appendix A for a list DAIG JUMPTO 0 of all SIGNALS PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT JUMP ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to set No of the signal to JUMP to JUMPTO 7 JUMP ENTR EXIT DAIG I O 7 PHOTO REF VALVE OFF PREV NEXT JUMP OFF PRNT EXI On status signals this Pressing the PRNT key will send a key toggles the signal formatted printout to the serial port ON OFF 5 and can be captured with a computer or other output device Figure 11 1 Example of Signal I O Function 182 05744 RevB TELEDYNE API M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator 11 2 USING THE ANALOG OUTPUT TEST CHANNEL The signals available for output over the M703E s analog output channel can also b
304. xture Locations 152 Figure 9 15 Generator Electronic Block 153 Figure 9 16 Generator Electronic Components Location 153 Figure 9 17 Generator Temperature Thermistor and DC Heater 154 Figure 9 18 Photometer Gas Flow Measure 157 Figure 9 19 Photometer Gas Flow Reference 157 Figure 9 20 Photometer Absorption Path RETA emen nene nnne enne 158 Figure 9 21 Photometer Layout Top Cover nnns 159 Figure 9 22 Photometer Electronic Block 160 Figure 10 2 Pneumatic setup for performing Pressure Leak Checks 170 Figure 10 3 Photometer Location of UV Detector Gain Adjustment UV Lamp Set Screw 173 viii 05744 Rev B TELEDYNE API Figure 10 4 Figure 10 5 Figure 11 1 Figure 11 2 Figure 11 3 Figure 11 4 Figure 11 5 Figure 12 1 M703E Calibrator Operator s Manual Table of Contents Generator Temperature Thermistor and DC Heater 174 Location of Generator Reference Detector Adjustment
305. y that the analog output is working properly connect a voltmeter to the output in question and perform an analog output step test as follows Make sure that the M70OE is in standby mode Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD Performs analog output step test 096 to 10096 Pressing the key under 0 pause the test Brackets will appear around the value EXAMPLE 2096 Pressing the same key again will resume the test GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU O3 MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM DIAG ENTER PASSWORD ENTR e e SIGNAL I O PREV NEXT ANALOG OUTPUT 10 ANALOG OUTPUT 10 EXIT 05744 Rev B 191 TELEDYNE API General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M703E Calibrator M703E Calibrator Operators Manual For each of the steps the output should be within 1 of the nominal value listed in the table below except for the 0 step which should be within OmV 2 to 3 mV Make sure you take into account any offset that may have been programmed into channel See Section 6 9 1 5 Table 11 9 Analog Output Test Function Nominal Values Voltage Outputs FULL SCALE OUTPUT OF VOLTAGE RANGE see Section 6 9 1 3 100MV 1V 5V 10V STEP NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 20 20 mV 0 2 1 2 3 40 40 mV 0 4 2 4 4 60 60 mV 0 6 3 6 5 80 80 mV 0 8 4 8 6 100 100 mV 1 0 5 10 If one or more of the ste

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

With FLEXI-GUARD® Installation, Care & Use Manual Manual de  P/No. : MFL37554803 - Appliance Factory Parts    S51 AVR USB Programmer  HP ProBook 6545b Notebook PC    1 - psn-web.net  Ergotron 100 Series Double Pivot  NI USB-6008/6009 User Guide and Specifications  Elgento E20012R toaster  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file